BC 5500

BC-5500
Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
Copyright
2007 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This
manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any
license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume
any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual
in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China

and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial
purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable
for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
I
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or
other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from
the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved
by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray,
the following procedure should be followed:
1. Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a
Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must appear on
the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if the
Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial number, and
a brief description of the reason for return;
2. Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is
shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges);
3. Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by
Customer Service department.
III
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,
Address:
Nanshan,ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Phone: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
IV
Table of Contents
Copyright I
Warranty.............................................................................................................. III
Return Policy....................................................................................................... III
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................... 1
1 Using this Manual ......................................................................................1-1

1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual ............................................................. 1-2
1.3 How to Find Information ......................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual ......................................................... 1-4
1.5 Special Terms Used in This Manual ....................................................... 1-5
1.6 Symbols ................................................................................................. 1-6
2 System Structure .......................................................................................2-1

2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Fluidic system ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Hardware system ................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Main Structure ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.5 Software structure ................................................................................ 2-11
2.5.1 Menu structure .......................................................................... 2-11
2.5.2 Passwords ................................................................................. 2-25
3 System Installation and Software Upgrade .............................................3-1

3.1 Packing Check and Unpacking .............................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Check before Unpacking ............................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Unpacking the Main Unit Box ...................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Unpacking the Pneumatic Unit Box ............................................ 3-4
3.1.4 Unpacking the Autoloader Box .................................................... 3-6
3.1.5 Checking the Packing List ........................................................... 3-7
3.2 Space Requirements .............................................................................. 3-8
3.3 Removing the Auxiliary Fixing Components .......................................... 3-9
3.3.1 Removing the Fixing Screws at the Bottom of the Pneumatic Unit3-9
3.3.2 Removing the Adhesive Tapes Fixing the Stop Bar of the Front
Cover 3-9
3.3.3 Removing the Plastic Cable Tie Fixing the Wipe Block ............ 3-10
3.3.4 Removing the Plastic Cable Tie Fixing the Cylinder ................. 3-10
3.3.5 Removing the Adhesive Tapes Fixing the Communication Cable
1
Table of Contents
of the Autoloader .................................................................................. 3-11

3.4 Installing the Autoloader ....................................................................... 3-12
3.4.1 Installing the Stop Bars ............................................................. 3-12
3.4.2 Connecting the Communication Cable ..................................... 3-12
3.4.3 Installing the Autoloader ............................................................ 3-13
3.5 Removing the Adapters from the Tube Rack ....................................... 3-14
3.6 Connecting the Reagent and Waste Container ................................... 3-15
3.7 Connecting the Pneumatic Unit ........................................................... 3-16
3.8 Connecting the Optional Equipment .................................................... 3-17
3.9 Connecting to the Power Source ......................................................... 3-17
3.10 Starting the Analyzer ............................................................................ 3-18
3.10.1 Check before Starting the Analyzer ........................................... 3-18
3.10.2 Initial Start-up ............................................................................ 3-18
3.11 Debugging the Analyzer ....................................................................... 3-21
3.11.1 Background Test........................................................................ 3-21
3.11.2 HGB Blank Voltage Adjustment................................................. 3-21
3.11.3 Adjusting the autoloader position .............................................. 3-22
3.11.4 Optical system gain tuning ........................................................ 3-29
3.12 Software Upgrade ................................................................................ 3-32
4 Fluidic System ............................................................................................4-1

4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Probes ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Probe Wipes ................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.3 Pumps ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.4 Valves .......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.5 Reservoir and Waste Chamber ................................................... 4-4
4.1.6 Baths ........................................................................................... 4-4
4.2 Introduction of Pneumatic Parts ............................................................. 4-5
4.2.1 Air system.................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 Functions of pressure .................................................................. 4-5
4.2.3 Valves .......................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Filters ........................................................................................... 4-6
4.3 Fluidic System ........................................................................................ 4-7
4.3.1 Reagent volume required ............................................................ 4-7
4.3.2 Fluidic System Drawing ............................................................... 4-8
4.3.3 WBC Channel ............................................................................. 4-9
4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel ..................................................................... 4-10
4.3.5 HGB Channel ............................................................................ 4-11
4.3.6 Priming/Discharging Channel.................................................... 4-11
4.3.7 Sampling Channel ..................................................................... 4-12
4.3.8 Cleanser Soaking ...................................................................... 4-12
4.4 Introduction of Basic Sequences ......................................................... 4-13
4.4.1 Sequence of OV-WB Measurement .......................................... 4-13
2
Table of Contents
4.4.2 Sequence of OVPD Measurement.......................................... 4-19

4.4.3 Sequence of CTWB Measurement ......................................... 4-19
4.4.4 Sequence of AL-WB Measurement ........................................... 4-20
4.5 Sample Dilution Process ...................................................................... 4-21
4.5.1 Flow Chart of Whole Blood Dilution .......................................... 4-21
4.5.2 Flow Chart of Pre-dilution.......................................................... 4-22
5 Hardware System .......................................................................................5-1

5.1 Main board ............................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1 Introduction.................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.2 Board Composition ...................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points ....................................................... 5-13
5.1.4 Replacement and Connection ................................................... 5-15
5.1.5 Troubleshooting......................................................................... 5-17
5.2 Signal Processing Board ...................................................................... 5-20
5.2.1 Introduction................................................................................ 5-20
5.2.2 Board Composition .................................................................... 5-20
5.3 Driver Board ......................................................................................... 5-36
5.3.1 Introduction................................................................................ 5-36
5.4 Power Board ........................................................................................ 5-80
5.4.1 Introduction................................................................................ 5-80
5.5 Interface Board..................................................................................... 5-89
5.5.1 Introduction................................................................................ 5-89
5.6 Indicator Board ..................................................................................... 5-96
5.6.1 Introduction................................................................................ 5-96
5.7 Touchscreen Control Board ................................................................. 5-99
5.7.1 Introduction................................................................................ 5-99
3
Table of Contents
5.7.3 Adjustment and Test Points ..................................................... 5-101

5.7.4 Replacement and Connection ................................................. 5-102
5.7.5 Troubleshooting....................................................................... 5-103
5.8 Pneumatic Control Board ................................................................... 5-104
5.8.1 Introduction.............................................................................. 5-104
5.8.2 Board Composition .................................................................. 5-104
5.9 Pre-amplification Board, Laser Control Board and Volumetric Board . 5-111
5.9.1 Introduction............................................................................... 5-111
5.9.2 Board composition ................................................................... 5-111
5.9.3 Description ............................................................................... 5-111
5.9.4 Adjustment and test points ...................................................... 5-116
5.9.5 Replacement and connection ................................................. 5-119
5.10 Sample Detecting Board .................................................................... 5-131
5.10.1 Introduction.............................................................................. 5-131
5.10.2 Board Composition .................................................................. 5-131
5.10.3 Adjustment and Test Points ..................................................... 5-134
6 Maintenance ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1 General .................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Disassembling the Panels ...................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Removing the Left Door .............................................................. 6-2
6.2.2 Removing the Right Door ............................................................ 6-3
6.2.3 Opening the Upper Cover ........................................................... 6-4
6.2.4 Removing the Top Cover ............................................................. 6-5
6.2.5 Removing the Lower Cover......................................................... 6-6
6.3 Replacing the Power Supply Assembly ............................................... 6-17
6.3.1 Purpose ..................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.2 Tools .......................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.3 Removal .................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.4 Installation ................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.5 Verification ................................................................................. 6-20
6.4 Replacing the Touchscreen Assembly ................................................. 6-20
6.4.1 Purpose ..................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.2 Tools .......................................................................................... 6-21
6.4.3 Removal .................................................................................... 6-21
6.4.4 Installation ................................................................................. 6-24
6.4.5 Verification ................................................................................. 6-24
6.5 Replacing the Fluidic Components ...................................................... 6-25
6.5.1 Replacing the Air Valve Assembly ............................................. 6-25
4
Table of Contents
6.5.2 Replacing the Regulating Valve Assembly ................................ 6-31

6.5.3 Replacing the Pinch Valve Assembly ........................................ 6-34
6.5.4 Replacing the Valve/Pump Assembly ....................................... 6-37
6.5.5 Replacing the Fluidic Pump Assembly ...................................... 6-40
6.5.6 Replacing the Syringe Assembly .............................................. 6-42
6.5.7 Replacing the Reservoir Assembly ........................................... 6-48
6.5.8 Replacing the WC1 Assembly ................................................... 6-51
6.5.9 Replacing the WC2 Assembly ................................................... 6-54
6.5.10 Replacing the Metering Tube Assembly .................................... 6-57
6.6 Replacing the RBC Assembly .............................................................. 6-62
6.6.1 Replacing the RBC Bath Assembly ........................................... 6-62
6.6.2 Replacing the Premix Bath Assembly ....................................... 6-71
6.7 Replacing the HGB Bath Assembly ..................................................... 6-75
6.7.1 Purpose ..................................................................................... 6-75
6.7.2 Tools .......................................................................................... 6-75
6.7.3 Removal .................................................................................... 6-75
6.7.4 Installation ................................................................................. 6-78
6.7.5 Verification ................................................................................. 6-78
6.8 Replacing the WBC Bath Assembly ..................................................... 6-79
6.8.1 Purpose ..................................................................................... 6-79
6.8.2 Toolss ........................................................................................ 6-79
6.8.3 Removal .................................................................................... 6-79
6.8.4 Installation ................................................................................. 6-83
6.8.5 Verification ................................................................................. 6-84
6.9 Replacing the Reagent Preheating Assembly ..................................... 6-85
6.9.1 Purpose ..................................................................................... 6-85
6.9.2 Toolss ........................................................................................ 6-85
6.9.3 Removal .................................................................................... 6-85
6.9.4 Installation ................................................................................. 6-87
6.9.5 Verification ................................................................................. 6-87
6.10 Replacing the Open Vial Sampling/SRV Assembly ............................. 6-88
6.10.1 Purpose ..................................................................................... 6-88
6.10.2 Toolss ........................................................................................ 6-88
6.10.3 Removal .................................................................................... 6-88
6.10.4 Installation ................................................................................. 6-98
6.10.5 Verification ............................................................................... 6-106
6.11 Replacing the autoloader assembly ................................................... 6-107
6.11.1 Replacing the sample transmitting assembly.......................... 6-107
6.11.2 Replacing the closed-tube sampling assembly ....................... 6-120
6.12 Replacing the autosampler and auto-mixer assemblies .................... 6-128
6.12.1 Purpose ................................................................................... 6-128
6.12.2 Toolss ...................................................................................... 6-128
6.12.3 Removal .................................................................................. 6-128
6.12.4 Installation ............................................................................... 6-139
5
Table of Contents
6.12.5 Verification ............................................................................... 6-146

6.13 Replacing the Pneumatic unit ............................................................ 6-147
6.13.1 Purpose ................................................................................... 6-147
6.13.2 Toolss ...................................................................................... 6-147
6.13.3 Removal .................................................................................. 6-147
6.13.4 Installation ............................................................................... 6-154
6.13.5 Verification ............................................................................... 6-155
6.14 Replacing the Ambient Temperature Sensor ..................................... 6-156
6.14.1 Purpose ................................................................................... 6-156
6.14.2 Toolss ...................................................................................... 6-156
6.14.3 Removal .................................................................................. 6-156
6.14.4 Installation ............................................................................... 6-157
6.14.5 Verification ............................................................................... 6-157
6.15 Replacing the Blood Sensor .............................................................. 6-158
6.15.1 Purpose ................................................................................... 6-158
6.15.2 Toolss ...................................................................................... 6-158
6.15.3 Removal .................................................................................. 6-158
6.15.4 Installation ............................................................................... 6-159
6.15.5 Verification ............................................................................... 6-159
6.16 Optical system adjustment and troubleshooting ................................ 6-160
6.16.1 Purpose ................................................................................... 6-160
6.16.2 Toolss ...................................................................................... 6-160
6.16.3 Removal and installation ......................................................... 6-160
6.16.4 Adjustment .............................................................................. 6-168
7 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................7-1
7.1 Error code .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Errors indicated by error messages ....................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 Pressure errors ........................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Reagent errors ............................................................................ 7-8
7.2.3 Hardware errors .......................................................................... 7-9
7.2.4 Measurement errors .................................................................... 7-9
7.2.5 Temperature errors .................................................................... 7-10
7.2.6 Scattergram errors .................................................................... 7-11
7.2.7 Troubleshooting special errors .................................................. 7-14
8 Appendices .................................................................................................8-1
6
1 Using this Manual
1.1 Introduction
The chapter explains how to use the BC-5500 service manual. This manual provides the
reference information and procedures needed in servicing the BC-5500. Before servicing the
BC-5500, read and understand the manual carefully for servicing the equipment properly and
for your safety.
This manual is to be used in conjunction with the operation manual of BC-5500. It does not
contain information and procedures already covered in the operation manual of BC-5500.
Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

manual and the operation manual.
1-1
Using this Manual
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual
To use this manual effectively, you need the following:

An operators knowledge of the BC-5500 auto hematology analyzer
A thorough understanding of -
Basic electronic and pneumatic principles and devices
Reagent systems
Quality control
Troubleshooting concepts
The ability to -
Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology
Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope
Read pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology
Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology
1-2
Using this Manual
1.3 How to Find Information
This operation manual comprises 7 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to
find the information you need.
If you want to See

learn about the system structure and the basic
Chapter 2 System Structure
principle of BC-5500
learn about the installation requirements and how Chapter 3 System Installation and
to upgrade the BC-5500 software Software Upgrade
learn about the fluidic system Chapter 4 Fluidic System
learn about the hardware system Chapter 5 Hardware System
learn about how to maintain the BC-5500 Chapter 6 Maintenance
learn about how to troubleshoot the common
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
errors of the BC-5500
learn about the main spare parts of the BC-5500 Appendix A List of Spare parts
learn about the main wearing parts of the
Appendix B List of Wearing Parts
BC-5500
learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic
Appendix C Fluidic Diagram
system of the BC-5500
learn about the function of each valve and pump Appendix D Pump and Valve
of the BC-5500 Function Table
learn about the tubing connection of the BC-5500 Appendix E Tubing
1-3
Using this Manual
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:
all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (either on the pop-up keyboard or
the external keyboard), such as [ENTER].
all capital, bold and italic letters indicate a special operation defined in the following
section, such as CLICK.
bold letters included in indicate text you can find on the screen, such as Clean.
bold letters indicate chapter titles, such as Chapter 1 Using This Manual.
All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily
reflect your analyzer setup or data displayed.
1-4
Using this Manual
1.5 Special Terms Used in This Manual
When you read It means
to press the desired item lightly with your finger; or

CLICK
to left-CLICK it with a mouse.
to CLICK the desired edit box and use the external keyboard
or the pop-up keyboard to enter the desired characters or
ENTER
digits; or
to scan the number in using the bar-code scanner.
to move the cursor to the character or digit to the left of the

one you want to delete and press [DEL]; or
DELETE to move the cursor to the character or digit to the right of the
one you want to delete and press [BackSpace] (or the []
key at the upper right corner of the pop-up keyboard).
to CLICK the appropriate arrow button to move the scroll bar;

or
to CLICK and hold the mouse down while dragging the scroll
DRAG SCROLL BAR
bar until the desired information is displayed; or
to CLICK and rest your finger there while dragging the scroll
bar until the desired information is displayed.
to CLICK the down arrow button of the desired box to display

the pull-down list (and DRAG SCROLL BAR) to browse and then
SELECT from **
CLICK the desired item; or
pull-down list
to press the keys ([][][PageUp][PageDown]) to browse the
current list and press [ENTER] to select the desired item.
1-5
Using this Manual
1.6 Symbols
You will find the following symbols in this manual.
When you see Then
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.

alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.

alerting you to information that requires your attention.
read the statement below the symbol . The statement is

alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
When you see It means
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

DOCUMENTS.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING, LASER BEAM
WARNING, HOT SURFACE
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
1-6
Using this Manual
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
BATCH CODE
USE BY
SERIAL NUMBER
CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)
USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD) (FOR

CONTROLS)
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
MANUFACTURER
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
IRRITATING SUBSTANCE
THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE

WEEE LABEL APPLIES TO EU MEMBER
STATES ONLY: THE USE OF THIS
1-7
Using this Manual
SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS

PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED
AS HOUSEHOLD WASTE. BY ENSURING
THAT THIS PRODUCT IS DISPOSED OF
CORRECTLY, YOU WILL HELP PREVENT
BRINGING POTENTIAL NEGATIVE
CONSEQUENCES TO THE
ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN HEALTH.
FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION
WITH REGARD TO RETURNING AND
RECYCLING THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE
CONSULT THE DISTRIBUTOR FROM
WHOM YOU PURCHASED THE
PRODUCT.
Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours
when you are servicing the analyzer.
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached

to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to
electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access
electronic components.
Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs
and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, clipper and piercer.
Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.
Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.
1-8
Using this Manual
according to government regulations.
The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.
Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer

strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer
carefully after the maintenance.
For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray

customer service department for maintenance advice.
To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.
Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an
ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.
Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.
The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-9
2 System Structure
2.1 Introduction
Hardware
Hardware collects signals, controls and drives moving parts, and processes and displays
information. It mainly consists of the main board, driver board, signal processing board and
power board.
Interface
Multiple interfaces of the BC-5500 facilitate data processing and different fitting connections.
They are 4 USB interfaces, 1 network interface, 1 pneumatic unit control interface and 1
reserved interface. USB interfaces are provided for the external mouse, keyboard, printer,
barcode scanner or USB flash drive, and for upgrading the software. The network interface
with built-in network card can be networked and upgrade the software.
Software operating environment
System software consists of boot software, operating system and application software. The
boot software and the operating system are stored in the FLASH chip of the main board, and
the application software is stored in the hard disk. The boot software mainly deals with: (1)
configuring address space; (2) initializing the system memory. The operating system
initializes resource of the CPU board and provides the operating system environment for the
application software. The application software provides an interactive operating interface.
Fluidic system
The fluidic system indicates the tubing where reagents, samples and air pass in the analyzer.
With each fluidic part jointed correspondingly, the fluidic system controls the fluidic parts in a
set sequence through software and driver hardware, which controls the dispatch and flow of
medium.
2-1
System Structure
2.2 Fluidic system

Refer to Chapter 4 Fluidic System in this manual.
2.3 Hardware system

Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System in this manual.
2.4 Main Structure

BC-5500 AUTO HEMATOLOGY ANALYZER consists of the main unit (analyzer), pneumatic
unit and accessories.
Figure 2-1 Front of the Analyzer
1Touch screen 2Power button
3Power indicator 4Sample probe

5Aspirate key
2-2
System Structure
Figure 2-2 Front of the analyzer (Closed tube sampler configured)
5Aspirate key 6Sample compartment door
7Adapter
2-3
System Structure
Figure 2-3 Front of the Analyzer (Autoloader Configured)

5Aspirate key 6Tube
7Tube rack 8Autoloader
2-4
System Structure
Figure 2-4 Back of the Analyzer
1USB interfaces 2Reserved interface
3Pneumatic unit control interface 4Network interface
5Vacuum interface 6Pressure interface
7M-50 cleanser sensor connector 8Waste sensor connector

9M-50 cleanser inlet 10Waste outlet
11M-50D diluent inlet 12M-50D diluent sensor connector
13M-50LBA Lyse inlet 14M-50LBA Lyse sensor connector

15M-50LEOLyse inlet 16 M-50LEO Lyse sensor
connector
17 M-50LEO Lyse sensor 18M-50LEOLyse inlet

connector
19M-50LH Lyse inlet 20M-50LH Lyse sensor connector
2-5
System Structure
Figure 2-5 Inside front of the analyzer (front cover removed)
1RBC & HGB bath assemblies 2Stop bar assembly of front cover
3WBC bath assembly 4RBC premix bath assembly
5Photocoupler protective assembly 6 Open vial sampling & SRV

of front cover assembly
7START switch assembly 8Syringe assembly
2-6
System Structure
Figure 2-6 Inside front of the analyzer (front cover removed, piercing and mixing
assembly configured)
1RBC & HGB bath assemblies 2Stop bar assembly of front cover
3WBC bath assembly 4RBC premix bath assembly
5Photocoupler protective assembly 6 Open vial sampling & SRV

of front cover assembly
7START switch assembly 8Syringe assembly
9Piercing and mixing assembly
2-7
System Structure
Figure 2-7 Inside right of the analyzer (Right Door Removed)
1Optical system 2 Valves & metering pumps

assemblies
3 Reservoirs & waste chamber 4Waste 5-way assembly

assemblies
5Pinch valve assembly 6Fluidic pump assembly
7Reagent preheating assembly
2-8
System Structure
Figure 2-8 Inside right of the analyzer (Left Door Removed)
1Power assembly 7Fan
2Interface board 8Hard disk assembly
3Filter 9Main board & signal board

assembly
4Air valve assembly 10Stop bar assembly of PCB

5Regulator assembly 11Volumetric tube assembly
6Driver board assembly
2-9
System Structure
Figure 2-9 Front of the Pneumatic Unit
1Relief valve 2Operation indicator
2-10
System Structure
2.5 Software structure
The software system consists of three parts: boot software, operating system and application
software. Loaded automatically by the hardware, the boot software runs its code in the
FLASH to configure the address space and initialize the system memory. The operating
system initializes the source in the CPU board, loads the application software and finally
allows the application software to control the CPU. The application software obtains source
data from the external hard disk, runs code in the SDRAM and provides the functions of count,
setting, quality control, maintenance, data management, assistance and help. According to
the basic fluidic unit control sequence, the application software sends control command to the
relevant fluidic unit at the designated time to finish a complete fluidic control function.
2.5.1 Menu structure

Main screen
There are 8 function icons at the main screen. CLICK any icon to enter the desired function
screen. See Figure 2-10 for the menu structure.
Main
Calibratio Setu Shutdow

Service Count Review QC Logout
n p n
Figure 2-10 Menu structure at the main screen
Count screen
The count screen consists of 4 parts: status area, analysis result and information area of the
current sample, information display area of the next sample and the function icon area.
CLICK icons at the count screen to realize the desired functions.
See Figure 2-11 for the menu structure at the count screen.
2-11
System Structure
Count Main
Mode
Sample list
Work list
Open vial & Close tube
Count
Work listBarcode/No
Autoloader & Close
barcode
tube
Autoloader
STATAutoloader/
Open doorClose tube
Diluent
Predilute mode
Print
Review
Background
Clean
Unclog
Adjustment
RUO
Figure 2-11 Menu structure at the count screen
Review screen
Sample information can be reviewed in two modes: table review and graph review. When you
enter the review screen from other screens, the table review screen is the default screen. The
menu structure of each screen is shown below:
2-12
System Structure
Table review
See Figure 2-12 for the table review menu structure.
Table Main
Count
Table CV
Graph Delete
Search Trend
Select Export
Print OpAdjust
Com.
Edit
Figure 2-12 Menu structure of table review
Graph review
The graph review menu structure is shown below.
2-13
System Structure
Graph Main
Count
Table
Graph
Print
Edit
RUO
Adjust His
Special
Figure 2-13 Menu structure of graph review
QC screen
The BC-5500 provides 2 QC programs: L-J QC and X-B QC. When you enter the QC screen
from other screens, the L-J QC screen is the default screen.
L-J QC
See Figure 2-14 for the L-J QC menu structure.
2-14
System Structure
L-J QC Main
Count
L-J QC Setting
X-B QC Count
Print Graph
Table
Figure 2-14 Menu structure of L-J QC
X-B QC
See Figure 2-15 for the X-B QC menu structure.
X-B QC Main
Count
L-J QC
X-B QC Setting
Print Graph
Table
Figure 2-15 Menu structure of X-B QC
Service screen
The service screen consists of programs of maintenance, status, self-test, log, debugging
and initialization. When you enter the service screen from other screens, the maintain screen
2-15
System Structure
is the default screen.
Maintain screen
See Figure 2-16 for the menu structure of the maintain screen.
Service Main
Count
Maintain R/P
Status Clean
Self-test Maintenance
Log Overall
Init. Upgrade
Debug
Figure 2-16 Menu structure of maintain screen
Status screen
See Figure 2-17 for the menu structure of the status screen.
2-16
System Structure
Service Main
Count
Maintain
Status Version
Self-test Temp&Pres
Log Vol.&Cur.
Init. Position
Debug Func. Set
Figure 2-17 Menu structure of status screen
Self-test screen
See Figure 2-18 for the menu structure of the self-test screen.
2-17
System Structure
Service Main
Count
Maintain
Status Dobber
Self-test Mechanical
Log Circuit
Init. Valve
Debug Touchscreen
T&P Cal.
Figure 2-18 Menu structure of the self-test screen
Log screen
See Figure 2-19 for the menu structure of the log screen.
2-18
System Structure
Service Main
Count
Maintain
Status
Self-test
Log All
Init. Set paras
Debug Others
Error Info.
RunSequence
Figure 2-19 Menu structure of the log screen
Debug screen
See Figure 2-20 for the menu structure of the debug screen.
2-19
System Structure
Service Main
Count
Maintain
Status
Self-test
Log
Init.
Debug Import data
Wipe block
Mix unit
Figure 2-20 Menu structure of the debug screen
Initialization screen
See Figure 2-21 for the menu structure of the initialization screen.
2-20
System Structure
Service Main
Count
Maintain
Status
Self-test
Log
Init. Set init.
Debug Runs init.
Figure 2-21 Menu structure of the initialization screen
Setup screen
Setup screen consists of user, setting and advanced. When you enter the setup screen from
other screen, the setting screen is the default screen.
Setting
See Figure 2-22 for the menu structure of the setting screen.
2-21
System Structure
Setting Main
Count
User
Setting Date/Time
Advanced Assistance
RBC count time
Ref. range
Ref. unit
Reagent
Print
Com.
Autoloader (for autoloader

mode)
Gain
Barcode (for autoloader

mode)
Code
Figure 2-22 Menu structure of the setting screen
2-22
System Structure
Advanced
See Figure 2-23 for the menu structure of the advanced screen.
Advanced Main
Count
User
Setting
Advanced Service
Figure 2-23 Menu structure of the advanced screen
User
See Figure 2-24 for the menu structure of the user screen.
User Main
New (for administrator and

Count level above)
Delete (for administrator and

User level above)
Setting Modify
Advanced
Figure 2-24 Menu structure of the user screen
2-23
System Structure
Calibration screen
Calibration Main
Count
Manual
Calibrator
Blood
History
Print
Figure 2-25 Menu structure of the calibration screen
2-24
System Structure
2.5.2 Passwords
The password levels consist of the level of common user, administrator and service engineer.
An administrator has all authorities of a common user, and a service engineer has all
authorities of an administrator. Table 2-1 below introduces functions open for each password
level.
Table 2-1 Functions for each password level
Level Function Function screen Functions allowed

module
Common Count Count Switch count mode, edit information of
user next sample, count, add diluent, print
current sample record, background
count, unclog, clean, autoload, STAT,
search RUO.
Review Table review Browse sample record, edit sample
information (sample ID cannot be
modified), CV, trend, select sample
data, search sample data, print
sample data, goto.
Graph review Edit sample information, print sample
data, RUO.
L-J QC Setting, count, graph, table
QC X-B QC Setting and control, graph, table
Browse and print the manual
Calibration Manual calibration results
Setup User User management (modify user name
and password of current user and
information of operator)
Setting Date & Time, assistance, reagent exp.
Date
Service Self-test Mechanical, valve, circuit.
Log Include all, set para., others, cannot
read the error information and
sequence record in all records.
Status Version, Temp & Pres, vol. & Cur.,
position and Func. set
Maintain R/P, clean, maintain, overall
2-25
System Structure

module
Administrator Count Count Adjust hist.
Review Table review 1. Delete sample data (set in the
setup screen that administrator is
allowed to delete).
2. Modify sample ID.
3. Review sample data.
Graph review 1. Adjust histogram.
2. Modify sample ID.
3. Review sample data.
Calibration Modify and print the calibration factor

Manual of OV-WB, OV-PD
Calibrator OV-WB, OV-PD calibrator calibration
Blood OV-WB, OV-PD blood calibration
History Browse and print calibration history.
Setup User 1. Add user
2. Delete user
3. Modify user information
Setting Print device parameter, on-line

communication parameter, report
print, stop condition of autoloader
(autoloader configured), gain (HGB
setting), Reference range (general,
man, woman, child, neonate,
customized items), reference unit,
RBC count time, code of department
and doctor, tube barcode (autoloader
configured).
Service Init. Reference unit, reference range, print
device information.
Self-test Touchscreen calibration
Log Display All, Set paras., Others and
Error info., cannot read sequence
record and log of the service engineer
and level above.
2-26
System Structure

module
Service Count Count /
engineer Review Table review 1. Export data to USB flash drive
(data export and scattergram
export).
2. Review and print reproducibility

and trend graph.
3. Delete sample data.
Graph review Display and print special sample

information
Calibration Modify calibration factors of OV-WB,
OV-PD and correlation coefficients of
Manual AL-WB or CT-WB.
OV-WB and OV-PD calibration,
calibrate correlation coefficients of
Calibrator AL-WB or CT-WB.
Setup Advanced\Service 1. Write in Flash automatically.
engineer
2. Language.
3. Serial number.
4. RBC volumetric Tube volume
5. Authority of sample record

deletion.
Gain Current values of all gains.

Service Log 1. Display log type All, Set paras,
Other, Error info., RunsSequence
and all logs.
2. Export log by USB flash drive.
Status 1. Read version information of

installation CD and algorithm at
version screen.
2. Display temperature PID data

display formats Kp, Ti, Td, T, SP at
the Temp & Pres screen.
Self-test Calibrate temperature and pressure

Init. Read and initialize Run init..
Debug 1. Import data by USB flash drive.
2. Debug probe wipe.
2-27
System Structure
3. Debug mix unit.

Maintain Software upgrade (USB flash drive
upgrade).
2-28
3 System Installation and Software
Upgrade
3.1 Packing Check and Unpacking

3.1.1 Check before Unpacking
1. Before unpacking, check whether the packing boxes are in good condition.
2. The AL analyzer has three packing boxes: main unit box, pneumatic unit box, and
autoloader box.
3. Each of the OV and CT analyzers has two packing boxes: main unit box and pneumatic
unit box.
3.1.2 Unpacking the Main Unit Box

Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the main unit box. To unpack this box, do as follows:
Paper top cover
Packing tapes
Figure 3-1 Main unit box
1. Cut off the packing tapes.
2. After removing the packing tapes, lift the paper top cover. You can see the wood top plate
protecting the main unit, as shown in Figure 3-2.
3-1
System Installation and Software Upgrade
Wood top plate
Figure 3-2 Removing the paper top cover of the main unit
3. Remove the wood top plate upward, and then you can see the stop bars for the
autoloader, as shown in Figure 3-3. There is no stop bar for OV and CT analyzers.
Stop bar for the

autoloader
Cardboard
Figure 3-3 Removing the wood top cover
4. Remove the cardboard upward. You can see the main unit protected by foams, as shown
in Figure 3-4.
3-2
Foam on the left side

of the main unit
Foam at the top of

the main unit
Foam on the right

side of the main
unit
Figure 3-4 Removing the cardboard
5. Remove the foam at the top of the main unit upward. Then remove the foam on the left
side of the main unit leftward and the foam on the right side rightward, as shown in
Figure 3-5. Lift the machine through the handles at the bottom and set it on the
countertop (at least 2 people are required), as shown in Figure 3-6.
Main unit
Figure 3-5 Removing the foams protecting the main unit
3-3
Figure 3-6 Handles at the bottom of the main unit
Note: When moving the main unit, do not tilt it and do your best to minimize the mechanical
shock.
3.1.3 Unpacking the Pneumatic Unit Box

Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of the pneumatic unit box. To unpack this box, do as
follows:
Packing tapes
Figure 3-7 Pneumatic unit box
2. After removing the packing tapes and the adhesive tapes, open the top cover of the box
and remove the paper protective corners. Then take out the accessory kit, as shown in
Figure 3-8.
3-4
Accessory kit
Paper protective
corners
Figure 3-8 Opening the top cover of the box
3. The accessory kit contains such accessories as reagent connecting tubing, pneumatic
lines and power cable, as shown in Figure 3-9.
Cap assembly,
pneumatic control
lines, pneumatic tubes,
spare tubes, etc.
Figure 3-9 Accessory kit
4. Firmly grip the two cardboard handles and lift the pneumatic unit out of the box. Then
remove the top foam to take out the pneumatic unit, as shown in Figure 3-10.
3-5
Top foam
Pressure regulator
Cardboard
Bottom foam
Figure 3-10 Taking out the pneumatic unit
Do not use the pressure regulator as handle to move the pneumatic unit.
3.1.4 Unpacking the Autoloader Box

Figure 3-11 shows the appearance of the autoloader box. To unpack this box, do as follows:
Packing tapes
Figure 3-11 Autoloader box
2. After removing the packing tapes and the adhesive tapes, open the top cover of the box
and remove the cardboard. You can take out the tube racks first, as shown in Figure 3-11.
3-6
Cardboard
Tube rack
Figure 3-12 Opening the autoloader box
3. Hold the foams on both sides of the autoloader to lift it out of the box. Then remove the
foams to take out the autoloader, as shown in Figure 3-13.
Foams
Figure 3-13 Autoloader
3.1.5 Checking the Packing List

Check the equipment received against the packing list to ensure that every part on the list is
delivered.
3-7
3.2 Space Requirements

Check the site for proper space allocation. In addition to the space required for the analyzer
itself, arrange for
at least 100 cm on each side, which is the preferred access to perform service
procedures.
at least 50 cm behind for cabling and ventilation.
enough room on and below the countertop to accommodate the diluent, cleansers, lyses,
pneumatic unit and waste containers.
3-8
3.3 Removing the Auxiliary Fixing Components
3.3.1 Removing the Fixing Screws at the Bottom of the
Pneumatic Unit
To protect the air pump from damage during transportation, the pump is fixed by four bolts at
the bottom of the pneumatic unit. Before using the pneumatic unit, place the pneumatic unit at
the edge of the bench to remove the bolts. Use a wrench to loosen one of the four bolts (as
shown in Figure 3-14 (a)). Use a cross-head screwdriver to loosen the two M3X8 screws on
the bracket that fixes the bolt (as shown in Figure 3-14 (b)); move the bracket, remove the
bolt (as shown in Figure 3-14 (c)) and then re-fix the bracket. Repeat the steps above to
remove the other three bolts.
Do not slope or overturn the pneumatic unit in case of removing the fixing
bolts.
Keep the removed bolts properly.
a b c
Figure 3-14 Removing the fixing bolts at the bottom of the pneumatic unit
3.3.2 Removing the Adhesive Tapes Fixing the Stop Bar of the
Front Cover
Open the cover and then remove the shown adhesive tapes fixing the stop bar.
3-9
Adhesive
tapes
Figure 3-15 Adhesive tapes fixing the stop bar of the front cover
3.3.3 Removing the Plastic Cable Tie Fixing the Wipe Block
Open the front cover, and then use diagonal pliers or scissors to cut off the plastic cable tie
fixing the wipe block, as shown in Figure 3-16.
Plastic cable tie
Figure 3-16 Plastic cable tie fixing the wipe block
3.3.4 Removing the Plastic Cable Tie Fixing the Cylinder

Open the front cover and then you can see the plastic cable tie fixing the cylinder beside the
sample mixing assembly. Use a pair of scissors to cut off the plastic cable tie, as shown in
Figure 3-17.
3-10
Plastic cable tie
Figure 3-17 Plastic cable tie fixing the cylinder
3.3.5 Removing the Adhesive Tapes Fixing the
Communication Cable of the Autoloader

To facilitate the connection with the autoloader, remove the adhesive tapes to fix the
communication cable of the autoloader at the lower part of the front cover, as shown in Figure
3-18.
Adhesive taps
Figure 3-18 Adhesive tapes fixing the communication cable of the autoloader
3-11
3.4 Installing the Autoloader
3.4.1 Installing the Stop Bars

There are two stop bars for the autoloader. Insert the bars into the slots on the bottom plate of
the main unit. Then fix the bars onto the bottom plate with two M48 cross-headed panhead
screws, as shown in Figure 3-19.
Insert the two stop bars into the slots on the bottom plate of the main
unit. Then fix each bar onto the bottom plate with an M48 screw
Figure 3-19 Installing the stop bars
3.4.2 Connecting the Communication Cable

After installing the stop bars, place the autoloader onto the bars. Then insert the connector of
the communication cable into the corresponding socket of the autoloader. Put the cable
inside the autoloader, as shown in Figure 3-20.
Note: The
communication cable of
the autoloader cannot be
pressed against the
lower cover of the main
unit or against the
enclosure of the
autoloader. Otherwise,
short-circuit will occur to
burn the chip of the
driver board.
The cable is first led through this hole, then along the edge of the sample transmit
assembly, and finally inserted to the adapter plate
Figure 3-20 Installing the communication cable
3-12
The communication cable of the autoloader cannot be pressed against the

lower cover of the main unit and the enclosure of the autoloader. Otherwise,
short-circuit will occur to burn the chip of the driver board.
3.4.3 Installing the Autoloader

Place the autoloader to the front cover, move the autoloader to fit holes under it to the
connecting holes of the stop bars, and fix the 2 screws fixing the autoloader (as shown in
Figure 3-21). Note: Do not tightly fix the screws, for the autoloader still needs further
adjustment.
Screws fixing the autoloader
Figure 3-21 Installation position of the autoloader
3-13
3.5 Removing the Adapters from the Tube Rack
If the size of tubes used is 1475(mm) or 1575(mm), remove the adapters from tube
rack first to load the tubes, as shown in Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22 Removing the adapters from the tube rack
3-14
3.6 Connecting the Reagent and Waste Container
Connect the reagent lines as shown below. Place lyses on the countertop, and the diluent,
cleanser and waste container below the countertop. Be sure to keep all reagent lines isolated
from anything electrical.
Figure 3-23 Tubes connection (1)
Pay attention to color matching when connect the tube to the corresponding connector.
Figure 3-24 Tubes connection (2)
3-15
3.7 Connecting the Pneumatic Unit
Figure 3-25 shows the connection between the analyzer and the pneumatic unit.
Ensure their proper and reliable connection.
Figure 3-25 Connection of the pneumatic unit
3-16
3.8 Connecting the Optional Equipment
Figure 3-26 shows the connection between the analyzer and the optional equipment.
Ensure their proper and reliable connection.
Figure 3-26 Connection between the analyzer and the optional equipment
3.9 Connecting to the Power Source
Connect the main unit and the pneumatic unit to their specified power source connectors.
Pay attention that the power source specifications of the main unit are not totally same to
those of the pneumatic unit. Be sure they are connected to the right power source
connectors.
3-17
3.10 Starting the Analyzer

3.10.1 Check before Starting the Analyzer
Before starting the analyzer, you need to open the front cover to check the open vial unit and
the autoloader unit to see if their tubes are properly connected, as shown in Figure 3-27 and
Figure 3-28. Be sure the connection will not interfere with the moving parts movement.
Check that the tubes of

the wipe block move
smoothly and will not
wear.
Check that the SRV

tubes do not get loose
or bent
Figure 3-27 Checking the open vial unit
Check that the tubes of

the autoloader do not
get bent, loose; and do
not interfere with the
front cover or the
moving parts.
Figure 3-28 Checking the autoloader unit
3.10.2 Initial Start-up

1. After connecting the main unit and the pneumatic unit to their power source connectors,
power on the pneumatic unit first and then the main unit. After that, switch on the power
button on the front cover of the main unit.
3-18
2. Before delivery, fluidics has been drained. Therefore, fluidics initialization automatically
runs at the initial startup of the analyzer to prime the fluidics. This course takes about 20
minutes. During the startup, a login dialog box will pop up after the self-test and the
fluidics initialization.
3. Enter the service engineer account Service and password Se s700 in the box to enter
system main screen, as shown in Figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29 Main screen
4. After entering the Main screen (Figure 3-29, click the Setup icon and pops up the
following screen shown in Figure 3-30.
Figure 3-30 Setup screen
3-19
5. After entering the Setup screen, click Advanced button and pops up the advanced
setup screen shown as Figure 3-31.
Figure 3-31 Advanced Setup screen
In the Advanced Setup screen, select Test temp. to active the laser diode temperature
detecting function. For the auto-sampling model and the closed vial sampling model,
Scanner configured and Sensor configured should also be selected to active the barcode
scan and blood volume detecting functions.
3-20
3.11 Debugging the Analyzer

3.11.1 Background Test
1. Perform background count in the OV-WB mode at the count screen. The results should
be within the limits.
2. If this is an AL analyzer or CT analyzer, add 2mL of diluent into a new collection tube to
perform a background count. The results should be within the limits.
3.11.2 HGB Blank Voltage Adjustment

After transportation and tubing initialization, the HGB blank voltage may be different from the
factory setting. In this case, you can adjust HGB blank voltage through gain setup.
1. Entering setup
CLICK Setup at the main screen, and then CLICK Gain on the Setup screen to enter
the screen as shown in Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32 Gain screen
2. HGB gain adjustment
By adjusting the HGB channel gain, the HGB blank voltage is adjusted. The HGB blank
voltage should be 2.0-2.4V. The value of 2.28V is recommended. To adjust HGB gain, CLICK
HGB current value at the Gain screen to enter a new value of HGB gain adjustment and
save it before exiting.
3-21
3.11.3 Adjusting the autoloader position

Adjustment of the rubber baffle up and down position.
1. CLICK the Service icon at the main screen to enter the Service screen shown in
Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 Service screen
2. CLICK the Status button on the bottom of the screen to enter the Status screen
shown in Figure 3-34.
3-22
Figure 3-34 Status screen
3. CLICK the Position button at the Status screen to enter the screen shown in Figure
3-36.
Figure 3-35 Position screen
3-23
4. Unhided will be displayed in the Scanner Sensor box. Place a new test tube into an
empty tube rack, push the rack to the tube detecting position manually (as shown in
Figure 3-36), and check the Scanner Sensor box. If Hided appears, the up and down
positions of the detecting photocoupler need no adjustment.
Figure 3-36 Tube detecting position
5. If Unhided appears, loosen the 2 screws fixing the scanner sensor plate (as shown in
Figure 3-37) and move the plate up and down along the U grooves. When the top of the
tube cap is 3 to 6 mm from the lower end of the photocoupler, check the status again
(wait about 1 to 2 seconds for the updated result). If Hided appears, tighten the 2
screws fixing the scanner sensor plate.
Screws
Figure 3-37 Adjusting the position of the tube detecting photocoupler
6. After the adjustment, remove the tube rack to do the following adjustment.
Adjustment of left and right positions
Before the adjustment, ensure that the 2 screws fixing the autoloader (as shown in Figure
3-21) are not fully tightened.
3-24
1. CLICK the Debug button on the bottom of the screen to enter the Debug screen
shown in Figure 3-38. CLICK the Mix unit button to enter the mix unit debug screen
Figure 3-38 Debug screen
Figure 3-39 Mix unit debug screen
3-25
2. At the mix unit debug screen, CLICK the Initialization button in the Manipulater box
to initialize the manipulater; CLICK the Initialize button in the Autoloader box to
initialize the autoloader.
Note: If the buttons grayed out, CLICK the Open compressor button. After the compressor
is open, the buttons will be activated.
3. Place an empty tube rack onto the autoloader load platform, and CLICK the Load
button in the Autoloader box. When the tube rack comes to the loading position,
CLICK the Feed button 3 to 4 times to load the tube until it comes to the pinching
position. Note: Do not CLICK the Feed button before the former movement is done.
4. CLICK the Pinch cylndr fwd button in the Manipulater box to move the manipulater to
the pinching position and place the alignment fixture into the pincher (with the bottom of
the fixture fully covering the upper surface of the tube rack), as shown in Figure 3-40.
Figure 3-40Adjustment of the autoloader position
5. Adjust the position of the autoloader so that the center of the tube position fully covers
that of the fixture.
a) Adjust left and right: Move the autoloader left and right until the center of the tube
position fully covers that of the fixture, and then tighten the two screws (as shown in Figure
3-21) fixing the autoloader. Check after the adjustment and then remove the fixture.
b) Adjust forward and backward (this step is for reference of the manufacturing
department): Do the following before installing the lower cover. Unscrew the four screws
shown in Figure 3-41 move the mix unit forward and backward until the center of the tube
position fully covers that of the fixture (as shown in Figure 3-40) and then tighten the four
screws shown in Figure 3-41.
3-26
Figure 3-41 Adjustment of the forward and backward position
c) Verification after the adjustment: Remove the fixture, CLICK the Pinch cylndr bkwd
button in the Manipulater box to reposition the manipulater and then place the fixture into
the tube position (as shown in Figure 3-42); Verify the autoloader position as per the following
steps:
CLICK the Pinch cylndr fwd button to pinch the fixture (as shown in Figure
3-43),CLICK the Elvt cylndr up button to remove the fixture out of the rack, CLICK the Elvt
cylndr down button to place the fixture into the rack, and then CLICK the Pinch cylndr bkwd
button to reposition the pincher. Repeat these steps 3 to 5 times to confirm that the fixture can
be placed in the rack smoothly. If the fixture cannot be placed in the rack smoothly, repeat
steps a) and b) until it passes the inspection.
3-27
Figure 3-42 Pinchers initial position
Figure 3-43 Position of pinching fixture
3-28
Figure 3-44 Fixture removed out of the tube position
6. After the adjustment, CLICK the Feed and Unload button to remove the rack and the
adjustment of the autoloader position is finished.
7. After the adjustment, fix the autoloader cover to the front cover by 2 screws, as Figure
3-45 shows.
Fix the protective cover

of the autoloader by
using two M3X8
screws
Figure 3-45 Fixing the protective cover of the autoloader
3.11.4 Optical system gain tuning

After the transport, the DIFF channel gain and the BASO channel gain of the optical system
may be different from the factory setting. You may need to retune the optical system gain. Do
as follows:
3-29
1. At the Count screen, select the mode OV-WB and CBC+5DIFF, and then run the
standard particles as sample once. Make sure the background of the analyzer is normal
before running the standard particles.
2. After the analysis, CLICK the Review button at the Count screen to enter the
Review screen. The table review screen is the default screen.
Figure 3-46 Table review screen
3. Select the standard particle sample run before, CLICK the OpAdjust button at the
Table review screen to enter the OpAdjust screen (shown in Figure 3-47). The DIFF
channel gain tuning screen is the default screen.
3-30
Figure 3-47 Optical tuning screen (DIFF channel)
4. lAt the DIFF channel gain tuning screen, CLICK the Calculate button to calculate
every parameter of the standard particles at both the LAS angle and the MAS angle. The
results will be displayed at the right of the screen. Enter the LAS and MAS peak targets of
the standard particles into the corresponding Particle 1 boxes at the lower right corner
of the screen (for the target values, refer to the instructions for use of the standard
particles).
5. After the entry, CLICK the >>> button to calculate the gain. The results will be displayed
in the Gain boxes. Record the result of DIFF channel and the DIFF channel gain tuning
is finished.
6. CLICK the BASO channel at the DIFF channel gain tuning screen to switch to the
BASO channel gain tuning screen. Refer to the gain tuning steps of the DIFF channel
to calculate the gain of the BASO channel and record the results. If the gain calculation
fails, please contact Mindray service department for advice.
7. After the gain calculation, CLICK the Main button, then the Setup icon to enter the
Setup screen. CLICK the Gain button to enter the Gain setup screen, and enter the
gains recorded before for the DIFF channel and the BASO channel. Save the changes
and exit the Gain setup screen.
3-31
3.12 Software Upgrade
Through the software screen and the upgrade package stored in USB flash drive, the
customer service engineer can perform online upgrade of software kernel, application
software, print software, FPGA program of hardware boards, and software of Middle and
Slave.
To perform the software upgrade, do as follows:
1. After the startup, enter the service engineer account and password in the login dialog box
to enter the system main screen. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB interface behind
the analyzer,CLICK Service and the Upgrade button, as shown in Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48 Maintain screen
2. CLICK Start upgrade button and the upgrade items screen as shown in Figure 3-49
will appear. The items to be upgraded are already defined in the USB flash drive upgrade
package. The default selected items on the screen are the items to be upgraded. They
cannot be changed.
3-32
Figure 3-49 Upgrade items screen
3. A t the screen shown in Figure 3-49, CLICK OK to start the software upgrade. A prompt
will be given when software upgrade completes. The system will then automatically shut
down.
4. If there is Mainboard in the upgrade package, the screen display may go wrong after
OK is clicked to start software upgrade. This is normal during the upgrade. After the
beep, restart the system to complete the upgrade.
In the course of the upgrade, do not leave the instrument and pay attention
to every prompt message given on the screen.
In the course of the upgrade, the instrument cannot be powered off.

Otherwise, the files may be damaged and the system cannot upload
normally.
3-33
4 Fluidic System
4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts

4.1.1 Probes
Sample probe: It is connected with the SRV and aspirates samples in the
open-vial mode.
Piercing probe: It is connected with the piercing unit and aspirates samples in both
the closed-tube and autoloading modes.
Injection probe: It is connected with the flow cell and forms the sheath flow in the
WBC detecting part.
4.1.2 Probe Wipes

Sample probe wipe: It is located below the SRV, and is used for washing the interior
and exterior of the sample probe.
Piercing probe wipe: It is located inside the piercing unit, and is used for washing
the interior and exterior of the piercing probe.
4.1.3 Pumps
Metering pump: A metering part. It aspirates certain amount of reagent(s) via
vacuum and then dispenses the reagent(s) under pressure.
Diaphragm(waste) pump: A hydrodynamic part that transfers fluid or gas from one
place to another. It discharges the waste from the HGB bath, RBC premix bath,
WBC reaction bath and the probe wipes.
Syringe: It aspirates/dispenses certain amount of sample and reagent(s).
4.1.4 Valves
Solenoid Valve: controls the direction of the fluidic flow or air flow.
Pinch valve: starts/stops the fluidic flow.
Check valve: enables unidirectional flow of fluid or gas.
SRV: It rations the sample blood and controls the specific sample volume for
different channels, as shown in Figure 4-1 to Figure 4-3.
4-1
Fluidic System
washing opening
BASO bath
BASO regeant
RBC bath
DIFF bath cleanser

DIFF regeant
HGB reaction
bath
aspiration
premix bath
syringe
auto
washing opening
manual
Figure 4-1 SRV fluidic system for open vial sampling
4-2
Fluidic System
washing opening
BASO bath
BASO reagent
RBC bath
cleanser
DIFF bath
DIFF reagent
HGB reaction
bath
aspiration
premix bath
syringe
auto
washing opening
manual
Figure 4-2 SRV fluidic system for autoloading / closed tube sampling
4-3
Fluidic System
Figure 4-3 SRV tube interfaces
1 HGB 6ul (Open vial) 8
2 RBC 8.3ul (Open vial) 9 RBC first diluted sample 60ul (Open
3 HGB 6ul (Autoloading) 10 vial)
4 DIFF 20ul (Open vial) 11
5 RBC 8.3ul (Autoloading) 12 BASO 20ul (Autoloading)

6 BASO 20ul (Open vial) 13
7 DIFF20ul (Autoloading) 14 RBC first diluted sample 60ul

15 (Autoloading)
16
4.1.5 Reservoir and Waste Chamber

DIL cistern: stores diluent for washing.
FCM cistern: stores sheath fluid (diluent) for WBC analysis and washing.
Cleanser cistern: stores cleanser for maintenance.
WC2: stores waste coming from the WBC unit.
WC1: stores waste coming from the WC2 and RBC units.
4.1.6 Baths
WBC reaction bath: includes the DIFF bath and BASO bath. DIFF bath is used for
4-differential of WBCs and BASO bath for measurement of basophilia and total
WBC.
Flow cell: form sheath flow to assists WBC measurements.
RBC premix bath: is used for first dilution of samples in the RBC channel.
RBC bath: completes the RBC/PLT measurement.
HGB bath: completes the HGB measurement.
Metering tube: controls the volume of RBC/PLT samples for analysis.
4-4
Fluidic System
4.2 Introduction of Pneumatic Parts

4.2.1 Air system
The air system provides the required pressure and vacuum for the analyzers normal operation.
The pressure is the output after being adjusted to 0.25MPa by the adjusting valve in the
pneumatic unit. After receiving the pressure and vacuum from the pneumatic unit, the main
unit of the analyzer filters and dries the pressure by a filter to remove the vapor and impurity.
Then the pressure is further adjusted to 0.07MPa and 0.16MPa, and the vacuum is further
adjusted to -0.04MPa.
See Figure 4-4 for the air system.
Main unit Pneumatic unit
Figure 4-4 Air system
4.2.2 Functions of pressure

Functions of pressure and vacuum are described in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Functions of pressure
Type Pressure Value Description

0.25MPa Drives the cylinders and pinch valves.
0.16MPa Forms the sheath flow.
Pressure
Empty the waste chamber, discharge the reagent
0.07MPa
chambers and drive the metering pumps,
Drives the metering pump and reservoirs to aspirate
Vacuum 0.085MPa
reagent.
4-5
Fluidic System
Drives the WBC sample preparation metering pump (DP4)

0.04MPa
to aspirate reagents and drives the WC1 to aspirate waste.
4.2.3 Valves
Gas valve: controls the direction of the air flow.
Pressure regulating valve: regulates the pressure coming from the pneumatic unit
for various uses.
4.2.4 Filters
Pressure filter: filters and dries the pressure air coming from the pneumatic unit.
4-6
Fluidic System
4.3 Fluidic System

4.3.1 Reagent volume required
Sample analysis for a single sample each time
4 analysis modes are involved: Open vial-whole blood, open vial-predilute, autoloading-whole
blood and closed tube-whole blood.
Sample volume of a single
Reagents Name analysis
CBC+5DIFF CBC
M-50 diluent M-50D DILUENT 68.91.0mL 592.5mL
M-50LEO(I) LYSE 1.50mL 0.50ml
M-50LEO(II) LYSE 0.32mL /
M-50 lyse
M-50LBA LYSE 1.50mL 1.50mL
M-50LH LYSE 1.0mL 1.0mL
Normal startup function

Reagents volume required
Reagents Name Volume of normal startup
M-50 diluent M-50D DILUENT 3345mL
M-50LEO(I) LYSE 3.5mL
M-50LEO(II) LYSE 0.32mL
M-50 lyse
M-50LBA LYSE 3.5mL
M-50LH LYSE 2.0mL
Cleanser M-50 CLEANSER /
Startup after empty (pack-up)

Reagents volume required
Volume of startup after Remarks
Reagents Name
empty (pack-up)
M-50 diluent M-50D DILUENT 3345mL /
3.5mL of reagent is
consumed. 7.5mL of
reagent is stored in the
tubing.
M-50 lyse
0.32mL of reagent is
consumed. 13.76mL of
M-50LEO(II) LYSE 14.08mL
tubing.
4-7
Fluidic System
3.5mL of reagent is
consumed. 7.5mL of
M-50LBA LYSE 11.0mL
tubing.
2mL of reagent is
consumed. 14mL of
M-50LH LYSE 16mL
tubing.
Cleanser M-50 CLEANSER / /
Shutdown function
Reagents volume required.
Volume of normal
Reagents Name
shutdown
M-50 diluent M-50D DILUENT 2022.0mL
M-50LEO(II) LYSE /
M-50 lyse
M-50LBA LYSE 1.0mL
M-50LH LYSE 1.0mL
Cleanser M-50 CLEANSER 832.0mL
4.3.2 Fluidic System Drawing
Flow cell
0.32ml
DIFF2 lyse
35C constant
DIFF1 lyse DIFF bath168
BASO lyse BASO bath152
Premix bath1361
Diluent RBC bath118000

Preheat
HGB bath1500
FCM
Whole blood
manual:
Auto:180
HGB lyse
Figure 4-5 Fluidic system
4-8
Fluidic System
4.3.3 WBC Channel
BASO Channel
The reagents used for BASO analysis include:
LBA lyse: rapidly breaks down the walls of RBCs and PLTs, and leaves the nucleus of WBCs
except the basophilia.
Diluent: is used for washing and provides sheath fluid.
Principles: flow cytometry by semiconductor laser radiation.
Parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%.
Diagrams: WBC scattergram
Dilute ratio: 1:52
Metering volume: 50.2l
Function description: The sample diluted at the ratio of 1:52 is mixed and reacted in
the reaction bath, and then comes to a place between the flow cell inlet and the
sample syringe; at the same time, the sheath flow is enabled and comes to stable.
Surrounding the sample, the sheath flow reaches the measuring segment of the
flow cell. The sample syringe drives, at specific speed and within a given period, the
sample surrounded by sheath flow to pass through the flow cell at a stable speed
for optical measurement. Then the measuring fluidics is cleaned and ready for next
measurement.
4-DIFF Channel
The reagents used for DIFF analysis include:
LEO (I) and LEO (II): rapidly breaks down the walls of RBCs and 4-differentiates the WBCs.
Diluent: used for washing and provides sheath fluid.
Principles: flow cytometry by semiconductor laser radiation
Parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS# and

EOS%.
Diagrams: 4-DIFF scattergram
Dilute ratio: 1:68
Metering volume: 50.2l
Function description: The sample diluted at the ratio of 1:68 is mixed and reacts in
the reaction bath, and then comes to a place between the flow cell inlet and the
sample syringe; at the same time, the sheath flow is enabled and comes to stable.
The sheath flow surrounds the sample and reaches the measuring segment of the
flow cell. The sample syringe drives, at specific speed and within a given period, the
sample surrounded by sheath flow to pass through the flow cell at a stable speed
for optical measurement. Then the measuring fluidics is cleaned and ready for next
4-9
Fluidic System
measurement.
Fluidic Function of WBC Unit

Aspirating/metering sample and reagent: Samples are aspirated to the SRV by the
whole blood aspiration syringe. DP1 aspirates the specific amount of sample and
injects the sample into the DIFF baths. DP2 and DP3 aspirates specific the amount
of reagents and respectively inject DIFF and BASO samples into the DIFF and
BASO baths ..
Mixing: The fluids in DIFF and BASO baths are mixed by the mixing paddle and
injecting force.
Washing: With SV14, PV11 and PV10 switched on, the baths are washed using the
fluid in the DIL cistern.
Discharging waste: With SV2 and SV3 switched on, the waste is discharged via the
diaphragm pump.
4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel

RBC/PLT Channel
The reagents used include:
Diluent: dilutes samples, washes, provides a conductive environment and processes the cells.
Principles: aperture impedance methodology
Parameters: RBC and PLT.
Diagrams: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
Dilute ratio: 1: 18000
Metering volume: 350l
The RBC channel counts the RBCs and PLTs in blood sample (diluted at 1: 18000) using the
aperture impedance methodology. To achieve the dilute ratio, the sample is first diluted at
1:361 in the premix bath and aspirated to the SRV, and then injected into the RBC bath at the
ratio 1:50. A sample at 1: 18000 is obtained.
Function of RBC/PLT channel

Aspirating/Dividing sample and reagent: The samples predetermined by the SRV
are injected into the RBC premix bath by the 3mL DP8 and SV29. Then the 2mL
DP6 aspirates the diluted samples (1:500), which are then again diluted (1:96) and
injected into the RBC bath via DP8, SV29 and SV28.
Mixing: The samples are mixed by air bubbles and injecting force.
Washing: The RBC bath is washed with diluent via DP8, SV29 and SV28. The RBC
premix bath is washed with diluent via DP6 and SV25.
Discharging waste: The RBC premix bath is emptied via the diaphragm pump and
SV11, and the RBC bath via 0.04MPa vacuum and SV36.
4-10
Fluidic System
4.3.5 HGB Channel

HGB Channel
The reagents used include:
Diluent: dilutes samples and washes

HGB lyse: rapidly breaks down the red blood cell walls and combines the hemoglobin.
Principles: colorimetry
Parameters: HGB
Dilute ratio: 1:500
The HGB unit calculates the concentration of HGB by comparing the light passing through the
sample with the blank reference reading.
Function of HGB Channel

Aspirating/metering sample and reagent: The samples in the SRV are injected into
the HGB bath via DP7 and SV27, while certain amount of lyse is also dispensed to
the HGB bath via DP5 and SV23.
Mixing: The samples are mixed by air bubbles and injecting force.
Washing: The HGB bath is washed with diluent via DP7 and SV27.
Discharging waste: The HGB bath is emptied via the diaphragm pump and SV1.
4.3.6 Priming/Discharging Channel

The priming/discharging channel includes the DIL cistern, FCM cistern, WC2, WC 1 and waste
pump, as shown in Figure 4-6. DIL and FCM cisterns both have a three-way valve and a pinch
valve. The three-way valve switches between pressure and vacuum. The pressure (DIL:
0.07Mpa, FCM: 0.16Mpa) drives the cisterns to provide fluid for the fluidic system, and the
vacuum can have the cisterns filled with diluents in combination with the pinch valve switching
on. WC2 is open to air, with outlet connected to WC1 via PV1. With PV1 on, the waste in WC2
can be discharged to WC1. WC1 also includes a three-way valve and a pinch valve. The
three-way valve switches between pressure (0.07Mpa) and vacuum (-0.04Mpa). When
switched to vacuum, the WC1 collects waste coming from other channels, and discharges the
waste to the waste container in combination with PV2 when switched to pressure. The waste
pump is connected to the waste source at the inlet and to the waste container at the outlet.
The connections of the reservoirs, waste cisterns and waste pump are shown in Figure 4-6.
4-11
Fluidic System
Figure 4-6 Connections of the priming/discharging channel
4.3.7 Sampling Channel

The sampling channel consists of the SRV and cylinder, washing channels, probe wipe and
whole blood aspiration syringe. In the sampling channel, certain amount of sample is aspirated
to the SRV, which meters the sample by rotation. Then certain amount of sample is injected
into related baths via the corresponding metering pumps. The washing channel removes the
sample spillage during SRVs rotation and avoids blood leakage. The probe wipe is used to
wash the interior and exterior of the sample probe.
4.3.8 Cleanser Soaking

Soaking drive: Soaking is driven by the 0.07MPa pressure in the cleanser cistern and the
whole blood aspiration syringe. The pressure is for the baths and flow cell, while the syringe is
for the SRV and sample probe.
Soaking process: To soak the baths, SV18 and related discharging valves are switched on,
and certain amount of cleanser is injected into the baths.
4-12
Fluidic System
4.4 Introduction of Basic Sequences

4.4.1 Sequence of OV-WB Measurement
0-5s, indicated in red in Figure 4-8
The handle on the sampling valve is turned to the upper position.
During 0-5.0s, samples are aspirated from the sample probe to the sampling valve
by the whole blood aspiration syringe and V21.
HGB background test and the emptying of the HGB bath, RBC premix bath and
RBC bath;
The cleaning and emptying of the DIFF cistern and BASO cistern;
Figure 4-7 Fluidic system for whole blood sampling
6-10s, indicated in red in Figure 4-9.
The handle of the sampling valve is turned to the lower position. The sampling valve
divides the sample into 4 segments for analysis.
RBC sample is dispensed into the premix bath for first dilution via GV73 and SV29.
HGB sample is dispensed into the HGB bath via GV74 and SV27.
DIFF sample is dispensed into the DIFF bath via GV71 and SV24.
BASO sample is dispensed into the BASO bath via GV72 and SV26.
4-13
Fluidic System
Figure 4-8 Fluidic system for dispensing whole blood
The handle of the sampling valve is turned to the lower position.
Certain amount of first diluted sample is aspirated from the premix bath via GV77
and SV25.
HGB measurement is ready to go.
4-14
Fluidic System
Figure 4-9 Fluidic system for aspirating first diluted RBC sample
The handle of the sampling valve is turned to the upper position.
Certain amount of first diluted RBC sample is injected into the RBC bath via GV73,
SV28 and SV29.
The premix bath is emptied via SV11;
The sheath flow is opened via SV08 and SV04;
The reacted DIFF sample is driven to the inlet of the flow cell via GV78, SV30,
SV06, GV52 and GV51.
4-15
Fluidic System
Figure 4-10 Fluidic system for preparing for DIFF measurement
21-30s, indicated in red in Figure 4-11 .
With SV37 switched on, the RBC/PLT channel starts the measurement.
With SV08 switched on, the sample syringe is started and drives slowly the DIFF
sample to the flow cell for optical measurement.
After DIFF measurement, the waste is discharged to WC2.
HGB measurement is under way.
4-16
Fluidic System
Figure 4-11 Fluidic system for RBC/DIFF measurements
The sample syringe replaces and shuts the sheath flow via SV04 and SV08;
Reacted BASO sample is driven to the inlet of the flow cell via SV78, SV30, SV06,
GV52 and GV50.
The sheath flow is opened again via SV08 and SV04;
HGB measurement is completed,The waste is discharged to the waste container

via the diaphragm pump and SV01.
HGB bath cleaning;
RBC premix bath cleaning;
RBC/PLT measurement is completed.
The waste is discharged to the waste container via the diaphragm pump and SV01.
RBC waste is discharged to WC1 via the 0.04MPa vacuum and SV36.
4-17
Fluidic System
Figure 4-12 Fluidic system for preparing BASO sample
With SV08 switched on, the sample syringe is started and drives slowly the BASO
sample to the flow cell for optical measurement.
After BASO measurement, the waste is discharged to WC2.
The RBC bath is cleaned and soaked.
The RBC premix bath is soaked.
The HGB bath is soaked.
4-18
Fluidic System
Figure 4-13 Fluidic system for BASO measurement
4.4.2 Sequence of OVPD Measurement

Sequence of measurement
The sequence of open vial predilute measurement is the same with that of the whole blood
measurement stated above. Refer to Section 4.4.1 for details.
The predilute measurement differs from the whole blood measurement in that samples are
diluted at certain ratio before being aspirated into the analyzer.
4.4.3 Sequence of CTWB Measurement

Sampling mode
When tubes are set in the closed tube sampler, the analyzer aspirates and mixes the sample
automatically. The syringe and valves used in this analysis are the same with those in the open
vial analysis.
Measurement Process
The closed-tube analysis sequence is same with the open vial analysis, except for grasping
tubes, auto-mixing samples, piercing the tubes, etc.
Sampling valve status
When aspirating samples, the sampling valve has its handle turned to the lower position.
Measuring time
4-19
Fluidic System
The closed-tube analysis takes 5 more seconds than the open vial analysis due to the extra
actions before aspirating samples.
4.4.4 Sequence of AL-WB Measurement

1. Sampling mode
The autoloading analysis is intended for batches of samples by transporting/loading/grasping

tubes, aspirating samples automatically, etc.
Figure 4-14 Fluidic system for autoloading measurement
2. Measurement process
After aspirated to the sampling valve, the samples are measured in the same way as the open
vial whole blood measurement.
3. Sampling valve status
When aspirating samples, the sampling valve has its handle turned to the lower position.
4. Measuring time
80 samples can be measured per hour in this mode due to auto loading/unloading of tubes,
etc.
4-20
Fluidic System
4.5 Sample Dilution Process

4.5.1 Flow Chart of Whole Blood Dilution
Whole blood 120ul180ul for auto and
closed-tube modes
WBC/ RBC/PLT RBC/PLT 60ul

DIFF20ul HGB 6ul primarily diluted
BASO20ul 8.3ul
LBA
1.020ml LH
DIL2 .992 ml
0.994ml
DIL
LEOI 2.94ml
1.020ml
DIL 2.0 ml
LEOII
0.320ml
BASO bath 1:52 DIFF bath1:68 HGB bath 1:500 RBCPremix1:361 RBC bath 1:18000
Measuring
Diaphragm
WC2 (waste)pump
WC1
Figure 4-15 Flow chart of whole blood dilution
4-21
Fluidic System
4.5.2 Flow Chart of Pre-dilution

40ul capillary
blood
120ul dliuent
14 prediluted sample
160L
WBC/ RBC/PLT RBC/PLT 60ul

DIFF20uL HGB 6uL primary sample
BASO20uL 8.3uL
LBA
1.020ml LH
DIL2 .992 ml
0.994ml
DIL
LEOI 2.94ml
1.020ml
DIL 2.0 ml
LEOII
0.320ml
BASO bath 1:208 DIFF bath 1:272 HGB bath 1:2000 RBC Premix 1:1444 RBC bath1:72000
Measuring
Diaphragm
WC2 (waste)pump
WC1
Figure 4-16 Flow chart of pre-dilution
4-22
5 Hardware System
According to the functional block, the hardware system can be divided into the main board,
signal processing board, driver board, touchscreen control board, interface board, indicator
board, power board, pneumatic control board, pre-amplification board, laser control board
and volumetric board. The block diagram of the hardware system is shown below.
Inner Scanner Samples Feeding UART Laser Control Board Laser

Step Motors Board GPIO (3100-30-41194) Diode
GPIO
Position Sensors
(3100-30-41204) 5V A/D Indicator
TFT-LCD Light
BackLight UART GPIO Indicator Board
Inverter 12V Sample
(3100-30-41198)
GPIO GPIO Key
Pre-amplification LVDS Driver Board Step&DC Motors
Board(LAS) (3100-30-41186) Valves&Pumps
Laser (3100-30-41192) &Magnet&Heaters
Diode
Pre-amplification
Position&Liquid Sensors
Board(MAS)
(3100-30-41192) A/Ds
Temperature Sensors
RBC/PLT Signal Processing DSPI
Hole
HGB Board Main Board Gas Pressure
Pool (3100-30-41196) GPIO
(3100-30-41182)
Position Volumetric
Stop
Sensor Board GPIOs USB USB Devices
USB Interface
(3100-30-41196) Board RJ45 PC
TCP/IP
(3100-30-41200)
DB9 Fan
Touch Screen
UART
Touch Screen Control Board Compressor
5V Pneumatic Control
(3100-30-41206)
Board Indication LED
Hard Disk FLEX-BUS (3100-30-41201)
AC Power
Power Board 5V&12V
5V&12V 5V&12V&24V
(3100-30-411881)
Figure 5-1 Block diagram of the hardware system
5-1
Hardware System
5.1 Main board

5.1.1 Introduction
The main board of the BC-5500 Auto Hematology Analyzer mainly provides the hardware
platform for running the operating system and applications, controlling the running of the
whole system. It provides some external interfaces, such as USB interface, TTL serial port,
RS232 serial port, IDE interface, network interface, SPI interface, and difference display
interface.
You can service and troubleshoot the main board as instructed in Section 5.1 .
5.1.2 Board Composition
Function
Providing the platform for running the operating system and applications.
Controlling and harmonizing each functional board collectively.
Two RS232 serial ports and two TTL level serial ports.One LVDS level display
interface/ One TFT LCD backlight interface.
One high speed SPI interface, with rate of above 20Mbps.
One standard IDE data interface/ One IDE hard disk power interface.
Four USB interfaces, meeting the USB2.0 standard.
One 10/100Mbps network interface.
One BDM interface.
One JTAG interface of the FPGA.
One configured interface of the EPCS1.
The block diagram of the main board is shown below.
5-2
Hardware System
spare
Inverter Board Configuration serial Interface
Memory
FPGA Configuration
Port for Samples
Power Board FLASH
Feeding Board
(3100-30-11881) Memory (3100-30-41196)
Config I/O
WDT uration
GPIO/
And Reset TOUT
ATA IDE
Interface Board Flex JTAG

(3100-30-41200)
PHY FEC
Bus FPGA
BDM
LVDS 10"TFT_LCD
BDM Reset
Debug Port I/O
Bus
RTC
I2C
E2PROM
CPU Driver Board
Display (3100-30-1186)
PCI RAM
Interface Board PCI
Host USB
(3100-30-41200) Controller
Bus Debug UART
UART
PSC
Signal Touch Screen
Processing Control Board
DSPI
Board (3100-30-41206)
(3100-30-41196)
Device SDRAM DDR barcode
USB
Device USB scanner
Figure 5-2 Block diagram of the main board
Description
Providing the platform for running the operating system and applications
CPU: MCF5474, with running frequency of 266MHZ.

DDR: 128M, with running frequency of 133MHZ.
FLASH: Not less than 8M BYTE (for storing the initialization program and operating system).
IDE: Not less than 40G.
Controlling and harmonizing each functional board collectively
The main board (1) sends commands to the signal processing board and receives
simultaneously the acknowledge information and sampling information from the signal
processing board by the SPI interface;
(2) sends control commands to the driver board and receives simultaneously the
acknowledge information from the driver board by serial ports;
(3) upgrades the hardware of the signal processing board by serial ports and the driver board
by the GPIO interface.
Two RS232 serial ports and two TTL level serial ports
The main board communicates with the driver board using one TTL level serial port. The
main board sends control commands to the driver board and receives the acknowledge
commands simultaneously. See the communication parameters below:
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity check: even
5-3
Hardware System
The other TTL level serial port is reserved.

The main board receives the touch information from the touchscreen using one RS232 serial
port. See the communication parameters below:
Baud rate: 19200/38400bps (varies from the control board of the touchscreen)
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity check: None
Connected to the interface board, the other RS232 serial port of the main board connects the
external barcode reader. The communication parameter varies from the external barcode
reader connected.
One LVDS level display interface/ One TFT LCD backlight interface
Connects the 10.4 inch TFT LCD.
One high speed SPI interface, with rate of above 20Mbps
Communicates with the signal processing board. It sends control commands to and receives
acknowledge information and sampling information from the signal processing board.
One standard IDE data interface/ One IDE hard disk power interface
Connects the hard disk of the IDE interface. It supports 40G capacity and PIO mode. DMA
mode is not supported.
Four USB interfaces, meeting the USB2.0 standard
Connected to the backboard of the analyzer enclosure from the interface board, the USB
interfaces connect the USB mouse, keyboard, barcode reader and memory (USB flash drive /
portable disk).
One 10/100Mbps network interface
Connected to the backboard of the analyzer enclosure from the interface board, the network
interface downloads program and uploads data.
One BDM interface
Debugs the main board. The BDM interface detects the hardware of the main board,
downloads program and writes the program into the FLASH. This interface is not open to
users.
One JTAG interface of the FPGA
Debugs the FPGA. This interface is not open to users.
One configured interface of the EPCS1
Downloads the FPGA program.
Interface definition
There are 18 external interfaces on the main board, numbering from J1 to J18. J7 is not used
practically. J15 and J18 are reserved interface. Refer to Figure 5-3 for the interface layout of
the main board.
5-4
Hardware System
Figure 5-3 Interface layout of the main board
See Table 5-1 for the function of each interface.
Table 5-1 Interfaces on the main board
Number of
Interface Description Note
Pins
J1 IDE interface 40 /
J2 LCD data line interface 20 /
J3 Power interface 4 /
J4 Interface connecting the signal processing board 20 /
J5 COM port 2connecting the driver board 5 TTL level
J6 COM port 3spare 8 TTL level
J7 Device USB interface 5 Not used
J8 Network interface connecting the interface board 6 /
J9 COM port 0connecting the barcode reader 6 RS232 level
COM port 1 connecting the touchscreen

J10 8 RS232 level
controller
J11 BDM interface of the CPU 26 /
J12 JTAG interface of the FPGA 10 /
J13 Configured interface of the EPCS1 10 /
5-5
Hardware System
J14 USB interface connecting the interface board 24 /
J15 Spare COM port 5 RS232 level

J16 LCD backlight interface 5 /
J17 IDE power interface 5 /
J18 Spare I/O interface 8 /
Definition of J1
J1 is a standard IDE interface. See Table 5-2 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 5-2 Definition of J1
Pin Name Function Pin Name Function
1 nRESET Reset 21 NA Reserved
2 GND Signal ground 22 GND Signal ground
3 DD7 Data bit 7 23 nDIOW Write signal
4 DD8 Data bit 8 24 GND Signal ground

5 DD6 Data bit 6 25 nDIOR Read signal
7 DD5 Data bit 5 27 NA Reserved

11 DD3 Data bit 3 31 INTRQ Interrupt request
13 DD2 Data bit 2 33 DA1 Register address 1


17 DD0 Data bit 0 37 nCS0 Chip selection 0
18 DD15 Data bit 15 38 nCS1 Chip selection 1
(Device Active or
19 GND Signal ground 39 nDASP
Slave(Device 1) Present)
20 NA Reserved 40 GND Signal ground
Definition of J2
J2 is the LVDS interface connecting the LCD. It has totally 20 pins. See Table 5-3 for
definition of pins.
5-6
Hardware System

1 +3V3 Power supply 11 RxIN2+ LVDS receiving
2 +3V3 Power supply 12 RxIN2- channel 2
3 GND Ground 13 GND Ground

4 GND Ground 14 CKINn+
LVDS clock
5 RxIN0- LVDS receiving 15 CKINn-
6 RxIN0+ channel 0 16 GND Ground

8 RxIN1+ LVDS receiving 18 NC Not contact
9 RxIN1- channel 1 19 NC Not contact

10 GND Ground 20 NC Not contact
Definition of J3
J3 interface is the input power interface of the whole main board. It provides the +5V and
+12V power supply. See Table 5-4 for the pin distribution.
Pin Name Function

1 VCC +5V power supply
2 P12V0 +12V power supply
3 GND Reference ground of +5V power supply

4 PGND Reference ground of +12V power supply
Definition of J4
J4 interface is the communication external interface connecting the signal processing board.
See Table 5-5 for the pin distribution.
1 SPIOUT Data wire 11 DSCK Clock
2 GND Reference ground 12 GND Reference ground
CONF_DO
SPISCK Clock Configuration done
3 13 NE
4 SPIIN Data wire 14 NA Reserved
5 SPICS0 SPI chip selection 0 15 nCONFIG Configured
5-7
Hardware System
6 GND Reference ground 16 nCE Enable
7 NA Reserved 17 DATA0 Data

8 NA Reserved 18 nCS0 Chip selection
CONFIG_
Configuration enabled ADS0 Data
9 ENA 19
10 NA Reserved 20 GND Reference ground
Definition of J5
J5 interface is the COM port 2 external interface connecting the driver board. See Table 5-6
for the pin definition.
Pin Name Function I/O Relation

1 TXD2 Sending data wire OUT
2 RXD2 Receiving data wire IN
3 GND Reference ground /
4 ISP_PSEN Selection wire OUT
5 ISP_RST Reset wire OUT
Definition of J6
J6 interface is reserved temporarily. See Table 5-7 for the pin definition.
2 12P0 12V power supply OUT

3 +5V0 +5V power supply OUT

Definition of J7
J7 interface is not used practically.
5-8
Hardware System
Definition of J8
J8 interface is the external interface of the network interface connecting the interface board.
See Table 5-8 for the pin definition.
1 ET_TP+ Positive end of sending OUT
2 ET_TP- Negative end of sending OUT
3 ET_RP+ Positive end of receiving IN
4 ET_RP- Negative end of receiving IN
5 ET-NGR Virtual earth of receiving /
6 PWFBOUT USB power supply OUT
Definition of J9
J9 interface is the COM port 0 external interface connecting the barcode reader. See Table
5-9 for the pin definition.
Pin Name Function PIN Name Function
1 TXD2 Sending data wire 4 RTS Request to send
2 RXD2 Receiving data wire 5 GND Reference ground
3 CTS Clear to send 6 +5V0 Power supply
Definition of J10
J10 interface is the COM port 1 external interface connecting the touchscreen controller. See
Table 5-10 for the pin definition.

3 CTS Clear to send IN
4 RTS Request to send OUT
6 +5V0 Power supply OUT

7 NA Reserved /
8 NA Reserved /
5-9
Hardware System
Definition of J11
J11 interface is the BDM interface of the CPU, not open to users.
Definition of J12
J12 interface is the JTAG interface of the FPGA, not open to users.
Definition of J13
J13 interface is the configured interface of the EPCS1, not open to users.
Definition of J14
J14 interface is the USB interface connecting the interface board. See Table 5-11 for the pin
distribution.
4 NA Reserved 16 DP2 Data plusport 2
5 DM4 Data minusport 4 17 GND Reference ground
6 GND Reference ground 18 DM2 Data minusport 2
7 DP4 Data plusport 4 19 GND Reference ground
Port 3 input power Port 2 input power

VBUS3 20 VBUS2
8 supply supply
Port 4 input power Port 1 input power

VBUS4 21 VBUS1
9 supply supply
10 DP3 Data plusport 3 22 GND Reference ground
11 GND Reference ground 23 DM1 Data minusport 1
12 DM3 Data minusport 3 24 DP1 Data plusport 1
Definition of J15
J15 interface is a spare serial port, not used temporarily.
Definition of J16
J16 interface is the backlight interface of the LCD. See Table 5-12 for the pin distribution.
Pin Name Function
1 12V +12V power supply
5-10
Hardware System
2 PGNA Reference ground of the +12V power supply
3 ENABLE Enabled signal of LCD backlight

4 VBRT Control signal of LCD brightness
5 NA Reserved
Definition of J17
J17 is the power interface of the IDE device. See Table 5-13 for the pin distribution.
Pin Name Function
1 +12P0 +12V power supply
2 Ground Reference ground of the +12V power supply
3 Ground Reference ground of the +5V power supply
4 +5V0 +5V power supply
Definition of J18
J18 interface is a spare I/O external interface, not used temporarily.
Assembly drawing
The assembly drawing of the main board is shown in Figure 5-4.
5-11
Hardware System
Figure 5-4 Assembly drawing of the main board
5-12
Hardware System
5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points

LED function definition
Table 5-14 LED function definition
Indicator Function
D2 Temporarily reserved.
D3 +5V power indicator, illuminates when power is on.
D4 Illuminates when the IDE device is active.
D7 Illuminates when the network full-duplex communication is active.
D8 Illuminates when the network collision is active.
D9 Illuminates when the activating 100M network communication is active.
D10 Illuminates when the network connection is active.
D11 Illuminates when the activating 10M network communication is active.
D12 Power indicator of the USB second port, illuminates when power is on.
D13 Power indicator of the USB fourth port, illuminates when power is on.
D14 Power indicator of the USB third port, illuminates when power is on.
D15 Power indicator of the USB first port, illuminates when power is on.
D16 It is used with software.
D17 Reserved temporarily.
D19 Reserved temporarily.
D20 Illuminates when the FPGA configuration is done.
Function definition of test points

Table 5-15 Test points on the main board
Test point Signal under test Function

TP1 DDR_VREF DDR SRAM reference voltage
TP2 DDR_VTT DDR SRAM termination voltage
TP3 VDD +3.3V power supply voltage
TP4 VCC +5.0V power supply voltage
TP5 VCCINT FPGA kernel operating voltage
TP6 IRQ2 Interrupt 2
5-13
Hardware System
TP8 F_PLLVDD FPGA phase-lock loop voltage

TP9 2V5 +2.5V power supply voltage
TP10 MCF_BWE1 BYTE selection signal 1

TP12 FB_CS0 FlexBus chip selection signal 0
TP13 MCF_TA Sending acknowledge signal
TP14 MCF_OE Outputting enabled signal

TP16 ISP1561_CLK ISP1561 input clock


TP21 Nonuse /
TP22 MCF_TS Address latch signal
TP23 CLKIN CPU input clock

TP24 CPURSTI CPU reset signal
TP25 / ISP1561 interrupt 1
TP26 / ISP1561 interrupt 12
TP27 / Signal SM1 of ISP1561
TP28 / Signal A20OUT of ISP1561
TP29 / Signal PME of ISP1561

TP30 MCF_RW FlexBus read-write signal
TP31 Not used /
TP32 LCD_CLK Input clock for the LCD in the FPGA

TP33 FPGA_CLK Input clock when the FPGA runs
TP34 Not used /
TP35 L_CLK Input clock of SN75LVDS83
TP36 PGND Reference ground of +12V voltage
TP37 S_WE Write enabled input signal of display memory
S_CKE Clock enabled input signal of display

TP38
memory
TP39 S_OE Output enabled signal of display memory
5-14
Hardware System
TP40 S_CE Chip selection signal 1 of display memory
TP41 S_CLK Input clock of display memory

TP42 S_BWA BYTE input signal
TP43 GND Signal ground


Key definition
Table 5-16 Key definition
No. Function
S1 Reset the system manually
5.1.4 Replacement and Connection

Purpose
The main board is a key component. In case of failure, replace and service it promptly. Use
this procedure to replace the main board.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
Removal
The disassembly and assembly of the main board is convenient. After disconnecting the lines,
the front of the main board is as shown in Figure 5-3. See Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6 for how
to disassemble the main board.
Wear antistatic gloves before servicing or removing the board.
Make sure to power off the analyzer and disconnect it from the power supply
before installing/uninstalling the board.
5-15
Hardware System
Figure 5-5 Disassembly diagram of the main board-1
1Main board, signal board assembly 2Panhead screw M4X8
Figure 5-6 Disassembly diagram of the main board-2
1Main board shielding cover 2Main board, signal board bracket main
body
3 Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6 4Main board

(with lock washer)
5-16
Hardware System
Installation
Just perform the disassembly procedures reversely to assemble the main board.
Verification
When the analyzer is connected to the power supply and powered on, ensure D3 and D20
indicators are illuminated.
When the system initialization is completed, ensure D12, D13, D14 and D15 indicators are
illuminated.
Verify that the display works normally.
Verify that the cursor on the touchscreen works normally.
5.1.5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-17 lists errors and recommended actions concerning only hardware. The same errors
caused by software failures are not included here. But many errors need to be detected by
software. Errors caused by the damaged CPU are not fully listed in Table 5-17.
Table 5-17 Troubleshooting
No. Error Cause and Recommended Action
1 The system fails to 1. Possible causes: Input power failure, including

start improper power cord connection and abnormal voltage
of 3.3V/2.5V/1.5V/1.25V power; FLASH chip failure
causes that the operation system fails to be imported
into DDR SDRAM; DDR SDRAM chip failure causes the
abnormal running of the operation system; system main
clock abnormality (CLKIN).
2. Recommended action: Press the reset key to restart
the system and judge whether the errors are the same;
check whether the power indicator D3 works normally or
use the multimeter to judge whether the voltage of input
power is in the normal range; check whether the fuses
F1 and F2 are burnt; use the multimeter to judge
whether the voltage of 3.3V/2.5V/1.5V/1.25V power is in
the normal range; use the oscilloscope to check
whether the main clock is normal; use the test software
to test the FLASH or DDR (note: the program in the
FLASH can be erased if the FLASH is tested. Be
5-17
Hardware System
careful.)
2 Blank screen 1. Possible causes: the +12V power supply does not
supply power normally; the connecting line of the
converter is not connected normally; the enabled signal
of pin 3 in the J16 port is low level (when it is high level,
backlight points illuminate); FPGA does not reset (the
system cannot start); error occurs to the converter, and
etc.
2. Recommended action: Use the multimeter and
oscilloscope to check.
3 Screen blur and 1. Possible causes: improper connection of data line;
color cast crystal oscillator X1/X6 works abnormally; unsuccessful
FPGA configuration (indicator D20 is not on); FPGA
failure; chips U9 and U4 failures.
2. Recommended action: check by observation or using
the multimeter or oscillator.
4 Abnormal UART 1. Possible causes: connecting line improperly

communication connected; converting chips U16/U17/U18 failures;
UART of CPU failure.
2. Recommended action: check by observation or use
the multimeter or oscillator.
5 USB device 1. Possible causes: interface board failure; input clock
recognition failure (TP16ISP1561_CLK) abnormality; clock X5 (12MHZ)
abnormality; U24/U25 failure.
2. Recommended action: watch carefully when
handling, if the interface board is short-circuited or
overcurrent by other reasons, corresponding indicators
of D12/D13/D14/D15 will be off; other cases can be
checked using the oscilloscope.
6 Clock displays Possible causes and recommended action: if the time
incorrectly or display is abnormal or incorrect, use the oscilloscope to
2005-1-1 appears check whether the RTC clock X3 works normally or
when the analyzer check after replacing the U22; if 2005-1-1 appears
is started when the analyzer starts, check the battery connection
or check whether the battery is out of power.
5-18
Hardware System
7 1. Possible causes: connecting line connected

abnormally; driver chip U34 failure; SPI module of CPU
failure.
SPI communication
2. Recommended action: since the SPI communication
failure
part has not so many components, when error occurs,
the connecting line and driver chip U34 shall be
checked for failure.
8 1. Possible causes: dataline and power wire are

disconnected or connected improperly; FPGA chip
failure (unsuccessful configuration, failure in the chip
itself).
IDE device fails to 2. Recommended action: check whether the connection
operate normally is abnormal by observation or using the multimeter;
observe whether the D20 is on to judge whether the
FPGA configuration is successful; if it is normal, FPGA
is reset; if FPGA or driver chip failure is possible,
replace the corresponding chip and check.
9 1. Possible causes: abnormal connection; interface

board failure; crystal oscillator X2 abnormal operation;
network chip U21 failure.2. Recommended action:
check whether the connection is connected and the
Abnormal network
interface board works normally; check whether clock X2
communication
is normal by using the oscilloscope; check after
replacing network chip U21 (RTL8201).
Note: errors occur to the network need to be checked by
software usually.
5-19
Hardware System
5.2 Signal Processing Board

5.2.1 Introduction
The signal processing board of the BC-5500 drives the sensors, amplifies/filters/adjusts the
primary signals of sensors and converts them into digital signals, which are then identified
and stored. Moreover, this board monitors the operating voltage, aperture voltage and WBC
blank voltage (for detecting lamp installation and cleanliness of the flow cell), and controls
aperture zapping, consistent current source of aperture electrode, drive current of HGB LED,
digital pot, etc.
You can service and troubleshoot the signal processing board as instructed in Section 5.2 .

The signal processing board consists of the analog and digital parts. The analog part includes
the power supply, WBC/RBC/HGB signal channels and power monitoring channel. The digital
part deals with FPGA and interface connection, and pulse signal identification.
Function
Amplifying and collecting WBC signals (LAS, MAS)
Amplifying and collecting RBC/PLT signals
Detecting and collecting HGB signals
Identifying pulse signals
Storing cell information
Controlling analog channels and configuring signal amplification
Communicating with SPI
Monitoring power (operating voltage, WBC/HGB blank voltage and RBC aperture
voltage)
Zapping the aperture
The block diagram of the signal processing board is shown below.
5-20
Hardware System
Figure 5-7 Block diagram of the signal processing board
Description
Amplifying and collecting WBC signals (LAS, MAS)
The signal processing board first eliminates DC components from the WBC signals coming
from the pre-amplification board, then amplifies, filters, buffers the signals, which are then
converted to digital signals, and sent to the FPGA for pulse identification.
Amplifying and collecting RBC/PLT signals

nd
The signal processing board amplifies (low noise, 2 level and gain), buffers and A/D
converts the RBC signals, and then input the digital signals to FPGA for pulse identification.
Detecting and collecting HGB signals
The signal processing board converts the current signals of the HGB reaction bath to voltage
signals, then amplifies and converts the voltage signals to digital signals, which are then input
to the FPGA for inquiry by the main board.
Identifying pulse signals and storing cell information
While converting analog signals to digital signals, the FPGA stores the identified cell signal
peaks in the SRAM.
Controlling analog channels and configuring signal amplification
Through the I/O interface of FPGA, the signal processing board controls several switches
(including consistent current source switch, zapping voltage switch, consistent current
source/zapping switch and HGB LED switch) and the volumetric board, and configures the
amplification of the WBC/RBC/PLT/HGB channels as required.
5-21
Hardware System
Communicating with SPI
Through the SPI interface, the main board can control the signal processing board and
sampling, set/search parameters, read data, etc.
Monitoring power
The signal processing board monitors the operating voltage, WBC/HGB blank voltage and
RBC aperture voltage by sharing A/D with the HGB board.
Zapping the aperture
When the analyzer runs for a specific period or the RBC bath is blocked by foreign matters,
the signal processing board can zap the aperture, removing the dirty and foreign matters.
The signal processing board has 8 interfaces, which include LAS, MAS, RBC/PLT, HGB,
POWER, JTAG, VMB and MCB, as shown in Figure 5-8.
5-22
Hardware System
Figure 5-8 Interface layout of the signal processing board
The functions of the interfaces are described in Table 5-18.
Table 5-18 Interfaces of on the signal processing board
Interface Description Pins Note

Powers the lower pre-amplification board and /
J1 5
introduces its signals
Powers the upper pre-amplification board and /
J2 5
introduces its signals
Drives LEDs with constant current and /
J3 4
introduces the light intensity signals
Drives the aperture with constant current and /
J4 3
introduces the RBC/PLT pulse signals
5-23
Hardware System
For SPI communication and FPGA /

J5 20
downloading
J6 Introduces the 5V and 12V power supplies 6 /
J7 Not available to users 10 /
Powers the volumetric board and introduces /
J8 6
its signals
Definition of J1
J1 is for LAS signals. Refer to Table 5-19 for the definition of J1.
Table 5-19 LAS signal interface definition
Pin Name Description Signal Type
1 P12V +12V analog power supply +12V
2 AGND-W WBC analog ground /

4 LAS LAS signal ANALOG
Definition of J2
J2 is for MAS signals. Refer to Table 5-20 for the definition of J2.
Table 5-20 MAS signal interface definition
1 P12V +12V power supply +12V
4 MAS MAS signal ANALOG
Definition of J3
J3 is for HGB signals. Refer to Table 5-21 for the definition of J3.
Table 5-21 HGB signal interface definition

1 AGND Analog ground/shielding /
ground
2 HGB- Negative end of HGB-LED ANALOG
5-24
Hardware System
3 HGBIN HGB signal input ANALOG
4 HGB+ Positive end of HGB-LED ANALOG
Definition of J4
J4 is for RBC/PLT signals. Refer to Table 5-22 for the definition of J4.
Table 5-22 RBC/PLT signal interface definition
1 SHELL Shielding ground /
2 RBC RBC/PLT signals ANALOG
3 AGND-R RBC analog ground /
Definition of J5
J5 is for connection with the main board. Refer to Table 5-23 for the definition of J5.
Table 5-23 Main board interface definition
1 SDI SPI data input LVTTL
2 GND Digital ground /

3 SCK SPI clock LVTTL
4 SDO SPI data output LVTTL
5 nCS SPI chip select LVTTL
7 N.C. Null /
8 N.C. Null /
9 nPRG Program enabling /
10 N.C. Null /
11 DCLK Clock LVTTL

13 DONE Configuration finished LVTTL
14 VDD +3.3V digital power supply +3.3V

15 nCONFIG Start configuration LVTTL
16 nCE FPGA enabling LVTTL
17 DATA Configuration data output LVTTL

18 nCSO Configuration chip select LVTTL
19 ASDI Configuration data input LVTTL
5-25
Hardware System
Definition of J6
J6 is for connection with the power supply. Refer to Table 5-24 for the definition of J6.
Table 5-24 Power supply interface definition
1 5A0 +5V input +5V
2 5A0 +5V input +5V
3 12A0 +12V input +12V
4 AGND Analog ground /
Definition of J7
J7 is for JTAG debugging. Refer to Table 5-25 for the definition of J7.
Table 5-25 JTAG interface definition

1 TCK Clock LVTTL
3 TDO Data output LVTTL
5 TMS Mode select LVTTL
7 N.C. Null /
8 N.C. Null /
9 TDI Data input LVTTL

Definition of J8
J8 is for connection with the volumetric board. Refer to Table 5-26 for the definition of J8.
Table 5-26 Volumetric board interface definition

1 P12V +12V analog power supply +12V
5-26
Hardware System
3 RES1 Reserved
4 nSTART Start counting LVTTL
5 nSTOP Stop counting LVTTL
6 nVMBLED Optical coupler control LVTTL
Assembly drawing
The assembly drawing of the main board is shown in Figure 5-9.
5-27
Hardware System
Figure 5-9 Assembly of the signal processing board

Since the adjustable parameters are adjusted by the main board, you can set parameters in
the software screen of the main board.
5-28
Hardware System
Table 5-27 LED function definition of the signal processing board
LED Description
D11 the 3.3V power supply
D14 the 5V power supply
D15 the 12V power supply
D22 FPGA configuration done
D23 the communication status
D24 WBC sampling
D25 RBC sampling

Table 5-28 Test points on the signal processing board
Test Test
Description Description
Point Point
Low A/D reference voltage of VDD 3.3V
TP1 TP26
the LAS channel
High A/D reference voltage of VDDC 1.5V

TP2 TP27
the MAS channel
Crystal oscillator X1 clock +12V

TP3 TP28
output
High A/D reference voltage of 3.3V detection (by parting)

TP4 TP29
the LAS channel
TP5 AGND TP30 +5V detection (by parting)
TP6 AGND TP31 +12V detection (by parting)
TP7 SRAM read/write clock TP32 +55V detection (by parting)
TP8 WBC sampling clock TP33 -5V detection (by parting)
Low A/D reference voltage of Voltage of the HGB channel after

TP9 TP34
the MAS channel I/V
A/D reference voltage of the Output of amplified HGB voltage

TP10 TP35
HGB channel
A/D sampling clock of the HGB HGB lamp switch control

TP11 TP36
channel
TP12 +99V TP37 A/D reference voltage of the RBC
5-29
Hardware System
channel
Zapping voltage A/D sampling clock of the RBC

TP13 TP38
channel
TP 14 Zapping control TP39 SRAM read/write signals

st
RBC signals amplified for 1 Analog RBC signals input
TP 15 TP40
level
nd
RBC signals amplified for 2 LAS signals amplified
TP 16 TP41
level
rd
RBC signals amplified for 3 MAS signals amplified
TP 17 TP42
level
RBC signals filtered LAS signals output from the

TP 19 TP43
pre-amplification board
Aperture voltage MAS signals output from the
TP 19 TP44
pre-amplification board
Consistent current source Chip select signals of the SPI
TP 20 TP45
control signals interface
Consistent current A/D signal input to MAS

TP 21 source/zapping switch control TP46
signals
TP 22 +55V TP47 Clock signals of the SPI interface
TP 23 RBC signals buffered TP48 A/D signal input to LAS
TP 24 +5V TP49 LAS blank voltage (amplified)

TP 25 -5V
Refer to Figure 5-9 for the layout of the test points.

Purpose
The signal processing board is a key component. In case of failure, replace and service it
promptly. Follow this procedure to replace the signal processing board.
Tools
Pliers (spare)
5-30
Hardware System
Removal
To avoid damaging the board and other parts, follow this procedure to remove it:
1. Power off the analyzer and ensure all boards are not live.
2. Disconnect the cable from the J6 socket as per Figure 5-8.
3. Remove the upper shielding box using the screwdriver as per Figure 5-12.
4. Unplug cables successively from the J8, J5, J2, J1, J3 and J4 sockets as per Figure 5-8.
5. Loosen the 6 screws on the board using the screwdriver as per Figure 5-11. You can
remove the shielding box as needed.
6. Remove the signal processing board.
Figure 5-10 Removing the lower shielding box from the signal processing board
1Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6 2Signal processing board
3Lower shielding box
5-31
Hardware System
Figure 5-11 Removing the signal processing board-1
1 Bracket of main board and signal 3 Cross-recessed panhead screw

processing board M3x6
2Signal processing board
5-32
Hardware System
Figure 5-12 Removing the signal processing board-2
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 2 Upper shielding box of signal

M3x6 processing board
3Signal processing board 4Shielding box of main board
Installation
Follow this procedure to install the signal processing board on the analyzer:
1. Install the lower shielding box on the signal processing board as per Figure 5-10.
2. Fix the board to the analyzer using screws as per Figure 5-11.
3. Fix the upper shielding box to the signal processing board as per Figure 5-12.
4. Connect other parts to the signal processing board as per Figure 5-8.
Before fixing the upper shielding box, connect the RBC cable to the RBC
socket (J4).
5-33
Hardware System
Verification
After installation, power on the analyzer and check the signal processing board to see
whether the power indicator illuminates and the status indicator flashes normally. If yes, the
verification is passed. See LED function definition.
Power failure
Error message Judging Criteria Cause and Recommended Action
The measured
The 3.3v circuit is not jointed properly / The earth
value exceeds the
3.3v power error impedance decreases / The power IC and related
normal range
A/D converter go wrong.
(3.2v-3.4v).
The measured
The +5v circuit is not jointed properly / The earth
value exceeds the
+5v power error impedance decreases / The power IC and related
normal range
(4.85v-5.25v).
The measured
The -5v circuit is not jointed properly / The earth
value exceeds the
-5v power error impedance decreases / The power IC and related
normal range
(-4.85v-5.25v).
The measured
value exceeds the
normal range
(11.4v-12.6v).
The measured
value exceeds the
normal range
(50v-60v).
Signal error
Error message Judging Criteria Cause and Recommended Action

Aperture voltage The measured value NCONST signal is abnormal / The 55v
5-34
Hardware System
abnormal exceeds the normal voltage-regulator diode goes wrong / The

range (10v-14v). relay is wrongly switched on/off / The
aperture is blocked / The related A/D
converter goes wrong.
The HGB LED or related A/D converter goes
The measured value
HGB blank voltage wrong.
exceeds the normal
abnormal Adjust the HGB gain and replace the A/D
range (2.0v-2.4v).
converter.
The related A/D goes wrong. The flow cell is
The measured value
LAS blank voltage dirty.
exceeds the normal
abnormal Replace the A/D converter and clean the flow
range (0-400mv).
cell.
Bubbles appear in the metering tube or the

Start/Stop signal
Volumetric board volumetric board goes wrong.
delay exceeds the
abnormal Unclog the RBC aperture and clean the
normal range (9-11s).
fluidic system.
Communication failure
Error message Judging Criteria Cause and Solution
The main board

Send the restart command to communicate
FIFO data void receives the special
again.
frame 011111111110.
The main board
Communication receives the frame of The circuit or the signal processing board
error check failure (not goes wrong.
011111111110).
5-35
Hardware System
5.3 Driver Board

5.3.1 Introduction
The driver board of the BC-5500 controls/drives the power parts and monitors the system
status.
You can service and troubleshoot the driver board as instructed in Section 5.3.

Functions
Serial communication
Driving step motors
Controlling DC motors
Driving valves and pumps
Controlling temperature
Controlling the built-in scanner
Controlling the pneumatic unit, electromagnet, laser, buzzer and indicators
Monitoring system status
Monitoring reagent status
The block diagram of the driver board is shown below:
Values&Pumps
Clock Multi-Clock
Signals Samples
Circuit
Output Feeding
GPIO
Main RESET Values&Pumps Board

Circuit Samples
Board MCU1 Feeding Unit (3100-30-41204)
(3100-30-
UART
41182) MCU2 Mix Puncture

Conversion 1 Step Motors & Poisition Sensors
Unit
Bus
UART
2
MCU3 Syringe Unit Step Motors & Poisition Sensors
Conversion Interface
UART
3
Main MCU IRQ
BUS
4
MCU4 Tempture Unit Heaters & Tempture Sensors
5
Config FPGA 6
Stir DC Motors &
FPGA Config Poisition Sensors
Config
Control
SPI
Chip Other Unit

5V MCU5
Two Compressor Pneumatic
12V
GPIOs 7 Control Control
24V
ISP Control Board
12V LDO 5VA Inner Liquid Gas Laser (3100-30-
Scanner Tempture Voltage
Level Pressure Detect 41201)
5V LDO 3.3V Detect Detect
Detect Detect And
Circuit Circuit
Reset Circuit Circuit Control
3.3V LDO 1.5V All PSENs&RESETs Circuit
Laser
Liquid Tempture Gas Control
Sensors Sensors Pressure Board
(3100-30-
41194)
Figure 5-13 Block diagram of the driver board
5-36
Hardware System
Description
Serial communication
The driver board consists of 6 MCUs, as shown in Figure 5-13, which include the mid control
unit (main MCU in Figure 5-13), sample transport unit, mix & pierce unit, syringe unit,
temperature unit and other unit.
The driver board communicates with the main board through the mid control board using
UART, receiving control instructions from and sending response instructions to the main
board. The communication parameters include:
Baud rate: 38400bps
Start bit: 1 bit
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1 bit
Check mode: Even check
The mid control unit communicates with other 5 MCUs through the extended serial ports of
FPGA (EP1C3T144C8), sending control instructions to and receiving response instructions
from other MCUs. The communication parameters include:
Start bit: 1 bit
Baud rate: 19200bps
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1 bit
Check mode: Even check
Driving step motors
The driver board drives 6 step motors, which include:

Mix motor
Wipe motor
Autoloader loading motor
Autoloader feeding motor (also acting as the unloading motor)
Whole blood aspiration motor
Sample injection motor
The step motors are driven by bipolar consistent current and are monitored by corresponding
position sensors.
Controlling DC motors
The driver board has two DC motor circuits to control the mixing in the DIFF and BASO
reaction baths. The MCU sends the control signals to the drive chip through the photocoupler
to start/stop the motors. The photocoupler detects the speed signals and send them to the
MCU, which then calculates the rotation speed of the motors.
Driving valves and pumps
The driver board controls 96 pumps and valves, which include 34 fluidic valves, 33 air valves
5-37
Hardware System
and one waste pump. The mid control unit sends the control signals of SV1~SV88 to the
pump/valve buffer of FPGA. As the data in the valve/pump buffer changes, the FPGA outputs
the valve/pump signals to the M54972 chip to control the valves and pumps. The control
signals of SV89~SV96 are passed to M54972 chip by the sample transport unit.
Controlling temperature
The driver board controls the temperature of three parts, which include:
Reagent preheating
Reaction bath
Laser diode temperature
Comparing the measured temperature with the target temperature, the MCU turns on/off the
heater via PID algorithm to control the temperature correctly.
Controlling the built-in scanner
The built-in scanner scans the bar codes on tubes and tube racks. The driver board controls
the scanner through FPGA, which communicates with the scanner via the UART.
Controlling the pneumatic unit, electromagnet, laser, buzzer and indicators
The pneumatic unit provides air force for the main unit and is driven by the pneumatic control
board. The driver board sends only the control signals of relay, which are converted and sent
to the pneumatic control board through the interface board.
The electromagnet is used to control the sample compartment door. The driver board sends
control signals to the drive chip through the photocoupler to open the sample compartment
door (door is closed manually).
The lamp circuit on the driver board turns on/off the laser, detects the feedback voltage of the
laser control board and regulates the digital pot on the laser control board. The laser on/off
signals are converted and sent to the laser control board. The feedback voltage signals are
amplified by the laser control board and then passed to the driver board, which converts them
to digital signals and sent them to the MCU for calculation. The driver board communicates
with the laser control board via the SPI interface to control the digital pot. The driver board
sends data to the laser control board, which does not need to send response to the driver
board.
The control signals of buzzer and indicators coming from the FPGA are converted and sent to
the indicator board to control the buzzer and indicators.
Monitoring system status
The driver board monitors the temperature, pressure and voltage of the system, and sends
corresponding system parameters to the main board when receiving inquiry instructions from
5-38
Hardware System
the main board.
The ambient temperature and laser tube temperature are measured respectively by the
sensors on the interface board and laser control board. The temperature signals coming from
the sensors are sent to the A/D converter after I/V conversion and amplification. The digital
signals are then passed to the MCU, which calculate the temperature value based on the
signals.
The driver board has 5 pressure circuits to measure the pressure of the vacuum chamber (2
channels), pressure chamber (2 channels) and sheath fluid (one channel). The pressure
signals coming from the pressure sensors are converted to digital signals, which are then
passed to the MCU.
The voltage circuit controls all power supplies (24V, 12V, 5V and 3.3V) on the driver board.
Monitoring reagent status
The driver board monitors the reagent status through the passive float switch with 15
channels.
The driver board has 37 interfaces, as shown in
Figure 5-14.
J28 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J47 J48 J31

J30
J21
J3 J2 J10
J29
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5
J22
J38 J12
J34 J24
J33
J32 J18
J17
J1
J36 J11
J35
J14 J43 J44 J15 J20 J27 J13
Figure 5-14 Interface layout of the driver board
5-39
Hardware System
The functions of the interfaces are described in.Table 5-29.
Table 5-29 Interfaces on the driver board

Used when FPGA
parameters are
J1 For FPGA configuration (AS mode) 10
downloaded for the
first time
J2 Connected to the power board 4 /
J3 Connected to the main board /
J4-J8 34 /
Connected to valves
J15, J47 20 /
J9 For FPGA debugging 10
J12 For communication debugging 4
J14 For 5VDC output 2
Disabled
Connected to the reserved temperature
J34 3
sensor
J37 Connected to the laser diode heater 6
J10 Connected to the indicator board 6 /
J11 Connected to sample transport motors 8 /
J13 Connected to sample transport sensors 20 /
J17 Connected to the mix motors 4 /
J18 Connected to the wipe motors 4 /
J20 Connected to the mix&pierce motors 24 /
Connected to the syringes, mix motors and /
J21 20
SRV sensors
Connected to the whole blood aspiration /
J22 4
motor
Connected to the WBC injection syringe /
J24 4
motor
Connected to sensors detecting the front /
J27 12
door, open vial sampling and probe wipes
J28 Connected to the pneumatic control board 4 /
Connected to sensors detecting the reagent /
J29 20
status and laser box
J30 For laser control 12 /
J31 Connected to the mix motors 4 /
Connected to the ambient temperature /
J32 3
sensor
J33 Connected to the laser diode temperature 3 /
5-40
Hardware System
sensor
J35 Connected to the heater of the preheat bath 6 /
J36 Connected to the heater of the reaction bath 6 /
J38 Connected to the internal reagents 12 /
J43 Connected to the fans of the main unit 5 /
J44 Connected to the power supply 8 /
J48 Connected to the electromagnet 2 /
Definition of J1
J1 is used for FPGA configuration (AS mode). Refer to Table 5-30 for the definition of J1.
Table 5-30 Definition of the interface for FPGA configuration
Pin Name Pin Name
1 F_DCLK 2 AGND
3 F_CONFDONE 4 VDD
5 F_CONFIG 6 F_NCE
7 F_DATA 8 F_NCSC
9 F_ASDO 10 GND
Definition of J2
J2 is used for connection with the power board. Refer to Table 5-31 for the definition of J2.
Table 5-31 Definition of the interface for power board
Pin Name Description
1 POWER_ON Power on signal

2 POWER_OFF Power off signal
3 GND Ground
4 STANDBY Standby signal
Definition of J3
J3 is used for connection with the main board. Refer to Table 5-32 for the definition of J3.
Table 5-32 Definition of the interface for main board
1 PC_RXD Signals received
2 PC_TXD Signals sent
3 GND GND
5-41
Hardware System
4 PC_PSEN PSEN signals of the mid control unit
5 PC_RESET Reset signals of the mid control unit
Definition of J4-J8 and J47
J4, J5, J6, J7, J8 and J47 are used for connection with valves and pumps. Refer to Table
5-33 - Table 5-38 for the definition of these interfaces.
Table 5-33 Valve/pump interface- Definition of J4
Pin Name Description Pin Name Description

1 NC Not contact 2 NC Not contact
3 4 SV01 Valve 1
5 6 SV02 Valve 2
7 8 SV03 Valve 3
9 10 SV04 Valve 4
11 12 SV05 Valve 5
13 14 SV06 Valve 6
15 16 SV07 Valve 7
17 18 SV08 Valve 8
12V 12V power supply
19 20 SV09 Valve 9
21 22 SV10 Valve 10
23 24 SV11 Valve 11
25 26 SV12 Valve 12
27 28 SV13 Valve 13
29 30 SV14 Valve 14
31 32 SV15 Valve 15
33 34 SV16 Valve 16

1 12V 12V power supply 2 SV17 Valve 17
5 6 SV18 Valve 18
7 8 SV19 Valve 19
9 10 SV20 Valve 20
11 12 SV21 Valve 21
13 14 SV22 Valve 22
15 16 SV23 Valve 23
17 18 SV24 Valve 24
19 20 SV25 Valve 25
21 22 SV26 Valve 26
23 24 SV27 Valve 27
5-42
Hardware System
25 26 SV28 Valve 28
27 28 SV29 Valve 29
29 30 SV30 Valve 30
31 32 SV31 Valve 31
33 34 SV32 Valve 32
1 2 SV33 Valve 33
3 4 SV34 Valve 34
7 8 SV35 Valve 35
9 10 SV36 Valve 36
11 12 SV37 Valve 37
13 14 SV38 Valve 38
15 16 SV39 Valve 39
17 18 SV40 Valve 40
19 20 SV41 Valve 41
21 22 SV42 Valve 42
23 24 SV43 Valve 43
25 26 SV44 Valve 44
27 28 SV45 Valve 45
29 30 SV46 Valve 46
31 32 SV47 Valve 47
33 34 SV48 Valve 48

1 2 SV49 Valve 49

5 6 SV51 Valve 51
9 10 SV52 Valve 52
11 12 SV53 Valve 53
13 14 SV54 Valve 54
17 18 SV56 Valve 56
19 20 SV57 Valve 57
21 22 SV58 Valve 58
5-43
Hardware System
23 24 SV59 Valve 59
25 26 SV60 Valve 60
27 28 SV61 Valve 61
29 30 SV62 Valve 62
31 32 SV63 Valve 63
33 34 SV64 Valve 64

1 2 SV65 Valve 65
3 4 SV66 Valve 66
5 6 SV67 Valve 67
7 8 SV68 Valve 68
11 12 SV69 Valve 69
13 14 SV70 Valve 70
15 16 SV71 Valve 71
17 18 SV72 Valve 72
19 20 SV73 Valve 73
21 22 SV74 Valve 74
23 24 SV75 Valve 75
25 26 SV76 Valve 76
27 28 SV77 Valve 77
29 30 SV78 Valve 78
31 32 SV79 Valve 79
33 34 SV80 Valve 80

1 2 SV81 Valve 81
3 4 SV82 Valve 82
5 6 SV83 Valve 83
7 12V power 8 SV84 Valve 84
12V
9 supply 10 SV85 Valve 85
11 12 SV86 Valve 86
13 14 SV87 Valve 87
15 16 SV88 Valve 88
5-44
Hardware System
Definition of J9
J9 is used for FPGA debugging and disabled on the analyzer.
Definition of J10
J10 is used for connection with the indicator board. Refer to Table 5-39 for the definition of
J10.
Table 5-39 Definition of the interface for indicator board
1 VCC 5V power supply
2 GND Ground
3 POWER_ON Power on signal
4 BUZ Buzzer signal
5 WORK_LED Indicator signal 1
6 STANDBY Indicator signal 2
Definition of J11
J11 is used for connection with the sample transport motor. Refer to Table 5-40 for the
definition of J11.
Table 5-40 Definition of the interface for sample transport motor
1 ASLX_BN B-phase winding of the autoloader loading motor
2 ASLX_B BN-phase winding of the autoloader loading motor
3 ASLX_AN A-phase winding of the autoloader loading motor
4 ASLX_A AN-phase winding of the autoloader loading motor
5lef ASY_BN BN-phase winding of the autoloader feeding motor
6 ASY_B B-phase winding of the autoloader feeding motor
7 ASY_AN AN-phase winding of the autoloader feeding motor
8 ASY_A A-phase winding of the autoloader feeding motor
Definition of J12
J12 is used for communication debugging and disabled on the analyzer.
Definition of J13
J13 is used for connection with the sample transport unit sensors via an adapter. Refer to
Table 5-41 for the definition of J13.
5-45
Hardware System
Table 5-41 Definition of the interface for sample transport sensors

Autoloader feeding Tube rack
1 YLEFT_IN 2 YVALID_IN
sensor (left) detection sensor
Autoloader
Autoloader feeding
3 YRIGHT_IN 4 YRET_IN feeding zero
photocoupler (right)
position sensor
Sensor for
detecting the stop
Reagent
5 HAVE_IN 6 XL_E_IN position of the
photocoupler
autoloader
loading motor
Sensor for
Sample volume detecting the start
7 SAMPLEQ_IN detection sensor 8 XL_S_IN position of the
(reserved) autoloader
loading motor
Sensor for
detecting the end
9 VCC +5V power supply 10 XUL_S_IN
of the unloader
unit
Sensor for
detecting the zero
11 VCC +5V power supply 12 XUL_E_IN
position of the
unloader unit
SCANNER_T Scanner trigger SCANNER_O

15 16 Scanner output 1
RIGGER signal UT1
SCANNER_T Signals sent by SCANNER_O

XD scanner UT2
SCANNER_R Signals received by SCANNER_O

XD scanner UT2
The sensors of the sample transport unit are shown in the figure below.
5-46
Hardware System
Figure 5-15 Sensors of the sample transport unit
No. Name Cable to be connected

1 Sensor for detecting the full status of the S-FULL
unloader
2 Sensor for detecting the status of unloading S-RST
reset
3 Sensor for detecting the start position of the S-YINT
autoloader feeding motor
4 Autoloader feeding sensor (left) S-LEFT
5 Fixed-type bar code scanner Sample transport adapter
J6
6 Sensor for detecting the status of the tube S-TUBE
7 Autoloader feeding sensor (right) S-RIGHT
8 Sensor for detecting the stop position of the S-XEND
autoloader loading motor
9 Sensitive switch for autoloader loading S-READY
10 Sample feeding motor M-ASY
11 Sensor for detecting the start position of the S-XINT
12 Sample loading motor M-ASLX
Definition of J14
J14 is used for outputting 5V DC power supply and disabled on the analyzer.
Definition of J15
J15 is used for the connection with pumps and valves of the mix & pierce unit. Refer to Table
5-42 for the definition of J15.
5-47
Hardware System
Table 5-42 Definition of the interface for pumps/valves of the mix&pierce unit

1 2 SV89 Valve 89
3 4 SV90 Valve 90
5 6 SV91 Valve 91
7 8 SV92 Valve 92
9 10 SV93 Valve 93
11 12 SV94 Valve 94
13 14 SV95 Valve 95
15 16 SV96 Valve 96
Definition of J17
J17 is used for connection with the mix motor. Refer to Table 5-43 for the definition of J17.
Table 5-43 Definition of the interface for mix motor
1 ASR_BN BN phase of the mix motor
2 ASR_B B phase of the mix motor
3 ASR_AN AN phase of the mix motor
4 ASR_A A phase of the mix motor
Definition of J18
J18 is used for connection with the wipe motor. Refer to Table 5-44 for the definition of J18.
Table 5-44 Definition of the interface for wipe motor
1 MS_BN BN phase of the wipe motor
2 MS_B B phase of the wipe motor
3 MS_AN AN phase of the wipe motor
4 MS_A A phase of the wipe motor
Definition of J20
J20 is used for connection with sensors of the mix&pierce unit. Refer to Table 5-45 for the
definition of J20.
5-48
Hardware System
Table 5-45 Definition of the interface for sensors of the mix&pierce unit

+5V power
1 VCC +5V power supply 2 VCC
supply

Pinch cylinder start Mix motor stop
5 SMUX_S_FS 6 ASR_E_FS
point sensor position sensor
+5V power
supply
Pinch cylinder end Pierce position

11 SMUX_E_FS 12 PU_FS
point sensor sensor
+5V power
supply
Elevating cylinder
SMUZ_UP_F Mix motor start
17 upper position 18 ASR_S_FS
S position sensor
sensor
+5V power
supply
Elevating cylinder
Compartment
23 SMUZ_D_FS lower position 24 DR_SEN1
door sensor
sensor
Definition of J21
J21 is used for connection with sensors of the syringe unit. Refer to Table 5-46 for the
definition of J21.
Table 5-46 Definition of the interface for sensors of the syringe unit
+5V power
supply
5 SWB_FS Sensor for 6 SWBC_SI Sensor for
5-49
Hardware System
detecting start detecting start

position of the position of the
whole blood sample injection
aspiration syringe syringe
+5V power
supply
Sensor for
Sensor for
detecting mix
detecting front-end
11 SRV_FRONT 12 DC_SEN1 motor speed of
blood volume of
the BASO
sample valve
reaction bath
+5V power
supply
15 VCC +5V power supply 16 GND Ground
Sensor for
detecting mix
17 GND Ground 18 DC_SEN2 motor speed of
the DIFF
reaction bath
Sensor for
detecting back-end +5V power
19 SRV_BACK 20 VCC
blood volume of supply
sample valve
Definition of J22
J22 is used for connection with the whole blood aspiration syringe motor. Refer to Table 5-47
for the definition of J22.
Table 5-47 Definition of the interface for the whole blood aspiration syringe motor
1 SWB_BN BN phase of the whole blood aspiration syringe motor

2 SWB_B B phase of the whole blood aspiration syringe motor
3 SWB_AN AN phase of the whole blood aspiration syringe motor
4 SWB_A A phase of the whole blood aspiration syringe motor
5-50
Hardware System
Definition of J24
J24 is used for connection with the WBC injection syringe motor. Refer to Table 5-48 for the
definition of J24.
Table 5-48 Definition of the interface for the WBC injection syringe motor

1 SWBC_SI_BN BN phase of the WBC injection syringe motor
2 SWBC_SI_B B phase of the WBC injection syringe motor
3 SWBC_SI_AN AN phase of the WBC injection syringe motor
4 SWBC_SI_A A phase of the WBC injection syringe motor
Definition of J27
J27 is used for connection with sensors. Refer to Table 5-49 for the definition of J27.
Table 5-49 Definition of the interface for sensors
Pin Definition Function Pin Definition Function
+5V power
1 VCC 2 VCC +5V power supply
supply
Sensor for
Sensor for detecting
SHELL_DOOR detecting the
5 6 MS_D_FS lower position of the
_FS status of the front
wipe
door
Sensitive switch
7 START_KEY for manual 8 GND Ground
loading
Definition of J28
J28 is used for connection with the pneumatic control board. Refer to Table 5-50 for the
definition of J28.
Table 5-50 Definition of the interface for the pneumatic control board
5-51
Hardware System
1 VCC power supply
2 AIR_RELAY Control signals of the pneumatic unit

3 12V0 12VDC
4 PGND Ground
Definition of J29
J29 is used for connection with the reagent sensor. Refer to Table 5-51 for the definition of
J29.
Table 5-51 Definition of the interface for the reagent sensor
Float switch of the

2 LIQ_SEN1 LEO(I) reagent 1 GND Ground
container
LEO(II) float
4 LIQ_SEN2 3 GND Ground
switch
Float switch of the

6 LIQ_SEN3 WBC/BASO 5 GND Ground
reagent container
Float switch of the

diluent container
Float switch of the

10 LIQ_SEN5 HGB lyse 9 GND Ground
container
Float switch of the

cleanser container
Backup float
14 LIQ_SEN7 switch, with cable 13 GND Ground
prepared
Float switch of the

waste container
Backup float
18 LIQ_SEN9 switch, without 17 GND Ground
cable
SEN_LASE Sensor for

20 19 GND Ground
R detecting the laser
5-52
Hardware System
box
Definition of J30
J30 is used for laser control. Refer to Table 5-52 for the definition of J30.
Table 5-52 Definition of the interface for laser control
1 12V0 power supply
2 PGND Power ground

3 LASER Feedback voltage of light intensity or light power
4 GND Ground
5 SPI_CLK SPI communication clock signals

6 GND Ground
SPI communication signals sent by the driver board to the

7 SPI_DIN
laser control board
8 VCC 5V power supply
9 SPI_CS3 SPI communication gating signals
10 CONTROL Laser tube switch signals
11 NC Not contact
12 NC Not contact
Definition of J31
J31 is used for connection with the DC motor. Refer to Table 5-53 for the definition of J31.
Table 5-53 Definition of the interface for the DC motor
1 DCM2_ON/ DIFF mix motor signals
2 12V0 12V power supply

3 DCM1_ON/ BASO mix motor signals
Definition of J32, J33, J34
J32, J33 and J34 are for connection with temperature sensors. J34 is reserved and disabled
on the analyzer. Refer to Table 5-54 and Table 5-55 for the definition of J32 and J33.
Table 5-54 Definition of J32- interface for the ambient temperature sensor
5-53
Hardware System
1 AMBINET_T_A Ambient temperature sensor

2 AVCC +5V power supply
3 GND Power supply ground
Table 5-55 Definition of J33- interface for the laser box temperature sensor
1 LD_T_A Laser box temperature sensor
2 AVCC +5V power supply
3 GND Power supply ground
Definition of J35
J35 is used for connection with the heater of the preheating bath. Refer to Table 5-56 for the
definition of J35.
Table 5-56 Definition of the interface for the heater of the preheating bath
1 24V0
Connecting to the two ends of the heater.
4 HT1
2 / Connecting to the two ends of the temperature

3 / switch.
5 PRTD_REF Connecting to the preheating temperature

6 PRTD_T1 sensor
Definition of J36
J36 is used for connection with the heater of the reaction bath. Refer to Table 5-57 for the
definition of J36.
Table 5-57 Definition of the interface for the heater of the reaction bath
1 24V0 Connecting to the two ends of the heater.
4 HT2 /
Connecting to the two ends of the temperature

2 /
switch.
3 / /
5-54
Hardware System
Connecting to the temperature sensor of the

5 PRTD_REF
reaction bath.
6 PRTD_T2 /
Definition of J37
J37 is the interface of the laser diode heater. Refer to Table 5-58 for the definition of J37.
Table 5-58 Definition of the interface for the laser diode heater
1 24V0 1 and 4 connected to the ends of the laser diode

4 HT3 heater .
2 / 2 and 3 connected to the ends of the laser diode

3 / temperature switch.
5 PRTD_REF Connected to the laser diode temperature

6 PRTD_T3 sensor.
Definition of J38
J38 is used for the internal reagent. Refer to Table 5-59 for the definition of J38.
Table 5-59 Definition of the interface for the internal reagent
2 LIQ_SEN10 Float switch of the 1 GND

Ground
DIL reservoir

Ground
FCM reservoir

Ground
cleanser reservoir

Ground
WC1 reservoir

Ground
WC2 reservoir
12 LIQ_SEN15 Reserved float 11 GND

switch without Ground
cable
5-55
Hardware System
Definition of J43
J43 is used for connection with the fans of the main unit. Refer to Table 5-60 for the definition
of J43.
Table 5-60 Definition of the interface for the main unit fans
1 +12V 12V power supply
2 PGND Power ground
3 NC Not contact
4 +12V 12V power supply
5 PGND Power ground
Definition of J44
J44 is used for connection with the power supply. Refer to 5-61 for the definition of J44.
Table 5-61 Definition of the interface for the power supply
1 5V 5V power supply 5 GND Ground
2 +12V 6 PGND Power ground

12V power supply
3 +12V 7 PGND Power ground
4 +24V 24V power supply 8 PGND Power ground
Definition of J48
J48 is used for connection with the electromagnet. Refer to 5-62 for the definition of J48.
Table 5-62 Definition of the interface for the electromagnet

1 DR1_ON Electromagnet driving signals
Assembly drawing
The assembly drawing of the driver board is shown in Figure 5-16.
5-56
Hardware System
Figure 5-16 Assembly drawing of the driver board

5-57
Hardware System
Table 5-63 LED function definition of the driver board
Indicator Description
D1 Illuminates during FPGA configuration.
D2 Flashes every 0.5s when the mid control unit runs normally.
D3 Flashes every 0.5s when the sample transport unit runs normally.
D12 Flashes every 0.5s when the FPGA runs normally.
D13 Flashes every 0.5s when the syringe unit runs normally.
D14 Flashes every 0.5s when other units run normally.

D16 Flashes every 0.5s when the temperature unit runs normally.
D17 Illuminates when the 5V analog power supply is normally.
D21 Indicates the working status of the preheating heater. It lights on during
heating, lights off when heating is stopped, and flashes during temperature
tuning.
D22 Indicates the working status of the reaction bath heater. It lights on during
heating, lights off when heating is stopped, and flashes during temperature
tuning.
D23 Indicates the working status of the laser diode heater.
D24 Illuminates when the 5V digital power supply is normally.

D25 Illuminates when the 12V power supply is normally.
D26 Illuminates when the 3.3V power supply is normally.
D27 Illuminates when the 24V power supply is normally.
Table 5-64 Test points on the driver board
No. Test Point Pin Description
1 TP1 PIN3 of X1 Clock output signals of the 16M crystal

oscillator, system clock
2 TP2 PIN1 of U76 Amplified voltage signals converted (I/V)

from the ambient temperature signals

from the laser tube temperature signals

from the laser diode temperature signals
5-58
Hardware System
5 TP5 PIN2 of U78 A/D reference voltage of the temperature,

pressure, voltage and laser feedback
voltage. The normal reference voltage is
2.5V.
6 TP6 PIN2 of PS2 Voltage signals output by the 160KPa
pressure sensor
pressure sensor

pressure sensor
9 TP9 PIN2 of PS4 Voltage signals output by the -40KPa

pressure sensor
10 TP10 PIN2 of PS5 Voltage signals output by the -85KPa

pressure sensor
11 TP11 PIN2 of PS6 Voltage signals output by the reserved

pressure sensor whose full range is 200KPa.
12 TP12 PIN7 of U77 Feedback voltage signals of laser intensity
13 TP13 PIN7 of U79 Parting signals (30.15V) of VCC (+5VDC)
14 TP14 SIO_LATCH Data latch signals coming from the valve

chip of the mid control unit
15 TP15 PIN7 of U80 Parting signals (3 0.15V) of 24V0

(+24VDC)
16 TP16 PIN1 of U80 Parting signals (3 0.15V) of 12V0

(+12VDC)
17 TP17 PIN1 of U79 Parting signals (3 0.15V) of AVCC

(+5VDC)
18 TP18 PIN1 of U31 Power supply signals (50.25V) of AVCC
(+5VDC)
19 TP19 PIN3 of X2 Clock of 10M crystal oscillator
20 TP20 PIN2 of U31 Analog ground
21 TP21 GND Digital ground

22 TP22 VDD +3.3VDC power supply (3.30.15V)
23 TP23 1V5 +1.5VDC power supply (1.50.075V)
24 TP24 VCC +5VDC power supply (50.25V)

25 TP25 24V0 +24VDC power supply (241.2V)
5-59
Hardware System
26 TP26 12V0 +12VDC power supply (241.2V)
27 TP27 PGND Power ground

30 Enabling signals coming from the valve chip

TP30 SIO_EN
of the mid control unit
31 Input signals coming from the valve chip of

TP31 SIO_IN
the mid control unit
32 Clock signals coming from the valve chip of

TP32 SIO_CLK
the mid control unit
33 Input signals coming from the valve chip of

TP33 S_IN
the mix&pierce unit
34 Clock signals coming from the valve chip of
TP34 T
the mix&pierce unit
35 Latch signals coming from the valve chip of

TP35 LATCH
the mix&pierce unit
36 Enabling signals coming from the valve chip

TP36 EN
of the mix&pierce unit
Basic voltage of the temperature collection

37 TP37 PRTD_REF
amplifier of the temperature unit
38 Reference voltage of the temperature

TP38 AINN
collection amplifier of the temperature unit
39 Signals output from the temperature
TP39 AINP
collection amplifier of the temperature unit
40 TP40 ASR_REF Reference voltage of the mix motor unit
41 TP41 MS_REF Reference voltage of the wipe motor unit
42 Reference voltage of the whole blood

TP42 SWB_REF
injection motor unit
43 Reference voltage of the SWB injection

TP43 SWBC_REF
syringe motor unit
44 Reference voltage of the autoloader feeding

TP44 ASY_REF
motor unit
45 Reference voltage of the autoloader loading

TP45 ASLX_REF
motor unit
5-60
Hardware System
Key definition
The reset switch S1 on the driver board makes manually resetting the driver board possible.
Pressing the reset switch can reset all MCUs and the FPGA.
Purpose
The driver board is a key component. In case of failure, replace and service it promptly. Use
this procedure to replace the driver board.
Tools
Removal
1. Shut down the analyzer and disconnect it from the power supply.
2. Remove the left door and top cover as per Section 6.2.1 and 6.2.4.
3. Use the stop bar to support the main board and signal processing board assembly as
per Figure 5-17.
4. Unplug the five pneumatic lines from the pressure sensors on the driver board.
5. Unplug all cables from the connectors of the driver board as Table 5-65.
6. Use the screwdriver to loosen the eleven M3X6 screws fixing the driver board as Figure
5-17.
7. Remove the driver board.
Table 5-65 Connector-to-cable list of the driver board
5-61
Hardware System
No. Connector Label (driver board) Cable Label (wire)
1 J2 STANDBY C-J2/C41306
2 J3 CPU C-J3/C41288
4 J4 SV(01-16) C-J4/C41307
5 J5 SV(17-32) C-J5/C41308
6 J6 SV(33-48) C-J6/C41309
7 J7 SV(49-64) C-J7/C49000
8 J8 SV(65-80) C-J8/C49001
9 J10 INDICATION C-J10/C41305
10 J11 TTRF-MOTOR C-J11/C49020
11 J13 TTRF-SENSOR C-J13/C49020

12 J15 SV(89-96) C-J15/C49010
13 J17 M-ASR C-J17/C49006
14 J18 M-MS C-J18/C49007

15 J20 ASR-SENSOR C-J20/C49006
16 J21 SYRINGE-SENSOR C-J21/C49007
17 J22 M-SWB C-J22/C49007

18 J24 M-SWBC C-J24/C49007
19 J27 MS-SENSOR C-J27/ C49007
20 J28 AIR-CTRL C-J28/C49012
21 J29 REAGENT-SENSOR C-J29/C49027
22 J30 LASER C-J30/C49013
23 J31 DC-MOTOR C-J31/C49007

24 J32 TM1 C-J32/C49025
25 J34 TM3 C-J34/C49024
26 J35 HT-PRE C-J35/C49023

27 J36 HT-ACT C-J36/C49023
28 J38 REAGENT-INSIDE C-J38/C49027
29 J43 FAN C-J43/C41304
30 J44 POWER C-J44/C41303
31 J47 SV(81-88) C-J47/C49007
32 J48 DOOR C-J48/C41297
5-62
Hardware System
Figure 5-17 Removing the driver board
1Partition board 2Stop bar of PCB assembly
3Main board & signal processing board 4Driver board support

assembly
5Driver board 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6
(with lock washer)
5-63
Hardware System
Installation
Install the driver board as the above-mentioned procedures in reverse order.
Verification
1. Check the driver board to ensure all connections are correct.
2. When the analyzer is off, connect the analyzer to the power supply and start it up.
3. Check whether the indicators D1, D2, D3, D12, D13, D14 and D16 on the driver board
flash. You can also check the indicators by entering the self-test screen and performing a
self-test. If the self-test is passed, it indicates that the driver board is replaced
successfully; otherwise you must troubleshoot the board.
Fault analysis and handling

Failures related to the driver board are identified and handled by the error codes. The error
codes are reported to the host control software from the driver board. Some error codes are
handled automatically by the host control software, while some need to be judged manually
by users and service engineers. When error is reported, the error No. and error names are
provided by host control software. The recommended action to remove errors may appear on
the corresponding screen as the software help information.
When you check for failure, ensure the connection related to the error is properly connected.
For example, when AL: load motor to start position failed is reported, check whether the
connection between the sample transferring assembly and the driver board is proper,
whether the connecters at ends are well connected (if the improper connection is possible,
shutdown the analyzer, disconnect it from power supply, and then replug connecters),
whether the connection inside the sample transferring assembly is proper, whether the
symbol on the sensor connecting line corresponds to the sensor position and whether the
symbol on the motor connecting line corresponds to the motor position (disassemble the
sample transferring assembly to check. See Section 6.11.1 for how to disassemble it).
After the improper connection possibility is excluded, remove errors according to the
recommended action in the following table. If error remains after the error causes are found
and new components get replaced, you need to replace the driver board.
The follow table shows the error codes, error names and the recommended actions to
remove errors.
5-64
Hardware System
Table 5-66 Troubleshooting the driver board
Code Error Cause and Recommended Action
Host software error or communication

Mid control board: function
0x00000001 interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.

Mid control board: address
code error
analyzer.
Mid control board: data
length error
analyzer.

Mid control board: command
ID error
analyzer.

Mid control board: verification
code error
analyzer.

Mid control board: end code
error
analyzer.
0x00000007 PDB: FPGA error Please replace the driver board.
Mid control board: valve Host software error or communication

0x00000009 command and data length is interference. Try again or restart the
not matched analyzer.
Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try

0x0000000A Priming and draining time is 0
again or restart the analyzer.
Last priming and draining Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x0000000B
didn't finish again or restart the analyzer.
1. Check whether reagents are enough.
2. The float switch may be damaged, if so,

Priming and draining didn't
0x0000000E replace it.
finish in regular time
3. Disassembly the analyzer to check for
line leakage.
5-65
Hardware System

Transmit unit: function code
error
analyzer.

Transmit unit: address code
error
analyzer.
Transmit unit: data length
error
analyzer.

Transmit unit: command ID
error
analyzer.

Transmit unit: verification
code error
analyzer.
0x00000069 Transmit unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
1. The autoloader load start position

photocoupler is open-circuited: either
the autoloader load motor is at the start
AL: load motor to start
0x0000006A position or the autoloader load motor
position failed
hits the limit point.
2. Autoloader load motor failure: the

autoloader load motor does not move.
1. The autoloader load stop position

photocoupler or the contact switch is
open-circuited: either the autoloader
AL: load motor to stop load motor is at the stop position or the
0x0000006B
position failed autoloader load motor hits the limit
point.
2. Autoloader load motor failure: the

autoloader load motor does not move.
5-66
Hardware System
1. The autoloader feed reset photocoupler

is open-circuited: the autoloader feed
AL: feed motor to start
0x0000006C motor moves.
position failed
2. Autoloader feed motor failure: the
autoloader feed motor does not move.
1. The autoloader feed reset photocoupler

is short-circuited: the autoloader feed
AL: feed motor to stop
0x0000006D motor moves.
position failed
1. The unloader position photocoupler is

short-circuited: the autoloader feed
AL: unloader to start position
0x0000006E motor moves.
failed
1. The unloader position photocoupler is

short-circuited: the autoloader feed
AL: unloader to stop position
0x0000006F motor moves.
failed
Please replace the two photocouplers in the

AL: loading unit photocoupler
0x00000070 sample sending assembly in the loading
error
position.
0x00000071 AL: feeding unit counter error Photocoupler failure or counting unit failure.
Host software error or inappropriate

0x00000072 AL: loading is not allowed
operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
AL: Unloading is not Host software error or inappropriate

0x00000073
allowed now operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
Please remove at least one tube rack from

0x00000074 AL: unloading tray is full
the utmost outside of the unload tray.
Host software error or inappropriate

0x00000075 Autoloader is working
operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
5-67
Hardware System
AL: feed motor is not Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x00000076
initialized again or restart the analyzer.
1. Barcode scanner failure. Enter the

barcode test screen to check whether
the scanner communication is normal.
0x00000077 Tube ID read error
Replace the scanner is necessary.
2. If problem remains after the action

above, replace the driver board.
Continue the procedures per the software

0x00000079 Rack(s) moved manually
prompt.
1. Barcode scanner failure. Enter the

barcode test screen to check whether
the scanner communication is normal.
0x0000007A Scanner setup error
Replace the scanner is necessary.
2. If problem remains after the action

above, replace the driver board.
0x0000007C Tube barcode is too long Use bar codes of less than 16 bits.

Mix & pierce unit: function
0x000000C8 interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.

Mix & pierce unit: address
0x000000C9 interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.

Mix & pierce unit: data length
0x000000CA interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.

Mix & pierce unit: command
0x000000CB interference. Try again or restart the
ID error
analyzer.

Mix & pierce unit: verification
0x000000CC interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: end code Host software error or communication
0x000000CD
error interference. Try again or restart the
5-68
Hardware System
analyzer.
1. Check whether the sample

compartment door is locked: the door is
not open, yet the sound of
electromagnet movement can still be
heard.
Open the sample
0x000000CE 2. Photocoupler failure: the sample
compartment door failure
compartment door can open.
3. Electromagnet is damaged or the

connection is improper: the sound of
electromagnet movement can not be
heard.
1. Photocoupler failure: the pinch cylinder

moves normally.
2. The pneumatic unit is abnormal. The

MP:pinch cylinder front
0x000000CF corresponding valve 89 of pinch
photocoupler error
cylinder is damaged or connection is
connected improperly: the pinch
cylinder does not move or move slowly.
1. Photocoupler failure: the pinch cylinder

moves normally.

MP: pinch cylinder rear
0x000000D0 corresponding valve 89 of pinch
photocoupler error
cylinder is damaged or connection is
connected improperly: the pinch
cylinder does not move or move slowly.
MP: pinch cylinder cannot go Host software error or inappropriate

0x000000D1
forward operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
MP: pinch cylinder cannot go Host software error or inappropriate

0x000000D2
backward operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
MP: elevation up 1. Photocoupler failure: the elevating

0x000000D3
photocoupler error cylinder moves normally.
5-69
Hardware System
2. The pneumatic unit is abnormal.

Corresponding valve 90 and valve 91
of elevating cylinder are damaged or
connection is connected improperly:
the elevating cylinder does not move or
move slowly.
1. Photocoupler failure: the elevating

cylinder moves normally.
2. The pneumatic unit is abnormal.

MP: elevation down Corresponding valve 90 and valve 91
0x000000D4
photocoupler error of elevating cylinder are damaged or
connection is connected improperly:
the elevating cylinder does not move or
move slowly.
MP: elevation cylinder cannot Host software error or inappropriate

0x000000D5
go up operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
MP: elevation cylinder cannot Host software error or inappropriate

0x000000D6
go down operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
1. Photocoupler failure: the mix motor
MP: mix motor start position moves normally.

0x000000D7
photocoupler error 2. Mix motor failure: the mix motor does
not move or gets locked.
1. Photocoupler failure: the mix motor
MP: mix motor stop position moves normally.

0x000000D8
photocoupler error 2. Mix motor failure: the mix motor does
not move or gets locked.
1. Mix motor failure: the mix motor does

not move.
MP: mix motor moves to start
0x000000D9 2. Start position photocoupler failure or
position failure
mix motor gets locked: the mix motor
moves normally.
5-70
Hardware System
1. Mix motor failure: the mix motor does

not move.
MP: mix motor moves to stop
0x000000DA 2. Start position photocoupler failure or
position failure
mix motor gets locked: the mix motor
moves normally.
MP: mix motor rotation is Host software error or inappropriate

0x000000DB
unallowed operation. Try again or restart the analyzer.
1. Photocoupler failure: the wipe block
Wipe block to go to inferior motor moves normally.

0x000000DC
position unallowed 2. Wipe block motor failure: the wipe
block motor does not move.
Wipe block to go to superior motor moves normally.

0x000000DD
position failure 2. Wipe block motor failure: the wipe
Wipe block to go to inferior motor moves normally.

0x000000DE
position failure 2. Wipe block motor failure: the wipe
Open Sample compartment

0x000000DF Initialize the fluidic system and try again.
door unallowed
Perform a self-test of the wipe motor and try

0x000000E0 Wipe block motor is working
again.
Wipe block cannot go to up Perform a self-test of the wipe motor and try
0x000000E1
position again.

corresponding valve 92 of piercing
MP: cylinder cylinder is damaged or connection is

0x000000E2
piercing/photocoupler error connected improperly: the piercing
cylinder does not move.
2. Piercing position photocoupler failure:
5-71
Hardware System
the piercing cylinder moves.
1. Piercing position photocoupler failure.

corresponding valve 92 of piercing
MP: cylinder
0x000000E3 cylinder is damaged or connection is
return/photocoupler error
connected improperly: the piercing
cylinder does not move when it is
returned.
MP: pierce cylinder pierce is Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x000000E4
not allowed again or restart the analyzer.
MP: pierce cylinder return is Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x000000E5
not allowed again or restart the analyzer.
0x000000E9 MP: mix-unit is not initialized Initialize the fluidic system and try again.
Pinch cylinder does not move. Check the

MP: pinch cylinder to front
0x000000EA pneumatic unit, valve 89 and the
pos. failed
connection.
Pinch cylinder does not move. Check the

MP: pinch cylinder to rear
0x000000EB pneumatic unit, valve 89 and the
pos. failed
connection.
Elevating cylinder does not move. Check

MP: elevation cylinder to up
0x000000EC the pneumatic unit, valve 90, valve 91 and
pos. failed
connection.
Elevating cylinder does not move. Check
MP: elevation cylinder to
0x000000ED the pneumatic unit, valve 90, valve 91 and
down pos. failed
connection.
1. Photocoupler failure: the sample
Sample compartment door compartment door is closed.

0x000000EE
open abnormally 2. The sample compartment door is open
abnormally, please shut the door.
Fluidic sequence error or host software

0x000000EF Manipulator is working
error. Try again or restart the analyzer.
0x0000012C Syringe unit: function code Host software error or communication
5-72
Hardware System
error interference. Try again or restart the

analyzer.
Syringe unit: address code
0x0000012D interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.

Syringe unit: data length
0x0000012E interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.

Syringe unit: command ID
0x0000012F interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.

Syringe unit: verification code
error
analyzer.

0x00000131 Syringe unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe and

0x00000132 Sheath syringe is working.
try again.
1. Sheath syringe photocoupler failure:
Sheath syringe initialization the sheath syringe motor moves.

0x00000133
failure 2. Sheath syringe motor error: the sheath
syringe motor does not move.

the sheath syringe is at the start
Sheath syringe to start position.

0x00000134
position failed 2. Sheath syringe motor failure: the
sheath syringe is not at the start
position.

Sheath syringe to stop the sheath syringe is not at the start
0x00000135
position failed position.
2. Sheath syringe motor failure: the
5-73
Hardware System
sheath syringe is at the start position.
Sheath syringe photocoupler Sheath syringe photocoupler failure: the

0x00000136
open-circuited sheath syringe is at the start position.
Sheath syringe photocoupler Sheath syringe photocoupler failure: the
0x00000137
short-circuited sheath syringe is not at the start position.
Sheath syringe aspirates too Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe and
0x00000138
much. try again.
Sheath syringe dispenses too Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe and
0x00000139
much. try again.
Sheath syringe works too Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe and
0x0000013A
fast. try again.
Sheath syringe assembly failure. Please

0x0000013B Sheath syringe timeout check whether the resistance of syringe is
too great.
Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and

0x0000013C Pump syringe is working
try again.
1. Pump syringe photocoupler error: the
Pump syringe initialization pump syringe motor moves.

0x0000013D
failure 2. Pump syringe motor error: the pump
syringe motor does not move.
Pump syringe moves to start pump syringe is at the start position.

0x0000013E
position failure 2. Pump syringe motor error: the pump
syringe is not at the start position.

pump syringe is not at the start
Pump syringe moves to stop
0x0000013F position.
position failure
2. Pump syringe motor error: the pump
syringe is at the start position.
0x00000140 Pump syringe photocoupler Pump syringe photocoupler error: the pump
5-74
Hardware System
open-circuited syringe is at the start position.
Pump syringe photocoupler Pump syringe photocoupler error: the pump

0x00000141
short-circuited syringe is not at the start position.
Pump syringe aspirates too Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and
0x00000142
much try again.
Pump syringe dispenses too Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and
0x00000143
much try again.
Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and
0x00000144 Pump syringe works too fast
try again.
Pump syringe assembly failure. Please
0x00000145 Pump syringe timeout check whether the resistance of syringe is
too great.

Temp. unit: function code
error
analyzer.

Temp. unit: address code
error
analyzer.
0x00000192 Temp. unit: data length error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.

Temp. unit: command ID
error
analyzer.

Temp. unit: verification code
error
analyzer.
0x00000195 Temp. unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
1. If D25 is not on, check the 12VDC

power supply.
0x00000196 PDB: ADS1210 error
2. If the D25 is on, check whether the
beads in the AD circuit module or other
5-75
Hardware System
components are not welded

completely.
3. Check whether the crystal oscillator X2

is short circuit.
4. If none of the above problems is found,

ADS1210 is damaged. Please replace
the driver board.
1. Check whether the preheat

temperature sensor is disconnected.
Heater: preheat bath temp. 2. Check whether the +12V power supply
0x00000197
sensor error on the driver board works normally.
3. If error remains when the sensor is

connected, the sensor is damaged.
1. Check whether the reaction bath

Heater: reaction bath temp. 2. Check whether the +12V power supply
0x00000198 on the driver board works normally.
sensor error
3. If error remains when the sensor is
connected, the sensor is damaged.
1. Check whether the laser diode

2. If it is connected, check whether the

Laser diode temp. sensor +12V power supply on the driver board
0x00000199
error works normally.
3. If no problem is found in the above

procedure and error remains, the
sensor is damaged.
1. Check whether any component in the

EEPROM circuit is not welded, such as
0x0000019B PDB: EEPROM error L7 and R3. Check whether the pins of
EEPROM are short circuit or welded
incorrectly.
5-76
Hardware System
2. If none of problems above is found and

error remains, the EEPROM is
damaged.

Other unit: function code
0x000001F4 interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.

Other unit: address code
error
analyzer.

0x000001F6 Other unit: data length error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.

0x000001F7 Other unit: command ID error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.

Other unit: verification code
error
analyzer.

0x000001F9 Other unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
1. Check whether the +12V power supply

of the driver board is normal.
2. Check whether the voltage of PIN5

0x00001FA PDB: U74(AD7928) error AVDD on U74 is normal. The
normal voltage is +5V5%.
3. If neither problems is found, U74

AD7928is damaged.
1. Check whether the +12V power supply

of the driver board is normal.
2. Check whether the voltage of PIN5

0x00001FB PDB: U75(AD7928) error AVDD on U75 is normal. The
normal voltage is +5V5%.
3. If neither problems is found, U75

AD7928 is damaged.
5-77
Hardware System
Troubleshooting special errors

Troubleshooting the feeding unit counter error
AL: feeding unit counter error is reported when feeding motor feeds twice consecutively
yet the left counter and the right counter of the feeding unit do not change. When this error is
reported, troubleshoot it according to the steps that follow.
1. Check whether tube racks on the loader tray do not enter the feeding flow line after they
are loaded in position. Some racks may not enter the flow line since they are so long that
the claw can not claw them. In case of this, install racks of appropriate size and start the
autoloading flow again according to the prompt on the software screen.
2. Check whether tube racks get locked by the feeding flow line. This may be reported if
autoloader feeding motor cannot push the racks due to distorted racks, wrongly
assembled sample transferring assembly. In case of this, turn off the analyzer,
disconnect all the powers and pull the racks manually on the flow line to judge the
possible causes. If it results from the distorted racks, install appropriate racks. If results
from wrongly assembled assembly, remove and repair the assembly.
3. Check whether tube racks get locked and the autoloader feeding motor cannot push the
racks due to other racks tilted on the unloader tray or improper tray manufacture. Check
whether the rack length is qualified and whether the sheet-metal near the unloader unit
is correctly fabricated.
4. If the current rack is not unloaded and the unloader assembly stops the movement while
previous racks were moved to the unloader tray and the tray is not full, do as the prompt
on the software screen: stop the autoloader, remove all racks on the unloader tray, place
a rack on the loader tray and then start the autoloader. If this is successful, the cause is
the same with that listed in step 3. If this error is still reported, turn of the analyzer,
remove the sample transferring assembly, replace the left and right photocouplers in the
autoloader feeding position and check whether the baffles can work normally.
5. If the AL: feeding unit counter error cannot be removed by the process above, the
error is due to the failure of driver board component. Replace the driver board.
Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure
1. If all vacuum and pressure of the system are abnormal and with the too high or too low
pressure value at the same time, check whether the air compressor can work normally.
2. If only one pressure value is abnormal, check the related regulator and airway for
leakage.
3. If the airway system is normal, the error is due to the pressure sensor failure in the driver
board. Replace the driver board.
See the following table for the output voltage and pressure of the pressure sensor
Relation between sensor

Pressure Pressure Test point Note
output voltage and pressure
5-78
Hardware System
channel range value
Vout
250kPa 200 - 300kPa TP8 P 8.88 25
0.0045
Vout P represents
160kPa 128 - 188kPa TP6 P 0.18 5
0.0225 pressure, and
its unit is kPa;
Vout
70kPa 55 - 81kPa TP7 P 0.18 5 Vout represents
0.0225
the voltage of
Vout the test point,

-40kPa -46 - -30kPa TP9 P 0.88 2.5 and its unit is V.
0.045
Vout
-85kPa -97 - -58kPa TP10 P 0.18 5
0.0225
Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action
For the unit abnormal movements, service engineer needs to observe and troubleshoot them.
In case of these errors, troubleshoot them according to the recommended action listed in the
table above and the procedure below.
1. Check whether the related units (such as motors and cylinders) can move. If the units do
not move, the error is due to the executive component problems, such as disconnected
motor, airway leakage or the failure of corresponding air valve to cylinder. If errors
remain after the errors mention above are excluded, the errors is due to the driver board
failure. Replace the driver board.
2. If the units can move, check whether the movement is in position and whether units are
locked by lines or other units during the movement. For transmissive photocoupler, if the
baffle enters above 2/3 photocoupler, it is baffled and the movement is in position.
3. For the cylinder movement, check whether the movement is too slow. Abnormal
0.25MPa pressure or oversized throttle in the airway connected the cylinder may lead to
abnormal movement of cylinder and cause failure.
4. If errors remain after unit movement problems are excluded, consider the photocoupler
failure. Replace the photocoupler.
5. If errors still remain after the photocoupler is replaced, they are due to failure of
components on the driver board. Replace the driver board.
5-79
Hardware System
5.4 Power Board

5.4.1 Introduction
The power board of the BC-5500 hematology analyzer provides stable and reliable DC power
source for the equipment, including 5V, 12V and 24V.
You can service and troubleshoot the power board as instructed in Section 5.4 .
Function
The 3100 power board provides stable and reliable DC power source for all the functional
blocks of the BC-5500 hematology analyzer and for the equipment itself, including 5V, 12V
and 24V.
Figure 5-18 shows the functional block diagram of the power board.
Figure 5-18 Block diagram of the power board
Description
The power board operates under 110V-240V AC input voltage (50/60Hz).
When the AC power switch is ON, only the standby circuit works. The 24V, 12V and 5V are
output only when the power button is ON.
5-80
Hardware System
Circuit loads of the power board are described in the table below:
Table 5-67 Circuit loads of the power board
Maximum Range of the Voltage Load adjustment

Voltage
current output voltage adjustment rate rate
+5V 8.0A 4.85-5.25V 1 -3%-5%
+12V 12.0A 11.75-12.25V 1 -3%5%
+24V 8.0A 23.5-25V 1 -3%-5%
Interface Definition
The power board is configured with 6 external interfaces numbered from J1 to J6. Figure 5-19
shows the positions of interfaces on the power board.
Figure 5-19 Interface layout of the power board
5-81
Hardware System
The table below describes the functions of the external interfaces.
Table 5-68 Interfaces on the power board
Interface Description pins Note
J1 AC input 3 /
Power supply of the main /

J2 4
board
Power supply of the signal /

J3 6
processing board
Power supply of the driver /

J4 8
board
J5 Power button control 4 /
J6 Power supply of the fans 6 /
Definition of J1
J1 is the AC input interface. The table below describes the distributions and definitions of pins
of this interface.
Table 5-69 Definitions of the AC input interface
1 L Live wire
2 NC Not contact
3 N Neutral wire
Definition of J2
J2 is the power output interface of the main board. The table below describes the distributions
and definitions of pins of this interface.
Table 5-70 Definitions of the power output interface of the main board
1 5V 5V power output 2 SGND Second ground
Definition of J3
J3 is the power output interface of the signal processing board. The table below describes the
distributions and definitions of pins of this interface.
5-82
Hardware System
Table 5-71 Definitions of the power output interface of the signal processing board

Definition of J4
J4 is the power output interface of the driver board. The table below describes the
Table 5-72 Definitions of the power output interface of the driver board

Definition of J5
J5 is the signal control interface of the power button. The table below describes the
Table 5-73 Definitions of the signal control interface of the power button
Signal of the power Signal of the

1 ON 2 OFF
button power button
3 SGND Second ground 4 LED Standby signal
Definition of J6
J6 is the 12V fan power interface of the power box. The table below describes the
Table 5-74 Definitions of the 12V fan power interface of the power box
12V fan power

1 12V 2 SGND Second ground
source
3 12V 12V fan power 4 SGND Second ground
5-83
Hardware System
source
12V fan power

5 12V 6 SGND Second ground
source
Assembly Drawing
Figure 5-20 Assembly drawing of the power board
5-84
Hardware System
LED Function Definition

The table below describes the LED indicators on the power board.
Table 5-75 Definitions of LED indicators on the power board
Indicator Description
LED1 5B indicator
LED2 5V indicator
LED3 12V indicator
LED4 24V indicator
Function Definition of Test Points

The table below describes the test points on the driver board.
Table 5-76 Test points on the driver board
SN String Pin Function Reference value
1 TP1 Q101.2 Measures the switching waveform of Q101 /
2 TP2 Q101.1 Measures the drive waveform of Q101 /
3 TP3 C114.+ Measures the DC output voltage 39020V
Measures the reference output voltage of

4 TP4 U101.9 7.5V
U101
Measures the oscillating waveform of

5 TP5 U101.14 /
U101
6 TP6 C126.+ Measures VCC voltage 181V
7 TP7 C204.+ Measures VDD voltage 13.51V
8 TP8 C223.+ Measures the supply voltage of U201 121V
11 TP11 Q201.3 Measures the current waveform of Q201 /
12 TP12 U201.8 Measures the reference voltage of U201 5V
Measures the oscillating voltage waveform

13 TP13 U201.4 /
of U201
Measures the output voltage and ripple
14 TP14 C234.+ 50.5V
voltage of 5B
5-85
Hardware System
19 TP19 Q302.3 Measures the current waveform of Q302 /
20 TP20 C324.+ Measures the output voltage of 24V1 241V
Measures the voltage waveform of the

21 TP21 D305.1 /
rectifier and the follow current diode
22 TP22 U301.4 Measures the reference voltage of U301 5V

26 TP26 C412.+ 120.5V
voltage of 12V1
Measures the 10V reference voltage of
27 TP27 U401.11 10V
U401

31 TP31 C442.+ 50.5V
voltage of 5V1
Measures the 10V reference voltage of

32 TP32 U411.11 10V
U411
Purpose
The power board is a key component. In case of failure, replace and service it promptly. Use
this procedure to replace the power board.
Tools
Multimeter
5-86
Hardware System
Removal
To remove the power board, do as follows:
1. Switch off the hematology analyzer and unplug the AC power cable.
2. Remove all connections from the power output terminal. Then refer to Section 6.3 of
Chapter 6 to remove the fixing screws to take out the power assembly from the main
unit enclosure.
3. Refer to Section 6.3 of Chapter 6 to remove the power box. Unplug the AC connecting
cables on the power board. Then remove the nine fixing screws on the power board to
take out the power board from the power box.
Installation
Do as the steps described above in the reverse order.
Verification
To verify whether the replaced power board works normally, do as follows:
1. Check whether the grounding cable of the AC input connector is securely connected with
the main unit enclosure (live part).
2. Ensure the 5B indicator on the power board is lit after you connect the power cable and
switch on the AC control switch and the fan runs when you switch on the power button.,.
When assembling the equipment, make sure the AC input connector and the
fan connector on the power box are plugged into the power board before
fixing the upper cover of the power box.
Make sure that the power assembly and the main unit enclosure are
securely connected through screws.
5-87
Hardware System

Refer to Figure 5-21 to troubleshoot the power board.
POWER BOARD
ERROR
CHECK FUSE AND NO
FLYBACK 5B LED LIGHTED?
CIRCUIT
YES
AFTER SOFT NO NO
390V OUTPUT CHECK PFC
START,24V LED
RIGHT? CIRCUIT
LIGHTED?
YES YES
12V and 5V CHECK
SHORT CIRCUIT? NO 12V and 5V LED NO SOFTSTART
VDD OK? CONTROL
Or DC/DC LIGHTED?
error? CIRCUIT AND
VDD CIRCUIT
YES YES
CHECK FORWARD
OTHER PROBLEMS
CIRCUIT
Figure 5-21 Power board troubleshooting flow chart
5-88
Hardware System
5.5 Interface Board

5.5.1 Introduction
The interface board of the BC-5500 hematology analyzer provides proper electricity
connections for the external equipment.
You can service and troubleshoot the interface board as instructed in Section 5.5 .
Function
The interface board provides electricity connections between the hematology analyzer and
the external equipment.
Description
The interface board provides the following interfaces for the external equipment:
J2: network interface (RJ45)
J4: pneumatic interface
J11: serial port (RS232)
J6-J9: four-path USB interfaces
The interface board is configured with 11 external interfaces numbered from J1 to J11. Figure
5-22 shows the positions of interfaces on the interface board.
5-89
Hardware System
Figure 5-22 Interface layout of the interface board
Table 5-77 Interfaces on the interface board
Network interface (connected to the /

J1 6
main board)
Network interface RJ45 (connected to /

J2 8
the external equipment)
For pneumatic control input (connected /

J3 4
to the driver board)
For pneumatic control output /
J4 (connected to the pneumatic control 9
board)
J5 Connected to USB data cable 20 /
J6 USB interface 4 Standard USB interface


For the external scanner (connected to RS232 level
J10 6
the main board)
5-90
Hardware System
For the external scanner (connected to /

J11 9
the scanner)
Definition of J1
J1 is the network interface of the main board. The table below describes the distributions and
definitions of its pins.
Table 5-78 Definitions of the network interface of the main board
1 TPTX+ Sending end of the network signals (difference signals)

2 TPTX- Sending end of the network signals (difference signals)
3 TPRX+ Receiving end of the network signals (difference signals)
4 TPRX+ Receiving end of the network signals (difference signals)

5 GND Ground
6 PWFBOUT Power signals of the network interface
Definition of J2
J2 is the network interface of the main board. The table below describes the distributions and
Table 5-79 Definitions of the network interface RJ45
1 TX+ Sending end (difference signals)
2 TX- Sending end (difference signals)

3 RX+ Receiving end (difference signals)
4 NC /
5 NC /
6 RX- Receiving end (difference signals)
7 NC /
8 NC /
Definition of J3
J3 is the pneumatic control input interface. The table below describes the distributions and
Table 5-80 Definition of the pneumatic control input interface
1 VCC 5V power supply signal
5-91
Hardware System
2 RELAY Pneumatic control signal
3 12V0 12V power supply signal

4 AGND Ground
Definition of J4
J4 is the pneumatic control output interface. The table below describes the distributions and
Table 5-81 Definitions of the pneumatic control output interface

1 VCC 5V power source
2 RELAY Relay control signals
3
4 12V0 12V power source
6 NC Not contact
AGND Ground
7
AGND Ground signals
Definition of J5
J5 is the USB interface of the main board. The table below describes the distributions and
Table 5-82 Definitions of the USB interface of the main board
1 DM4 USB4 data signals (difference signals)
2 GND /
3 DP4 USB4 data signals (difference signals)
4 VBUS3 USB3 power source

7 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /
11 GND /
5-92
Hardware System
13 GND /
15 GND /

18 GND /

Definition of J6-J9
J6-J9 are standard USB interfaces. The table below describes the distributions and
definitions of their pins.
Table 5-83 Definition of the USB interfaces
1 VCC 5V power supply signal
2 DM USB signal (difference signal)
3 DP USB signal (difference signal)
4 GND Ground
Definition of J10
J10 is the external scanner interface to connect the main board. Its not used presently.
Definition of J11
J11 is the external scanner interface to connect the scanner. Its not used presently.
Assembly drawing
The assembly drawing of the interface board is shown in Figure 5-23.
5-93
Hardware System
(a) Top (b) Bottom
Figure 5-23 Assembly drawing of the interface board
Purpose
The interface board is an important component in the communications between the
hematology analyzer and the external equipment. Please follow the following procedures to
replace the interface board.
Tools
Removal
To remove the interface board, do as follows:
1. Switch off the hematology analyzer and unplug the power cable.
2. Remove all external equipment connected with the interface board.
3. Remove the left door (for details, see Section 6.2.1 of Chapter 6).
4. Remove the wires connected to J1, J3, J5 and J10.
5. Use the screwdriver to loosen the four screws on the interface board.
6. Remove the interface board.
5-94
Hardware System
Installation
Verification
To verify whether the replaced interface board works normally, do as follows:
1. Connect the power cable. Switch on the power switch (ON/OFF switch) to start the
hematology analyzer.
2. Insert the mouse with USB interface into any of the USB interfaces on the interface
board. Move the mouse and observe whether there is any cursor movement on the
display. If so, it indicates that the interface board works normally. If not, check whether
the USB signal cable between the interface board and the main board is properly
connected.
5-95
Hardware System
5.6 Indicator Board

5.6.1 Introduction
The interface board of the BC-5500 hematology analyzer performs the following functions:
Indicating the operating status of the equipment
Switching on the power through the power button
You can service and troubleshoot the indicator board as instructed in Section 5.6 .
Function
The indicator board performs the following functions:
Indicating the operating status of the equipment.
Switching on the power through the power button.
Description
The indicator board indicates the operating status of the equipment through a yellow-green
indicator and a buzzer.
When the system is in standby status, the indicator is illuminated yellow.
When the system works normally, the indicator is illuminated green.
When the system is faulty, the indicator is illuminated green and flashes at 1Hz
frequency.
When the system works normally, the buzzer does not make a sound.
When the system is faulty, the buzzer buzzes.
The indicator board also performs the function of switching on the power through the power
button.
When the power cable is connected and the power switch (ON/OFF switch) is ON, the
system is in standby status (the yellow-green indicator is illuminated yellow); namely, the
power system is OFF. When the power button on the indicator board is pressed, the power
system is ON. The equipment starts to operate and the indicator is illuminated green.
The indicator board is configured with only one external interface.
Definition of J1
J1 is the interface of the indicator board. The table below shows the distributions and
5-96
Hardware System
Table 5-84 Definitions of the interface of the indicator board
1 VCC +5V power source
2 GND Analog ground
3 KEY Key signal
4 BUZ Buzzer control signal
5 WOKE_LED Green indicator signal
6 STAND_BY Yellow indicator signal
Assembly drawing
The assembly drawing of the indicator board is shown in Figure 5-24.
Figure 5-24 Assembly drawing of the indicator board
Purpose
Please follow the following procedures to replace the indicator board.
Tools
Removal
To remove the indicator board, do as follows:
2. Open the upper part of the front cover and fix it with the stop bar.
3. Unplug the connection line.
4. Remove the touchscreen assembly (for details, see Section 6.4).
5. Use the screwdriver to loosen the two screws on the indicator board.
6. Remove the indicator board.
5-97
Hardware System
Installation
Verification
To verify whether the replaced indicator board works normally, do as follows:
1. Connect the power cable. Switch on the power switch (ON/OFF switch). The
yellow-green indicator should be illuminated yellow.
2. Press down the power button to start the system. The indicator should turn to green.
Indicator failure
Fault description:
When the system is in standby status or works normally, the yellow-green indicator is not lit.
Possible reason:
The connection line on the indicator board is not in good contact with J1 on the board. Or the
indicator is damaged.
Solution:
1. Check whether the connection line on the indicator board is reliably connected with J1. If
not, disconnect the line and re-plug it into J1.
2. Re-power on the system. Observe whether the indicator is lit. If yes, the fault is fixed. If
not, replace the indicator board.
5-98
Hardware System
5.7 Touchscreen Control Board

5.7.1 Introduction
The touchscreen control board of the BC-5500 hematology analyzer receives the touch
information sent by the touchscreen and then transmits it to the main board through the serial
port.
You can service and troubleshoot the touchscreen control board as instructed in Section 5.7 .

Function
The touchscreen control board performs the functions of receiving the touch information sent
by the touchscreen and then transmitting it to the main board through the serial port.
Figure 5-25 shows the functional block diagram of the touchscreen control board.
Figure 5-25 Block diagram of the touchscreen control board
Description
The touchscreen control board is connected to the 4-line touchscreen through J2. This board
provides voltage for the electrode of the touchscreen and receives the information from the
touch point.
The touchscreen control board is connected to the main board through J5. It sends the
information from the touch point to the main board through RS232 level serial port.
The touchscreen control board is configured with three external interfaces.
Definition of J1
5-99
Hardware System
J1 is the interface configured for CPLD on the touchscreen control board. The table below
shows the distributions and definitions of its pins.
Table 5-85 Definitions of the interface configured for CPLD on the touchscreen control
board
1 TCK Configured clock input
2 GND GND
3 TDO Data output
4 VDD VDD
5 TMS Mode selection
6 NC NC
7 NC NC
8 NC NC
9 TDI Data input
10 GND GND
Definition of J2
J2 is the interface for the touchscreen. The table below shows the distributions and
Table 5-86 Definitions of the interface of the touchscreen
1 Y+ Y-coordinate positive
2 Y- Y-coordinate negative
3 X+ X-coordinate positive
4 X- X-coordinate negative
Definition of J5
J5 is the interface of the main board. The table below shows the distributions and definitions
of its pins.
Table 5-87 Definitions of the interface of the main board
1 TXD Transmitting through the serial port

2 RXD Receiving through the serial port
3 RTS Sending requests (reserved; not in use temporarily)
5-100
Hardware System
4 CTS Sending cleared (reserved; not in use temporarily)
5 POWER Power of the touchscreen (+5V)

6 GND GND
Assembly Drawing
The assembly drawing of the touchscreen control board is shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Assembly drawing of the touchscreen control board

The table below describes the test points on the driver board.
Table 5-88 Test points on the touchscreen control board
Test point Signal under test Function
TP1 GND Digital GND
5-101
Hardware System
TP2 TOUCHDIN Data input through the touchscreen
TP3 TOUCHPENIRQ Pen interruption signal

TP4 WIPER Touch point voltage of the 5-line touchscreen
TP5 LR Y-electrode
Purpose
Please follow the following procedures to replace the touchscreen control board.
Tools
Removal
To remove the indicator board, do as follows:
2. Open the upper part of the front cover (for details, see Section 6.2.3 of Chapter 6).
3. Unplug the connectors on J2 and J5.
4. Use the screwdriver to loosen the two cross-recessed panhead screws (with lock washer)
on the fixing plate of the touchscreen controller and to remove the fixing plate.
5. Use the screwdriver to loosen the two M3x6 cross-recessed panhead screws (with lock
washer) on touchscreen control board.
6. Remove the touchscreen control board.
Installation
Verification
To verify whether the replaced touchscreen control board works normally, do as follows:
1. Connect the power cable. Switch on the power switch (ON/OFF switch) to start the
5-102
Hardware System
hematology analyzer.
2. Press the touchscreen to see whether the cursor moves with the finger
The table below describes fault analysis and handling about the touchscreen control board.
Table 5-89 Fault analysis and handling about the touchscreen control board
Fault description Possible reason Solution

The touchscreen The touchscreen control board Re-connect the line /replace
makes no reaction is ineffective /the touchscreen the touchscreen control board
when it is pressed. is ineffective /the connection or touchscreen
line gets loose.
The cursor can move The connection line between Re-connect the line /observe
only horizontally or the touchscreen control board whether there is any broken
vertically when the and the touchscreen gets sign on the touchscreen. If yes,
touchscreen is loose /the touchscreen is replace the touchscreen.
pressed. broken.
The cursor fails to The touchscreen is not Recalibrate the touchscreen

reach the desired calibrated or is broken. /Observe whether there is any
place. broken sign on the
touchscreen. If yes, replace the
touchscreen.
5-103
Hardware System
5.8 Pneumatic Control Board

5.8.1 Introduction
The pneumatic control board provides the pneumatic fan indicator (pneumatic-controlled
relay) with a 12V power supply, which is controlled by the main unit. This board also provides
other control circuits for the pneumatic unit.
You can service and troubleshoot the pneumatic control board as instructed in Section 5.8 .

Function
The pneumatic control board provides the pneumatic fan indicator (pneumatic-controlled
relay) with a 12V power supply, which is controlled by the main unit. This board also provides
other control circuits for the pneumatic unit.
The block diagram of the pneumatic control board is shown below.

Thermal
Protect Compensatio
n Capacitor Compressor
SW
AC L Relay
Input
N
EMI and Flyback 12V 12V Compressor

Rectifier Circuit Switch Fans
Circuit
Compressor
Pneumatic LED
control board
3100-30-41202
Control signal
Figure 5-27 Block diagram of the pneumatic control board
Description
The power board works with AC 90V-264V (50-60Hz).
When the control signal is a low-level and the output is 12V, the indicator lights, the fan works,
the relay is closed, and the pneumatic unit starts running.
5-104
Hardware System
The pneumatic control board is configured with 6 external interfaces numbered from J1 to J6.
Figure 5-28 shows the interface layout of the pneumatic control board.
Figure 5-28 Interface layout of the pneumatic control board
Table 5-90 Interfaces on the pneumatic control board
J1 Switch control signal 6 /
J2 Indicator output 2 /
J3 Fan output 5 /
J4 AC input 3 /
Output of the pneumatic unit and /
J5 4
compensation capacitor
Connected to the temperature protection /

J6 2
switch
Definition of J1
J1 is for switch control signals. The table below shows the distributions and definitions of its
pins.
5-105
Hardware System
Pin Signal I/O Description
1 NC / Not contact
2 CTRL I Control signals from the main unit via serial port
3 NC / Not contact
4 NC / Not contact
5 GND I Control signals from the main unit via serial port
6 GND I Control signals from the main unit via serial port
Definition of J2
J2 is for indicator output. The table below shows the distributions and definitions of its pins.
1 12V0 O Indicator +
2 GND O Indicator -
Definition of J3
J3 is for fan output. The table below shows the distributions and definitions of its pins.
1 12V0 O Fan 1+
2 GND O Fan 1-
3 NC - Not contact
4 12V0 O Fan 2+
5 GND O Fan 2-
Definition of J4
J4 is for AC input. The table below shows the distributions and definitions of its pins.
1 L I Live wire
2 NC - Not contact
3 N I Neutral wire
Definition of J5
J5 is for output of the pneumatic unit compensation capacitor. The table below shows the
distributions and definitions of its pins.
5-106
Hardware System

1 N O Live wire (pin 1 and 2 are interchangeable)
2 L1 O Neutral wire (pin 1 and 2 are interchangeable)
Definition of J6
J6 is for output of the temperature protection switch. The table below shows the distributions
and definitions of its pins.
Connected to one end of the temperature

1 L O protection switch (pin 1 and 2 are
interchangeable)
Connected to the other end of the temperature

2 L1 O protection switch (pin 1 and 2 are
interchangeable)
5-107
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-29 Assembly drawing of the pneumatic control board

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the pneumatic control board.
Tools
5-108
Hardware System
Removal
Switch off the pneumatic unit and unplug the power cord.
Remove the pneumatic cover, unplug all connectors from the pneumatic control
board, loosen the screws fixing the board, and then remove the board from the
pneumatic unit.
Figure 5-30 Location of the pneumatic control board
Installation
Install the pneumatic control board as per the above-mentioned procedures in reverse order.
Verification
1. Connect the pneumatic control board to the power supply and switch on the pneumatic
switch.
2. Enter the maintenance screen. When the pneumatic unit is turned on, the green
indicator lights on, the fan works, and the pneumatic unit starts working (with vibration).
5-109
Hardware System

You can service the pneumatic control board taking it as a single-end backward circuit. The
parts to be considered include protective tube, switch tube Q4, sampling resistor R18 and
chip U1. When servicing the board, you should short circuit the two pins of J6 and connect
them to the power supply and then test the board.
Care must be taken to avoid electric shock when servicing the pneumatic
control board.
5-110
Hardware System
5.9 Pre-amplification Board, Laser Control Board

and Volumetric Board
5.9.1 Introduction
In the BC-5500 Auto Hematology Analyzer, the pre-amplification board is used for
photoelectric conversion and signal amplification for two channels of scattered lights
(LASlow angle; MAShigh angle) from the flow cell. The laser control board enables
the laser tube to emit stable laser with adequate intensity. The volumetric board determines
the measure time for RBC/PLT count.
You can service and troubleshoot the pre-amplification board, laser control board and
volumetric board as instructed in Section 5.9.
5.9.2 Board composition

Function
Pre-amplification board
The pre-amplification board consists of low angle board (LAS) and high angle board (MAS).
The LAS board converts the forward light signal to electric signal, and then amplifies it. The
MAS board converts the lateral light signal to electric signal, and then amplifies it. There is
positive / negative voltage converting circuit on the pre-amplification board.
Laser control board
The laser control board mainly drives the laser semiconductor. It is required that the laser
output is between 3mW and 5 mW, the laser power is stable, and the intensity is adjustable.
Volumetric board
The volumetric board determines the measure time for RBC/PLT count. That is, the board
provides the signals of start count and end count.
5.9.3 Description
Refer to the Section 5.9.2 for function description of the three boards.
For the pre-amplification board, laser control board and volumetric board, interface positions
are shown in the figures of Figure 5-31 through Figure 5-33.
5-111
Hardware System
Figure 5-31 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board
Figure 5-32 Interface layout of the laser control board
5-112
Hardware System
Figure 5-33 Interface layout of the volumetric board
The interfaces between the pre-amplification board and the signal processing board are
defined in the table below.
Table 5-97 Interfaces between pre-amplification board and the signal processing board
(J1)
Pin Signal Name I/O Description Level
1 AVCC I Analog positive power +12V
2 AGND / Analog power ground /
4 OUT O Pre-amplification output 100~1000mV
There are three interfaces in the laser control board, which are defined in the following three
tables.
Table 5-98 Interfaces between the laser control board and the driver board
(J1PWR-SIG)
1 12P0 / 12V analog power 12V
5-113
Hardware System
2 GND / Ground /
3 LASER O Laser intensity or laser power Analog

feedback signal
4 GND / Ground /
5 NC / / TTL
6 GND / Ground /
7 NC / / TTL
8 5P0 I 5V analog power 5V

9 NC / / TTL
10 NCONTROL I laser On/Off control TTL
11 NC / / /
12 NC / / /
Table 5-99 Interfaces between the laser control board and the laser semiconductor
(J2LASER DIODE)
1 LDC O LD- 0-12V
2 PDA O PD /
3 LDA O LD+(PD-) 0-12V
Table 5-100 Interfaces between the laser control board and the temperature sensor
(J3TEMP)
1 VO O Signal output /
2 VI I Signal input /
3 CAN / Enclosure /
There is an interface J1 between the volumetric board and the signal processing board,
which is defined in the table below.
Table 5-101 Interface between the volumetric board and the signal processing board
(J1)
Maximum
1 AVCC I 12V analog power
100mA
5-114
Hardware System
2 GND / Ground /
3 GND / Ground /
4 START O Signal of count start TTL
5 STOP O Signal of count end TTL
On/Off control of constant-current

6 NVMBLED I TTL
source
Assembly drawing
Assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board is shown in the Figure 5-34.
(a) Top (b) Bottom
Figure 5-34 Assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board
Assembly drawing of the laser control board is shown in Figure 5-35.
Figure 5-35 Assembly drawing of the laser control board
5-115
Hardware System
Assembly drawing of the volumetric board is shown in Figure 5-36.
Figure 5-36 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board
5.9.4 Adjustment and test points
5-116
Hardware System
There is no adjustable component; test points are shown in the table below, and positions are
Table 5-102 Test points on the pre-amplification board
Test points Signal under test Description
PWR 12AO +12V analog power from the driver board.
-12V analog power generated from the on-board

NPWR N12AO
chip U1
GND GND Ground
OUT OUT Output signal of the pre-amplification board
Laser control board
If the sliding variable resistor VR1 is adjusted clockwise, the resistance of VR1 in the circuit
increases, the voltage of the test point TP2VREF increases, and the laser intensity increases;
if the VR1 is adjusted counterclockwise, the resistance of VR1 in the circuit decreases, the
voltage of the test point TP2VREF decreases, and the laser intensity decreases.
The voltage of TP2VREF should be between 4.0 and 4.2V. Then the voltage at the point of
TPILD is between 1.6 and 2.5V (this happens only when the laser semiconductor is
connected).
The laser semiconductor cannot be connected or disconnected before the

power is turned off; otherwise the laser semiconductor may be damaged.
No matter the sliding variable resistor VR1 or the digital potentiometer U4 is

adopted, the adjustment shall be performed from small value to big value.
Refer to Table 5-103 for test points and the Figure 5-35 for positions.
Table 5-103 Test points on the laser control board
+12V 12P0 +12V power from the driver board.
-12V -12V -12V voltage output from the board

TPVREF VREF 2.5V reference voltage generated from the
5-117
Hardware System
on-board chip U1
Twice of voltage to ground of the sliding end of the

variable resistor (VR1) or the digital potentiometer
(U4); This voltage is used to control the intensity of
TP2VREF 2VREF
the laser.
The higher the voltage, the greater the intensity of
the laser.
The voltage drop generated in R1 or R21 or

TPIPD PDA R1//R21 by the feedback current of photoelectric
reception of the laser semiconductor.
The extracted signal of working current of

light-emitting tube of the laser semiconductor; it
reflects the working current of the light-emitting
TPILD LASER
tube via the voltage at the point of TPILD, which
detects whether the laser semiconductor works in
desired status.
Volumetric board
1. Adjusting component: VR4 (used for adjusting START signal)
Adjust VR4 to enable the voltage at the point of TP2 to be within 3V0.02V.
2. Adjusting component: VR3 (used for adjusting STOP signal).
Adjust VR3 to enable the voltage at the point of TP3 to be within 3V0.02V.
Refer to Table 5-105 for test points and the Figure 5-36 for positions.
Table 5-104 Test points of the volumetric board
12V analog power from the signal processing

TPPWR AVCC
board
TPGND GND Ground
2.5V reference voltage generated from the

TP1 / on-board chip U4 (used for comparator reference
signal)
TP2 / Comparator negative input signal in START circuit
TP3 / Comparator negative input signal in STOP circuit

2.5V reference voltage generated from the
TP7 /
on-board chip U3 (used for photocoupler)
5-118
Hardware System
TP8 START Count starting signal START
TP9 STOP Count ending signal STOP
5.9.5 Replacement and connection
Purpose
The pre-amplification board, laser control board and volumetric board are key components
concerning technical parameters. In case of failure, replace and service it promptly. Use this
procedure to replace them.
Tools
Removal
The operation of removal is performed as per the reverse operation of installation described
in section 5.9.5.
Installation
Refer to Figure 5-37 and Figure 5-38 for the position of the pre-amplification board in the
analyzer and information of its assemblies. To ensure that the board is correctly installed in
the analyzer, please do strictly as instructed below:
1. Align the photo detector on the pre-amplification board (Figure 5-38,

2 ) with the PD
sheath(Figure 5-38,
1 ), then place the pre-amplification board onto the support, and
then secure the fixing screws (Figure 5-38,

4 ).
2. Shield the pre-amplification using the shielded cover (Figure 5-38,

3 ) and secure the
fixing screws (Figure 5-38, ) to finish the PD installation. The two steps above apply to
the high angle board and low angle board.
3. Place the high angle PD assembly and low angle PD assembly onto the optical system
support (Figure 5-37,
1 ) as
2 and
3 shown in Figure 5-37; secure the fixing screws.
4. Connect the plugs to the sockets correctly as shown in Figure 5-31.
5. Recover the protective cover of the optical system.
5-119
Hardware System
Figure 5-37 Assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board (1)
1Optical system support 3High angle PD assembly

2Low angle PD assembly
Figure 5-38 Assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board (2)
1PD sheath 4Fixing screw (M3x6) of pre-amplification board
2Pre-amplification board 5Fixing screws (M3x6) of shield cover
3Shield cover
Laser control board
Refer to Figure 5-39 and Figure 5-40 for the position of the laser control board in the analyzer
5-120
Hardware System
and information of its assemblies. To ensure that the board is correctly installed in the
analyzer, please do strictly as instructed below:
1. Place the laser control board (Figure 5-40, ) in the direction shown in Figure 5-40
onto the control board support (Figure 5-40,
3 ) and then secure the fixing screws
(Figure 5-40, ).
2. After the step 1, place the control board support onto the optical system support (Figure
5-40, ) and secure the fixing screws (Figure 5-40, ).
3. Connect the plugs to the sockets correctly as shown in Figure 5-32.
4. Recover the big shielded box of the laser assembly.
Figure 5-39 Assembly drawing of the laser control board (1)
1Optical system support 2Support of the control board
5-121
Hardware System
Figure 5-40 Assembly drawing of the laser control board (2)
1Support 4Laser control board
2Fixing screws of the laser control 5 Fixing screws of the control

board support (M3x8) board (M3x6)
3Control board support
Volumetric board
Refer to Figure 5-41 for the position of the volumetric board in the analyzer and its
assemblies. To ensure that the board is correctly installed in the analyzer, please do strictly
as instructed below:
1. Put the volumetric tube (Figure 5-41,

4 ) on the support (Figure 5-41,
2 ), and adjust it
in place.
2. Put the volumetric board (Figure 5-41,

3 ) on the corresponding position of the
enclosure (Figure 5-41,

1 ), and align the positioning holes at four corners.
3. Put the assemblies of step (1) on the volumetric board, and adjust the positioning holes
as well. That is, the positioning holes of the enclosure, volumetric board and support
shall match together. Fix them with screws (Figure 5-41,
5 ).
4. As shown in Figure 5-33, connect the plugs and sockets correctly.
5-122
Hardware System
Figure 5-41 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board
1enclosure 4volumetric tube
2support 5screw
3volumetric board
Verification
1. Install the pre-amplification board in the analyzer correctly. Make sure to cover the laser
assembly with the shielding box.
2. Perform a sample analysis and then check the scattergram. Normal scattergram
indicates that you have replaced the pre-amplification board successfully.
Laser control board
1. Install the laser control board in the analyzer by fixing the screws and connecting the
laser tube and temperature sensor to the board properly. Start up the analyzer.
2. Perform a background count. Enter Main ServiceStatus Vol. & Cur.

screen, and check whether the laser tube current is within the normal range.
Volumetric Board
1. Install the volumetric board in the analyzer by fixing the screws and connecting cables to
the board properly. Start up the analyzer.
2. Perform a sample analysis and check the status of the indicators on the volumetric board.
When the metering tube is empty, the indicators are off; when the liquid in the metering
tube passes through the photocoupler, the corresponding indicator lights on (OP1 to D1,
OP2 to D2).
5-123
Hardware System

Table 5-105 Analysis and handling of the pre-amplification board
Fault-judging conditions of Fault Recommended

No Fault Name Fault Type Fault Cause
signal processing board Probability action
The connection cable to the
Re-plug the cable
signal processing board is
Medium or replace the
improperly connected or
cable.
the cable is broken.
See the
The voltage at the test point
The power supply of the troubleshooting
Fault of 12V PWR is not equal to 12V0.6V;
1 System fault main unit or the 12V power sections of signal
power ripple noise is greater than Low
from the signal processing processing board
50mV.
board is erroneous. and the power
board.
L1 - L2 or C25 - C29 is of Re-joint or
dry joint or value is Low replace the
erroneous. components.
Fault of -12V The voltage at the test point U1 is of dry joint or Re-joint or
2 Board fault Low
power NPWR is below 10V; ripple erroneous; capacitor replace the
5-124
Hardware System
noise is greater than 50mV. C1-C5, C22-C24, or L22 is components.

of dry joint, or value is
erroneous.
The low angle board is
mistakenly installed in the Install the right
The output signal of the high Low
position of the high angle board
angle board is too small
board.
(supposing the circuit problem
R2, R4 or R6 is of dry joint Re-joint or
only)
or resistance values are Low replace the
erroneous. components.
The high angle board is
mistakenly installed in the Install the right
Board error (the fault of wrongly The output signal of the low Low
Non-expected position of the low angle board
3 installed board belongs to system angle board is too big
value output board.
fault) (supposing the circuit problem
Re-joint or
only) R2, R7 or R8 resistance is
Low replace the
erroneous or of dry joint.
components.
The photo diode D1 is Re-joint or
The output signal of the erroneous; or R1 is of dry Low replace the
pre-amplification board (high joint or value is erroneous. components.
angle or low angle) is almost Re-joint or
U3 or U4 is of dry joint or
zero or too small. Low replace the
erroneous.
components.
5-125
Hardware System
High angle: R2, R7 or R8,

The width of the C13, C21-C22 is of dry joint
Re-joint or
pre-amplification board (high or value is erroneous; low
Low replace the
angle or low angle) is angle: R2, R4 or R6, C13,
components.
erroneous. C21-C22 is of dry joint or
value is erroneous.
laser control board
Table 5-106 Analysis and handling of the laser control board
Fault-judging
Fault Recommended
No Fault Name Fault Type conditions of signal Fault Cause
Probability action
processing board
The connection cable with the driver Re-plug the cable
board is improperly connected or the Medium or replace the
cable is broken. cable.
See the
The voltage at the
The power of the main unit is erroneous troubleshooting
test point +12V is
1 Fault of +12V power System fault or 12V power from the driver board is Low sections of driver
not equal to
erroneous. board and the
12V0.6V.
power board.
Check the U4, U7
Something is wrong with the on-board
Medium and circuits
power control circuit.
around.
2 Fault of -12V power Board fault The voltage at the Something is wrong with the on-board Medium Check the U4, U5,
5-126
Hardware System
test point is not less power control circuit. U7, U8 and

than -8V. circuits around.
Check the
connection, power
Something is wrong with the +12V
Medium from the driver
power.
board, U4, U7 and
circuits around.
The voltage cable is broken. cable.
between two ends See the
3 Fault of 5V power System fault
of C27 is not equal The power of the main unit is erroneous troubleshooting
to 5V0.25V. or the 12V power of the driver board is Low sections of driver
erroneous. board and the
power board.
In normal
operation, the
cable is broken. cable.
voltage of the
4 Fault of control signal System fault See the
NCONTROL signal
The control signal from the driver board troubleshooting
is no larger than Low
is erroneous. sections of driver
0.8V.
board.
S3 is spot welded,
Change the
but S1 and S2 are
5 Jumper error Board fault error made by the outsourcing supplier Low jumper welding
not spot welded.
per the ideal value
These are the
5-127
Hardware System
methods adopted.
Digital
potentiometer (U4)
control: S8 and S9
are spot welded,
Change the
but S1, S6 and S7
error made by the outsourcing supplier Low jumper welding
are not spot
per the ideal value
welded. The digital
potentiometer
circuit is
redundancy circuit.
The voltage at
Re-joint or
6 Error of reference voltage Board fault TPVREF is not Chip U1 is of dry joint or erroneous. Low
replace U1
equal to 2.5V0.1V
U3 is of dry joint or erroneous; R3-R6 or Re-joint or

Board fault R18 or R20 is of dry joint or the value is Low replace the
(error of the The voltage at the erroneous. component.
Non-expected value of laser
laser tube or test point TPILD is Re-connect or
7 intensity control signal TPILD
connection not between 1.6 The laser tube is damaged or replace the
output
belongs to and 2.5V. connection cable is erroneous (bad Medium connection cable;
system fault) connection or short-circuit). or replace the
laser tube.
5-128
Hardware System
5V voltage fault. Low See No.2 above
U2, Q1 is of dry joint or erroneous; R15, Re-joint or

R16, R1, R21, R7, R8, R10, or R11 is of Low replace the
dry joint, or value is not correct. component.
volumetric board
Table 5-107 Analysis and handling of the volumetric board
Fault-judging
N Fault Fault
Fault Name conditions of signal Fault Cause Recommended action
o Type Probability
processing board
The connection cable with the signal board is
The voltage at the medium Re-plug or replace the cable.
improperly connected or the cable is broken.
Fault of 12V Syste test point TPPWR
1 Refer to the troubleshooting
power m fault is not equal to The power of the main unit is erroneous or the 12V
low sections of the signal board
12V0.6V. power from the signal board is erroneous.
and the power board.
The voltage
Fault of 5V Board between two ends U5 is damaged (or of dry joint); or C6 or C7 is Replace or re-joint the
2 low
power fault of C7 is not equal erroneous (or of dry joint). component.
to 5V0.25V.
Fault of TP1 output voltage 5V power is erroneous. low Refer to No.2 above
Board
3 comparator is not equal to
fault The chip U4 is erroneous or of dry joint. low Replace or re-joint U4.
reference power 2.5V0.05V.
4 Fault of control Syste The voltage of The connection cable with the signal board is medium Re-plug or replace the cable.
5-129
Hardware System
signal m fault NVMBLED signal improperly connected or the cable is broken.

is no less than
The control signal from the signal processing board Refer to the troubleshooting
0.8V. low
is erroneous. section of the signal board.
Fault of The reference Fault of control signal. medium Refer to No.4 above.
constant-current Board voltage (TP7) is Fault of control circuit (Q1 or Q2 is erroneous or of
5 Replace or re-joint the
source of photo fault not equal to dry joint; R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, or R8 is of dry medium
component.
coupler 2.5V0.05V. joint or resistance value is erroneous).
Adjust the VR4 or VR3 to
The VR4 or VR3 is not properly adjusted. medium make TP2 or TP3 equal to
The voltage at the
Non-expected 3V0.2V.
Board test point TP2 or
6 value of TP2 or The photo coupler OP1 or OP2 is erroneous (or of Replace or re-joint the
fault TP3 is not equal to low
TP3 voltage dry joint). component.
3V0.2V.
fault of constant-current source of photo coupler medium Refer to No. 5 above.
fault of 5V power low Refer to No. 2 above.
Indicator D1 or D2 D1 or D2 is damaged (or of dry joint). low Replace or re-joint D1 or D2.
is not on when Fault of 5V power. low Refer to No. 2 above.
liquid passes TP1 reference power is erroneous. low Refer to No. 3 above.
through the
The indicator(s) Board
7 volumetric tube; or
is abnormal fault
the indicator is on
The voltage at TP2 or TP3 is not equal to 3V0.2V. medium Refer to No. 6 above.
although there is
no liquid in the
volumetric tube.
5-130
Hardware System
5.10 Sample Detecting Board

5.10.1 Introduction
The sample detecting board is a part of the five-part differential hematology analyzer
BC-5500. It can detect whether the aspirating volume meets the test requirement in the
course of auto-sampling test and closed vial sampling test. After the blood inspect sensor
detects the sample signal, the sample detecting board will finish de-bounce and level
converting of the signal, and finally send out the LVTTL level signal which should meet the
need of the input signal of the driver board.
You can service and troubleshoot Sample Detecting Board as instructed in Section 5.10.

The sample detecting board includes the circuit of obtaining the sensor current signal, I-V
converting circuit and lever converting circuit.
Function
The sample detecting board performs the following functions:
The sample signal detecting of piercing aspiration (named pre-blood).
Interface connecting and compatibility.
Figure 5-42 shows the functional block diagram of the Sample Detecting Board.
Sensors of the syringe
unit
J1
Pre-Bood I-V Level

Sensor converting converting
J21 on
the
J2 J3 driver
board
Sensor I-V Level
(standby) converting converting
Sample Detecting Board
Figure 5-42 Block diagram of the Sample Detecting Board
5-131
Hardware System
Description
Pre-blood signal detecting and converting: The blood inspect sensor sends a signal to the
sample detecting board, then the sample detecting board will finish the I-V converting, the
voltage following and the level converting of this signal, and finally send the signal to the
driver board.
The sample detecting board is configured with three external interfaces.Figure 5-43 shows
the interface layout of the sample detecting board.
J2
J1 J3
Figure 5-43 Interface layout of the Sample Detecting Board
Table 5-108 Interfaces on the Sample Detecting Board
Connecting the sensors of the syringe Compatible with all

J1 20
unit on-line BC-5500
The voltage input of the pre-blood

sensor
J2 8 /
The signal output of the pre-blood
sensor
The voltage input of the sample

detecting board
J3 20 /
The detecting signal output of the
pre-blood
5-132
Hardware System
Definition of J1
J1 is connected to sensors of the syringe unit. Its pins distribution and definitions is the same
as those of J21 on the driver board, which can be checked in the Table 5-46 of the Section
5.3 in this service manual.
Definition of J2
J2 is connected to the blood inspect sensor. It can provide voltage for the sample detecting
board and send the sensor signal out. Its pins distribution and definitions is presented below
(Table 5-109).
Table 5-109 Definitions of J2

1 / / /
2 / / /
3 / / /
4 / / /
It is connected with
Pre-blood sensor transistor collector the white line of the
5 O
connecting line pre-blood sensor.
The level is 5V5%.
Pre-blood sensor transistor emitter
6 I the green line of the
connecting line
pre-blood sensor.
Pre-blood sensor LBD positive pole
7 O the red line of the
connecting line
pre-blood sensor.
Pre-blood sensor diode negative
8 - the black line of the
electrode connecting line
pre-blood sensor.
Definition of J3
J3 is connected to the J21 of the driver board. It provides voltage for the sample detecting
board and outputs the detecting signal. Its pins distribution and definitions is the same as
those of J21 on the driver board, which can be checked in the Table 5-46 (driver board table)
of the Section 5.3 in this service manual.
Assembly Drawing
The assembly drawing of the Sample Detecting Board is shown in .Figure 5-44
5-133
Hardware System
Figure 5-44 Assembly drawing of the Sample Detecting Board

The table below describes the adjustment and test points on the driver board.
Table 5-110 Test points on the Sample Detecting Board
Test point Function
The sample detecting signal voltage of the

TP1
pre-blood sensor.
TP2 The sample status signal of the pre-blood sensor.
VR1 Sampling resistance of the pre-blood sensor.
Purpose
The sample detecting board is the front part of the whole product. When any failure occurs, it
should be replaced and maintained in time to assure the normal running of the product.
Please follow the procedure below to replace the sample detecting board.
Tools
5-134
Hardware System
Removal
To remove the Sample Detecting Board, do as follows:
1. Open the top cover (See Section 6.2.4 );
2. The two small pan head screws M4X8 are use to fix the main board and the signal board
components. Loosen and take away them with 107 cross screwdriver (See Figure 6-51);
3. Turn up the main board and the signal board components and support them with the
PCB component supporting pole (See Figure 6-52);
4. Pull out the three electric connection-pegs on the sample detecting board;
5. Loosen the four pan head screws with cross recess M2X6 (They are used to fix the
sample detecting board) with 101 cross-headed screw driver and take away the sample
detecting board (SeeFigure 5-45).
Figure 5-45
1 Fixing board of the sample 3sample detecting board

detecting board
2Pan head screw with cross recess 4Front cover

M2X6
5-135
Hardware System
Installation
Reverse the removal procedure to install it.
Note:
1. If the pipe is scratched when it is installed, please replace it.
2. Connect the connector plugs and connectors correctly as instructed in Figure 5-43.
Verification
To verify whether the sample detecting board works normally, do as follows:
1. Inspect whether all components are installed and fixed well.
2. Inspect whether the electric connection-peg are connected correctly.
3. Inspect whether the pipes are connected correctly.
4. In auto-sampling mode/closed vial sampling mode, continuously make once normal

sample test and blank background test. If Insufficient aspiration are not prompted of
the normal sample, but Abnormal sample orInsufficient aspiration can be
prompted in background test, then the replacing is normal.
The table below describes fault analysis and handling about the Sample Detecting Board.
Table 5-111 Fault analysis and handling about the touchscreen control board
No. Possible reason Solution
1 When pre-blood inspect 1. Possible causes: There is something wrong

tube has no blood, with the inputted voltage +5V; Pre-blood sample
VTP1<1.5V inspect sensor cannot work well; The optical path
of the pre-blood sample sensor is abnormal.
2. Solutions: Measure the input voltage with
multimeter. If the voltage is within the range of
+5V0.25V, then it is not the fault of the power
supple. If inputted voltage exceeds the above
range, then inspect J21.13 and connecting cables
of the driver board and eliminate the power supple
faults. If the power supple of +5V can work well,
then inspect whether something dirty has covered
the optical path of the pre-blood sample inspect
sensor. Eliminate the dirt and restore the normal
optical path. Otherwise there is no fault with the
5-136
Hardware System
optical path. If power supply and optical path both

work well, then make air full of the pre-blood inspect
tube, and adjust the variable resistance VR1. If we
can make VTP11.5V, then after VTP11.5V, fix the
variable resistance VR1, and the fault of the
pre-blood sensor will be eliminated. If VTP1<1.5V,
then the pre-blood sensor is destroyed and needs
to be replaced.
2 When pre-blood inspect 1. Possible causes: Open circuit of R6; Open
tube has no blood and circuit of D1; Q1 fault.
VTP1 1.5V, then 2. Solutions: Measure R6 or D1 with multimeter. If
VFRONT>0.8V there are no open circuit with R6 and D1, then Q1 is
destroyed and needs to be replaced.
3 When pre-blood inspect 1. Possible causes: The optical path of sensor is

tube is full of blood, then abnormal; The pre-blood sensor is destroyed.
VTP2 1.5V. 2. Solutions: Inspect the installation of the pre-blood
sensor. If it is installed correctly, then the optical
path is normal. Otherwise install it correctly. If the
optical path is normal, then the pre-blood sensor is
destroyed and needs to be replaced.
5-137
6 Maintenance
6.1 General
You can service the BC-5500 as per Section 6.2 6.15. For the repairing with verification,
you must follow the procedures strictly to verify the maintenance.
6-1
Maintenance
6.2 Disassembling the Panels

6.2.1 Removing the Left Door
Purpose
To disassemble the pneumatic/electric/fluidic parts, etc. inside the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the left door.
Tools
Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M4X8 screws as per Figure 6-1.
3. Pull the left door backwards to make it unlocked from the front plate and bottom plate,
then remove the left door as per Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Removing the left door
1Front plate 2Bottom plate
3Left door 4Panhead screw M4X8
6-2
Maintenance
Installation
Install the left door according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
6.2.2 Removing the Right Door

Purpose
Follow this procedure to remove the right door to disassemble the fluidic parts inside the
analyzer.
Tools
Removal
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M4X8 screws as per Figure 6-2.
3. Pull the right door backwards to make it unlocked from the front plate and bottom plate,
then remove the right door as Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Removing the right door
1Panhead screw M4X8 2Right door

3Bottom plate 4Front plate
6-3
Maintenance
Installation
Install the right door according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
6.2.3 Opening the Upper Cover

Purpose
Follow this procedure to open the upper cover to disassemble the components on the front
plate.
Removal
Open the upper cover and support it with the stop bar as per Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Opening the upper cover
1Upper cover 2Stop bar
3Hinge 4Front plate

5Lower cover
6-4
Maintenance
Installation
Lift up the upper cover, release the stop bar and then put down the upper cover.
6.2.4 Removing the Top Cover

Purpose
Follow this procedure to remove the top cover to disassemble the optical components,
boards, cables and connectors.
Tools
Removal
2. Open the upper cover as per Section 6.2.3.
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 5 M4X8 screws, 3 on the back plate and 2 on the
front plate (see Figure 6-4).
4. Pull the top cover backwards for 10-30mm, then remove it up from the main unit as
Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Removing the top cover
1Panhead screw M4X8 2Top cover
3Upper cover 4Front plate
6-5
Maintenance
Installation
Install the top cover according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
6.2.5 Removing the Lower Cover

Purpose
Follow this procedure to remove the lower cover to disassemble the syringe assembly, mixing
& piercing assembly, START switch assembly and reagent preheating assembly.
Tools
Removal
Due to different configurations, you can follow these three procedures to remove the lower
cover.
To remove the lower cover from the analyzer with sample transport unit
2. Remove the left door as per Section 6.2.1.
3. Remove the right door as per Section 6.2.2.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M3X8 screws fixing the protective cover, then
remove the protective cover as Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Removing the lower cover (with autoloader)-1
1Sample transport unit 2Protective cover
3Panhead screw M3X8 4Lower cover
6-6
Maintenance
When transporting the analyzer, combine the sample transport unit with the
protective cover by fixing 2 M3X8 screws shown in the two circles in Figure
6-5. However, you need not install the two screws when installing the
analyzer.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the sample transport unit,
then move the transport unit outwards and pull out the connecting cables as show in
Figure 6-6.
1Sample transport unit 2Panhead screw M4X8
3Connection board
7. Unplug J2 and J5 connectors from the adapter as shown in Figure 6-7, and then remove
the sample transport unit.
6-7
Maintenance
1Lower cover 2Sample transport unit
3Adapter
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 screws fixing the lower cover, 4 M4X8 screws
in the middle and 2 M4X12 screws on each side, as shown in Figure 6-8.
6-8
Maintenance
1Front plate 2Lower cover
3 Cross-recessed countersunk 4Panhead screw M4X8

screw M4X12
9. Remove the lower cover.
To remove the lower cover from the analyzer with closed tube sampler
1. Start up the analyzer and enter the main screen.
6-9
Maintenance
2. CLICK Count on the main screen to enter the Count screen. Then CLICK Mode on
the Count screen and the Work Mode dialog box as shown in Figure 6-10 pops up.
CLICK the CT-WB radio box and CLICK OK, save entry and return to the Count
screen. CLICK Open Door to open the sample compartment door as shown in Figure
6-11.
Figure 6-10 Work Mode dialog box
6-10
Maintenance
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws fixing the sample compartment
door, and then remove the door as Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-11 Removing the lower cover (with closed tube sampler)-1
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 2Sample compartment door

M3X6
3Rotating base 4 Enclosure of the closed tube

sampler
4. Push the rotating base back into place. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord
from the wall outlet.
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the enclosure of the closed
tube sampler, then remove the enclosure as Figure 6-12.
6-11
Maintenance
1Panhead screw M3X8 2 Enclosure of the closed tube

sampler
3Lower cover
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the closed tube sampler as
shown in Figure 6-13. Pull the closed tube sampler outwards a little. Unplug the optical
sensor/electromagnet connectors from the sampler, then remove the sampler.
6-12
Maintenance
1Lower cover 2Bottom plate
3Closed tube sampler 4Panhead screw M4X8
6-13
Maintenance

screw M4X12
To remove the lower cover from the analyzer with only open vial sampler
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the enclosure of the closed
tube sampler, then remove the enclosure as Figure 6-15.
6-14
Maintenance
Figure 6-15 Removing the lower cover (with open vial sampler)-1
1Panhead screw M3X8 2enclosure of closed tube sampler
3Lower cover
6-15
Maintenance
Figure 6-16 Removing the lower cover (with open vial sampler)-2

screw M4X12
Installation
Install the lower cover according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
6-16
Maintenance
6.3 Replacing the Power Supply Assembly

6.3.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the power supply assembly as needed.
6.3.2 Tools
100mm monkey wrench
6.3.3 Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the power supply assembly.
To remove the power supply assembly from the main unit:
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the waterproof cover, then
remove the waterproof cover as Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 Removing the power supply assembly-1
1Waterproof cover 2Panhead screw M4X8
6-17
Maintenance
3Power supply assembly 4Bottom plate
4. Unplug J2, J3, J4 and J5 connectors from the power board as Figure 6-18.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the power supply assembly,
and then remove the power supply assembly as Figure 6-17
To disassemble the power supply assembly:
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the power supply housing
as shown in Figure 6-18.
7. Unplug J6 from the power board and remove the power supply housing as Figure 6-18.
8. Use the 107 screwdriver and 100mm monkey wrench to loosen the M4X20 screws and
M4 nuts fixing the fans, then remove the fans as Figure 6-18.
9. Unplug connector from J1 of the power board. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 9
M3X8 screws fixing the power board, and then remove the power board as Figure 6-18.
10. Disconnect the electric connectors from the power switch terminals. Use the 107
screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the earth wire as Figure 6-18.
11. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the 3516 socket, then
remove the socket as Figure 6-18.
12. Take out the power switch as Figure 6-18.
6-18
Maintenance
Figure 6-18 Disassembling the power supply assembly
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 2Fans and cables

M3X8 (with washer)
3 Cross-recessed panhead screw 4Nut GB6170 M4
M4X20
5Panhead screw M4X8 6Waterproof cover
7Power supply housing 8Power board
9Base plate 10Power switch
113516 socket 12 Cross-recessed countersunk

screw M3X6
6.3.4 Installation
Install the power supply assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
6-19
Maintenance
1. Connect the switch terminals to cables as Figure 6-19.
Brown indicates the live wire and blue for the neutral wire.
Connect the upper connector of the - terminal to the live wire of the power board
and the lower connector to the neutral wire.
Connect the upper connector of the O terminal to the live wire of the power
socket and the lower connecter to the neutral wire.
Make sure to connect the two upper connectors to the brown wires and the two
lower connectors to the blue wires.
Figure 6-19 Connections of the power switch
2. Direct the earth terminal of the 3516 power socket downwards as Figure 6-19.
3. Install the fans with the text side facing the outside and in the same direction.
6.3.5 Verification
1. Check whether all components are installed and fixed in place.
2. Check whether the power switch connections, the 3516 power socket and fan direction
meet the requirements.
3. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacement.
6.4 Replacing the Touchscreen Assembly

6.4.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the touchscreen assembly.
6-20
Maintenance
6.4.2 Tools
6.4.3 Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the touchscreen assembly.
To remove the touchscreen assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the connector from J1 of the indicator board and the connectors from J5 of the
touch screen control board as Figure 6-20.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the screen ground wire, as
Figure 6-20.
5. Remove the top cover (See Section 6.2.4).
6. Remove the top cover (See Section 6.2.1).
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X6 screws fixing the main board
shielding cover to remove the main board shielding cover as Figure 5-6.
8. Unplug the connecter connecting the J2 and J16 of the main board, remove the
grounding screw and then remove the signal cable of the TFT displayer and the power
cord of the TFT screen converter as Figure 5-6.
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the six PT3X10 screws fixing the touchscreen
assembly to remove the touchscreen assembly as Figure 6-20.
6-21
Maintenance
Figure 6-20 Removing the touchscreen assembly (AU screen)-1
1Tapping screw PT3X10 3Upper cover
2Touchscreen assembly 4 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X8
6-22
Maintenance
Figure 6-21 Removing the touchscreen assembly (AU screen)-2
1Insulating strip of backlight board 9Sponge strip 1
2Converter 10Cross-recessed panhead screw

M2X8
3 Cross-recessed panhead screw 11Sponge strip 2

M2X4
4Converter shielding box 12Screen stop bar 2
5Screen stop bar 1 13Screen controller mounting plate
6Line fixing block 14Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X6 (with washer)
7LCD screen 15Touchscreen control board
8Touchscreen 16Screen mounting plate
6-23
Maintenance
To disassemble the touchscreen assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to remove the mounting plate of the screen controller and the
touchscreen control board, loosen the line fixing block and then remove the touchscreen
connecter (Figure 6-21).
2. Pinch the extended part of the sponge strip 1 and tear the strip off. Handle the strip 2 in
the same way to remove the touchscreen (Figure 6-21).
3. Disassemble the rest parts as Figure 6-21 shows.
6.4.4 Installation
Install the touchscreen assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Note of touchscreen installation:
Attach the PET side of the sponge strip 1 to the LCD screen, leaving part of the strip
extended as shown in Figure 6-21 and leave the other side of the adhesive paper of
the strip untorn.
All sponge strips are not allowed to lap. Yet cutting is allowed.
Place the front of the touchscreen upward.
Place the touchscreen into the frame of three angle-supports, touch the right
troublescreen with the angle-support, and then press the touchscreen gently. Check
and ensure the touchscreen is placed in appropriately. Then tear the adhesive
paper off the sponge strip 1, and press the touchscreen gently so that the
touchscreen is attached to the strip 1 firmly.
Use the line fixing block to fix the screen connecting line, secure the line with
screws and then push the line connecter to the bottom. Ensure the line is not
pressed and then tighten the fixing screws.
6.4.5 Verification
2. Check whether the cables are connected correctly.
3. Start up the analyzer and check the touching and displaying of the screen.
6-24
Maintenance
6.5 Replacing the Fluidic Components

6.5.1 Replacing the Air Valve Assembly
Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the gas valve assembly. Refer to Figure 6-22 for the gas
valves and junction board on the gas valve assembly.
Figure 6-22 Layout of the gas valve assembly
1Three-way gas valve GV010E1-11 7Three-way gas valve GA010E1
2Three-way gas valve GV010E1 8Manifold 2
3ASCO three-way valve 9Five-way gas valve 010-4E1
4Three-way gas valve G010E1 10Manifold 3
5Manifold 1 11Two-way gas valve GA010E1-2

6Three-way gas valve GA010E1-11 12 Three-way gas valve
GAV010E1-11
6-25
Maintenance
Tools
100mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these five procedures to disassemble the gas valve assembly.
To remove the gas valve assembly from the main unit:
3. Disconnect the electric connectors from all gas valves.
4. Unplug all pneumatics lines connected to the gas valve assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the gas valve assembly, and
then remove the gas valve assembly. The screws are indicated in black circles in Figure
6-23.
Figure 6-23 Removing the gas valve assembly-1
1Panhead screw M4X8 2Gas valve assembly
To remove the three-way gas valves:
6-26
Maintenance
There are 4 three-way valves on the gas valve assembly, as shown in Figure 6-22. Each of
the valves can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the GV49 valve is
described below.
2. Remove the left door as Section 6.2.1.
3. Disconnect the GV49 valves electric connector.
4. Unplug the gas tubes from the GV49 valve.
5. Use the 101 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M2X22 screws fixing the GV49 valve, then
remove the valve as Figure 6-24.
6. Use the 100mm wrench to unscrew the 3 LC-0425-M3 connectors on the GV49 valve as
Figure 6-24.
1ASCO three-way valve 5Five-way valve GV92
2Three-way valve GV49 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X6 (with washer)
3Connector LC-0425-M3 7Valve bracket
4 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M2X22
6-27
Maintenance
To remove the five-way gas valves:
You can follow this procedure to remove the GV92 valve from the gas valve assembly as
4. Unplug the three pneumatic lines from the GV92 valve.
remove the valve as Figure 6-24.
6. Use the 100mm wrench to unscrew the 3 LC-0425-M3 connectors on the GV92 valve as
Figure 6-24.
To remove the ASCO three-way valve
There are 4 ASCO three-way valves on the gas valve assembly ( Figure 6-24). All ASCO
three-way valves can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the GV75 valve
is described below.
3. Disconnect the 3 gas tubes from the GV75 valve.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3x6 screws fixing the GV75 valve, then
remove the valve and disconnect the electric connecter as per (Figure 6-25).
To remove the gas valves on the junction board:
There are three junction boards on the gas valve assembly as shown in Figure 6-22. All
valves on the boards can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the GV61
valve is described below.
remove the valve as per Figure 6-25.
6-28
Maintenance
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 4Manifold 2

M3X20
2Gas valve GV61 5Valve bracket

M2X16
To remove the junction boards
There are three junction boards on the gas valve assembly as shown in Figure 6-22. Each
board can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the junction board 2 is
described below.
3. Disconnect the electric connectors of the junction board 2.
4. Unplug all pneumatic lines connected to the junction board 2.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X20 screws fixing the junction board 2, then
remove the board as per Figure 6-25.
6-29
Maintenance
6. Use the 101 screwdriver and 100mm wrench to disassemble the junction board 2 as per
Figure 6-26.
1Connector X420-1 7Gas valve
2Connector SPA4-M5 8 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M2x16
3Insulation washer 9Manifold 2

4Sealing washer 10Choke plug
5Fixing block 11Connector LC-0425-M3

M2X4
Installation
Install the gas valve assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect all gas valves electric connectors according to the labels.
2. Connect the tubing as per Appendix E.
6-30
Maintenance
Verification
3. Check whether the pneumatic lines are connected correctly.
6.5.2 Replacing the Regulating Valve Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the regulating valve assembly.
Tools
104S-#1(38) cross-headed screwdriver
150mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the regulating valve assembly.
To remove the regulating valve assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the nine pneumatic lines from the regulating valve assembly.
4. Use the 104S-#1(38) screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M4X12 screws fixing the regulating
valve assembly, then remove the assembly as per Figure 6-27.
6-31
Maintenance
Figure 6-27 Removing the regulating valve assembly
1Back plate 3Regulating valve assembly
2Panhead screw M4X8 4Power board bracket
To disassemble the regulating valve assembly:
1. Loosen the cap and remove the vacuum regulating valve as per Figure 6-28.
2. Loosen the stem and stem locking nut of the precision regulating valve as per Figure
6-28.
3. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the valve locking nut, then remove the precision
regulating valve as per Figure 6-28.
4. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the L-shape and Y-shape connectors from the
vacuum regulating valve and precision regulating valve as per Figure 6-28.
6-32
Maintenance
Figure 6-28 Removing the regulating valve assembly
1L-shape connector SQL6-01 6Stem of precision regulating valve
2Vacuum regulating valve 7 Stem locking nut of precision

regulating valve
3Y-shape connector SQU4-01 8 Valve locking nut of precision

regulating valve
4Cap of vacuum regulating valve 9 Washer of precision regulating

valve
5Regulating valve bracket 10Precision regulating valve
Installation
Install the regulating valve assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Power on the analyzer, adjust the three regulating valves as required, then lock the
6-33
Maintenance
regulating valves by:
2. Pressing the knob on the vacuum regulating valve.
3. Fixing the stem locking nut of the precision regulating valve.
4. Connect the lines as per Appendix E.
Verification
2. Check whether the pneumatic lines are connected correctly.
6.5.3 Replacing the Pinch Valve Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the pinch valve assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pinch valve assembly.
To remove the pinch valve assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug all pneumatic lines from the pinch valve assembly.
4. Unplug all fluidic lines from the pinch valve assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the pinch valve assembly,
then remove the pinch valve assembly as per Figure 6-29.
6-34
Maintenance
Figure 6-29 Removing the pinch valve assembly -1
1Bottom plate 3Panhead screw M4X8
2Pinch valve assembly
To disassemble the pinch valve assembly:
Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the pinch valve assembly as per Figure 6-30.
6-35
Maintenance
Figure 6-30 Removing the pinch valve assembly -2
1Valve bracket 1 48mm pinch valve
2Protective ring SB-0710 55mm pinch valve

M3X6 (with washer)
Installation
Install the pinch valve assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the tubing as per Appendix E.
Verification
2. Check whether the pneumatic/fluidic lines are connected correctly.
6-36
Maintenance
6.5.4 Replacing the Valve/Pump Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the valve/pump assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve/pump assembly.
To remove the valve/pump assembly from the main unit:
1. Start up the analyzer and empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Unplug all fluidic/pneumatic lines connected to the valve/pump assembly.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 6 M4X8 screws fixing the valve/pump assembly,
then move out the valve/pump assembly. The screws are indicated in black circles in
Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31 Removing the valve/pump assembly-1
1Panhead screw M4X8 2Valve/pump assembly
6-37
Maintenance
5. Disconnect all solenoid valves electric connectors.
6. Remove the valve/pump assembly.
To remove the solenoid valves:
There are 14 two-way and 13 three-way solenoid valves on the valve/pump assembly. Each
of the valves can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the SV20 valve is
described below.
3. Unplug the three fluidic lines from the SV20 valve.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the SV20 valve, then
move out the valve as per Figure 6-32.
1Two-way solenoid valve 60.5mL metering pump
2Three-way solenoid valve 72mL metering pump

3 Cross-recessed panhead screw 8Mounting plate of metering pump
M3X6
4Valve bracket 93mL metering pump

50.32mL metering pump 101mL metering pump
6-38
Maintenance
5. Disconnect the SV20 valves electric connector.
Avoid the cables falling behind the valve bracket through holes.
6. Remove the SV20 valve.
To remove the metering pumps
There are one 0.32mL, three 1mL, three 2mL and one 3mL metering pumps on the
valve/pump assembly. Each of the pumps can be installed and removed in the same way.
Removal of the 3ml pump is described below.
3. Unplug the fluid line and pneumatic line from the 3mL metering pump.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the 3mL metering pump,
then remove the pump together with the mounting plate as per Figure 6-32.
5. Use a 2.5mm hexagon wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X12 screws fixing the 3mL metering
pump, then remove the metering pump as per Figure 6-33.
13mL metering pump 3Socket cap screw M3X12
2Mounting plate
6-39
Maintenance
Installation
Install the valve/pump assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect all solenoid valves electric connectors according to the labels.
Verification
2. Check whether the cables of the solenoid valves are connected correctly.
6.5.5 Replacing the Fluidic Pump Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the fluidic pump assembly.
Tools
100mm monkey wrench
Removal
3. Disconnect the 2 electric connectors of the diaphragm pump.
4. Unplug the 4 fluidic lines from the diaphragm pump.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 M3X6 screws fixing the diaphragm pump, then
remove the diaphragm pump as per Figure 6-34.
6. Use the 100mm wrench to unscrew the 3 nuts fixing the mounting plate, then remove the
mounting plate and the washer as per Figure 6-34.
7. Loosen the shock pad as per Figure 6-34.
6-40
Maintenance
Figure 6-34 Removing the fluidic pump assembly
1Shock pad 4Nut 8-32UNC-2B
2 Cross-recessed panhead screw 5Mounting plate

M3X6 (with washer)
3Washer GB93 4 6Diaphragm pump
Installation
Install the fluidic pump assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
6-41
Maintenance
Precautions:
1. Connect the diaphragm pump to the cable indicated below:
No. Component Cable to be connected

1 Diaphragm pump P1
Verification
2. Check whether the diaphragm pumps electric connector is connected correctly.
3. Check whether the fluidic lines are connected correctly.
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacing.
6.5.6 Replacing the Syringe Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the 100l and 2.5mL syringe assemblies, which can be
removed in the same way except for two fluidic connectors of the 100l one. Removal of the
100l syringe assembly is described below.
Tools
102 flat-headed screwdriver
2mm hexagon wrench
2.5mm hexagon wrench
150mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the 100l syringe assembly.
To remove the 100l syringe assembly from the main unit:
2. Remove the lower cover as per Section 6.2.5.
3. Unplug the optical sensor and motor connectors from the 100l syringe assembly.
4. Unplug the two fluidic lines from the 100l syringe assembly. (Note: Theres only one
fluidic line connected to the 2.5mL syringe assembly)
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X10 screws fixing the 100l syringe
assembly, then remove the 100l syringe assembly and four rubber rings as per Figure
6-35.
6-42
Maintenance
Figure 6-35 Removing the syringe assembly-1
1Front plate 4Rubber ring
2100l syringe assembly 5Bottom plate
32.5mL syringe assembly 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X10 (with washer)
To disassemble the 100l syringe assembly:
1. Use the 2mm wrench to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the motor rod, then remove the
motor rod as per Figure 6-36.
Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the hole on the motor rod, and
apply some lock glue to the threads.
2. Use the 102 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the 100l syringe unit as per
Figure 6-36.
6-43
Maintenance
3. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X16 screws fixing the 100l syringe unit,
then remove the fixing block and the 100l syringe unit as per Figure 6-36.
1Slider 5Fixing block
2Socket head screw with cup point 6Socket cap screw M3X16
M4X8
3Special screw M4X8 7Bracket assembly

4100l syringe unit 8Motor rod
4. Use the 150mm wrench to disassemble the 100l syringe as per Figure 6-37.
Apply some sealing glue to the threads. Dont proceed to the next step until
the glue is dry.
6-44
Maintenance
1100l syringe 3Syringe connector
2Washer 4Connector X420-1
5. Use the 2mm wrench to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the guiding rod, then remove the
guiding rod and the slider as per Figure 6-38.
Make sure to attach the retaining screw to the surface of the guide rod, and
apply some lock glue to the threads.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X10 screw fixing the optical sensor, then
remove the sensor as per Figure 6-38.
7. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the linear step motor, then
6-45
Maintenance
remove the motor as per Figure 6-38.
Install the motor and the optical sensor with their connecting lines to the
same direction.
8. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X10 screws fixing the guiding plate, then
remove the guiding plate as per Figure 6-38.
1Guiding plate 6Optical sensor GP1A05A
2Socket cap screw M3X10 7 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X10
3Motor bracket 8Slider unit
4Socket cap screw M3X8 9Socket head screw with cup point
M4X8
5Linear step motor 43F4K-05-010 10Guiding rod
6-46
Maintenance
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the slider unit as per Figure 6-39.
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 4Linear bearing SDM-8

M3X6
2Slider 5Spacer ring
3Baffle plate
Installation
Install the syringe assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the step motors and optical sensors to the cables indicated below:
No. Assembly Component Cables to be

connected
1 100l syringe assembly Linear step motor M-SWBC
2 100l syringe assembly Optical sensor S-SWBC
3 2.5mL syringe assembly Linear step motor M-SWB
4 2.5mL syringe assembly Optical sensor S-SWB
Verification
6-47
Maintenance
6.5.7 Replacing the Reservoir Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the cleanser, FCM and DIL cistern assemblies, which can be
removed in the same way. Removal of the cleanser reservoir assembly is described below.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Tweezers
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the cleanser reservoir assembly.
To remove the cleanser reservoir assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the liquid-level sensor connector on the cleanser reservoir assembly.
4. Unplug the pneumatic line and 2 fluidic lines connected to the cleanser reservoir
assembly
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the cleanser reservoir
assembly, then remove the assembly as per Figure 6-40.
6-48
Maintenance
Figure 6-40 Removing the reservoir assembly-1
1Panhead screw M4X8 5WC1 assembly
2Cleanser reservoir assembly 6FCM cistern assembly
3DIL cistern assembly 7Back plate
4WC2 assembly
To disassemble the cleanser reservoir assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws fixing the waste cistern cap,
then remove the cap and the liquid-level sensor as per Figure 6-41.
2. Use the tweezers to unplug the two connectors on the liquid-level sensor, then use the
150mm wrench to unscrew the liquid-level sensor as per Figure 6-41.
6-49
Maintenance
Figure 6-41 Removing the reservoir assembly-2
1WC2 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X12 (with washer)
2Bracket 2 7Vacuum cupule
3Liquid-level sensor BGRF-F 8O ring 48.7x1.8
4Elbow connector 9O ring 9.5x1.8

5Waste cistern cap 10Sealing surface
Installation
Install the reservoir assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the liquid-level sensors to the cables indicated below:
No. Assembly Component Cables to be connected
1 Cleanser reservoir assembly Liquid-level sensor E-Z

2 FCM cistern assembly Liquid-level sensor FCM
3 DIL cistern assembly Liquid-level sensor DIL
6-50
Maintenance
Verification
2. Check whether the liquid-level sensors electric connectors are connected correctly.
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacing (including the airtightness test)
6.5.8 Replacing the WC1 Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the WC1 assembly.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Tweezers
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the WC1 assembly.
To remove the WC1 assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the liquid-level sensor connector on the WC1 assembly.
4. Unplug the pneumatic line and four fluidic lines connected to the WC1 assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the WC1 assembly, then
remove the WC1 assembly as per Figure 6-42.
6-51
Maintenance
Figure 6-42 Removing the WC1 assembly-1
1Cleanser reservoir assembly 5Panhead screw M4X8
2DIL cistern assembly 6WC1 assembly

3WC2 assembly 7FCM cistern assembly
4Back plate
To disassemble the WC1 assembly:
1. Unplug the pneumatic line connecting the waste cistern cap to the anti-back-flow cistern
cap.
6-52
Maintenance
150mm wrench to unscrew the extension bar and the liquid-level sensor as per Figure
6-43.
4. Loosen the anti-back-flow cistern manually as per Figure 6-43.
5. Take out manually the big floater fallen into the anti-back-flow cistern.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws fixing the anti-back-flow cistern
cap, then remove the anti-back-flow cistern cap as per Figure 6-43.
7. Remove the vacuum cupule installed on the anti-back-flow cistern cap.
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws fixing the 8mm pinch valve, then
remove the pinch valve as per Figure 6-43.
1WC2 10Insertion tube

2Bracket 1 11Anti-back-flow cistern cap
3Liquid-level sensor RF-OV1 12O ring 28X2.5
6-53
Maintenance
4Extension bar 1 13Vacuum cupule
5O ring 9.5x1.8 14Panhead screw M3X8

6Waste cistern cap 15Sealing surface
7 Cross-recessed panhead screw 16Big floater

M3X12 (with washer)
8O ring 48.7x1.8 17Anti-back-flow cistern
98mm pinch valve
Installation
Install the WC1 assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the liquid-level sensor to the cable indicated below:
1 Liquid-level sensor WC1

Verification
2. Check whether the liquid-level sensors electric connector is connected correctly.
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacing (including the airtightness test).
6.5.9 Replacing the WC2 Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the WC2 assembly.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Tweezers
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the WC2 assembly.
To remove the WC2 assembly from the main unit:
6-54
Maintenance
3. Unplug the liquid-level sensor connector on the WC2 assembly.
4. Unplug the three fluidic lines connected to the WC2 assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the WC2 assembly, then
remove the WC2 assembly as per Figure 6-44.
1Panhead screw M4X8 5FCM cistern assembly
2Cleanser reservoir assembly 6WC1 assembly

3DIL cistern assembly 7Back plate
4WC2 assembly
To disassemble the WC2 assembly:
6-55
Maintenance
150mm wrench to unscrew the extension bar and the liquid-level sensor as per Figure
6-45.
1WC2 5Waste cistern cap
2O ring 9.5x1.8 6Extension bar 1
3O ring 48.7x1.8 7Liquid-level sensor RF-OV1
4 Cross-recessed panhead screw 8Bracket 2

M3X12 (with washer)
Installation
Install the WC2 assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the liquid-level sensor to the cable indicated below:
6-56
Maintenance
1 Liquid-level sensor WC1
Verification
2. Check whether the liquid-level sensors electric connector is connected correctly.
6.5.10 Replacing the Metering Tube Assembly

Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the metering tube assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these three procedures to disassemble the metering tube assembly.
To remove the metering tube assembly from the main unit:
2. Remove the lower cover as per Section 6.2.5.
3. Remove baffle plate 2 as per Section 6.6.1.
4. Lift up the main board and signal processing board, lower down the stop bar, then place
down the two boards.
6. Unplug J1 connector from the volumetric board.
7. Disconnect the electric connectors of the 6 solenoid valves.
8. Unplug the 6 fluidic lines connected to the metering tube assembly.
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the metering tube assembly,
then remove the metering tube assembly as per Figure 6-46.
6-57
Maintenance
Figure 6-46 Removing the metering tube assembly-1
1Panhead screw M4X8 3Metering tube assembly
2Front plate
To remove the metering tube
3. Remove the baffle plate 2 as per Section 6.6.1.
4. Unplug the J1 connector from the volumetric board.
5. Unplug the 3 fluidic lines connected to the metering tube.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws fixing the volumetric board, then
6-58
Maintenance
remove the volumetric board and the metering tube as per Figure 6-47
Figure 6-47 Removing the metering tube assembly-2
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 5Metering tube support

M3X6 (with washer)
2Metering tube 6Three-way solenoid valve
3Bracket 7Volumetric board
4Two-way solenoid valve 8Rubber ring
7. Remove the bracket and rubber rings as per Figure 6-47.
8. Refer to the following procedure for removal of solenoid valves. Use the 107 screwdriver
to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the solenoid valve, then remove the valve as per
Figure 6-47.
6-59
Maintenance
Figure 6-48 Removing the metering tube assembly -3
1Bracket 3Rubber ring
2Metering tube
To remove the solenoid valves
There are 5 two-way and 1 three-way solenoid valves on the metering tube assembly. Each
of the valves can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the SV36 valve is
described below.
3. Remove the baffle plate 2 as per Section 6.6.1.
4. Unplug the 2 fluidic lines connected to the SV36 valve.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the SV36 valve as per
Figure 6-47.
6. Disconnect the SV36 valves electric connector.
7. Remove the SV36 valve.
Installation
Install the metering tube assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
6-60
Maintenance
1. Connect all solenoid valves electric connectors according to the labels.
2. Connect the cable H-J1/C41302-A to the J1 slot on the volumetric board.
Verification
6-61
Maintenance
6.6 Replacing the RBC Assembly
6.6.1 Replacing the RBC Bath Assembly
Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the RBC bath assembly.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these six procedures to disassemble the RBC bath assembly.
To remove the outer shielding box:
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the outer shielding box,
then remove the box (Figure 6-49).
4. Unscrew the retaining screw and remove the door of the outer shielding box (Figure
6-49).
6-62
Maintenance
Figure 6-49 Removing the RBC bath assembly-1
1Front plate 4Outer shielding box door
2Outer shielding box 5Panhead screw M4X8

3Retaining screw
To remove the inner shielding box
Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X5 screws fixing the inner shielding box, then
6-63
Maintenance
remove the box (Figure 6-50).
1Front plate 3Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X5
2Inner shielding box 4Panhead screw M4X8
6-64
Maintenance
To remove the baffle plate 1 and 2
2. Remove the top cover as per Section 6.2.4.
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing baffle plate 1 (Figure 6-51).
4. Release the upper cover as per Section 6.2.3.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the main board/signal
processing board assembly (Figure 6-51).
1Panhead screw M4X8 3Baffle plate 1
2 Main board/signal processing

board assembly
6. Lift up the main board/signal processing board assembly, then support it with the stop
6-65
Maintenance
bar (Figure 6-52).
7. Remove the baffle plate 1 (Figure 6-52).
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw securing the baffle plate 2 (Figure
6-52).
9. Remove the baffle plate 2 (Figure 6-52).
1 Main board/signal processing 4Panhead screw M4X8

board assembly
2Stop bar 5Baffle plate 2
3Baffle plate 1
To disconnect the RBC/PLT cable connector:
1. Lift up the main board/signal processing board assembly, and release the stop bar to put
down the board assembly.
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the main board
shielding cover, then remove the cover (Figure 6-53).
6-66
Maintenance
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the upper shielding
cover of the signal processing board, then remove the cover (Figure 6-53).
4. Disconnect the RBC/PLT cable connector. Refer to Section 5.2.2.3 for the slot positions.
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 3Signal processing board

M3X6 (with washer)
2Upper shielding cover of the signal 4Main board shielding cover

processing board
To disassemble the front/back bath assembly and the isolation chamber:
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M3X6 screw fixing the RBC/PLT earth terminal
(Figure 6-54).
3. Disconnect the three fluidic lines from the RBC bath cap.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X12 screws fixing the RBC bath cap, then
remove the cap (Figure 6-54).
6-67
Maintenance
1Isolation chamber 5Clamp
2Clamp 6O ring 20x1.8

3Front/back bath assembly 7RBC bath cap
4 Cross-recessed panhead screw 8 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X6 (with washer) M3X12 (with washer)
6-68
Maintenance
5. Disconnect other fluidic lines from the front/back bath assembly, then remove the
assembly (Figure 6-55).
6. Disconnect the fluidic and pneumatic lines from the isolation chamber, then remove the
chamber (Figure 6-55).
1Isolation chamber 4Clamp

2Clamp 5RBC shielding plate
3Front/back bath assembly
6-69
Maintenance
7. . Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the front/back bath assembly (Figure 6-56).
1Tapping screw PT3X10 4Ruby Red Cell Counter 70um
2Front bath 5Washer
3Washer 6Back bath

Installation
Install the RBC bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions
Verification
2. Check whether the RBC/PLT cables are connected correctly.
6-70
Maintenance
6.6.2 Replacing the Premix Bath Assembly
Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the premix bath assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the premix bath assembly.
To remove the premix bath assembly from the main unit:
3. Unscrew the connector as shown in Figure 6-57.
4. Disconnect the two fluidic lines from the premix bath cap.
5. Unplug the fluidic line connecting the premix bath to the isolation chamber.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws securing the premix bath
assembly, then remove the assembly (Figure 6-57).
7. Disconnect the fluidic/pneumatic lines from the isolation chamber, then remove the
6-71
Maintenance
Figure 6-57 Removing the premix bath assembly-1
1Isolation chamber 5Panhead screw M4X8
2Clamp 6Front plate
3Connector 7Stopper
4Premix bath assembly
6-72
Maintenance
To disassemble the premix bath assembly:
Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the premix bath assembly (Figure 6-58).
Figure 6-58 Removing the premix bath assembly-2
1HGB bracket 5Premix bath cap
2Connector 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X12
3Premix bath 7Fluidic line connector

4O ring 25X1.8 8Stopper
Installation
Install the premix bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions
6-73
Maintenance
Verification
6-74
Maintenance
6.7 Replacing the HGB Bath Assembly
6.7.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the HGB bath assembly.
6.7.2 Tools
6.7.3 Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the HGB bath assembly.
To remove the HGB bath assembly from the main unit:
3. Remove the outer shielding box of RBC unit as per To remove the outer shielding box
under Section 6.6.1
4. Remove baffle plate 1 and 2 as per To remove the baffle plate 1 and 2 under Section
6.6.1.
5. Remove the main board shielding cover as per To disconnect the RBC/PLT cable
connector under Section 6.6.1.
6. Disconnect the HGB cable connector. Refer to Section 5.2.2.3 for the connector
positions.
8. Disconnect the three fluidic lines from the HGB bath cap.
9. Unplug the fluidic line connecting the HGB bath to the isolation chamber.
10. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the HGB bath assembly,
then remove the assembly (Figure 6-59).
11. Disconnect the fluidic and pneumatic lines from the isolation chamber, then remove the
6-75
Maintenance
Figure 6-59 Removing the HGB bath assembly-1
1Front plate 4Clamp
2Panhead screw M4X8 5Isolation chamber

3HGB bath assembly
6-76
Maintenance
To disassemble the HGB bath assembly:
1. Use the 101 screwdriver to unscrew the ST2.2X10 screw securing the bracket assembly,
then remove the assembly (Figure 6-60).
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M3X12 screws fixing the HGB cap, then
remove the cap and bath (Figure 6-60).
Figure 6-60 Removing the HGB bath assembly-2
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 5Bracket

M3X12
2HGB bath cap 6O ring 6X1

3O ring 25X1.8 7Bracket assembly
4HGB bath 8Cross-recessed panhead tapping

screw ST2.2X10
6-77
Maintenance
6.7.4 Installation
Install the HGB bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
6.7.5 Verification
2. Check whether the HGB cable is connected correctly.
6-78
Maintenance
6.8 Replacing the WBC Bath Assembly

6.8.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the WBC bath assembly.
6.8.2 Toolss
107 cross-recessed screwdriver
6.8.3 Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the WBC bath assembly.
To remove the WBC bath assembly from the main unit:
3. Disconnect the three pneumatics lines from the pinch valve unit.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws securing the pinch valve unit
(Figure 6-61).
5. Disconnect all fluidic lines from the WBC bath unit.
6. Disconnect the connectors of the heating pipe, temperature switch and temperature
sensor from the WBC bath unit.
7. Disconnect the motors and optical sensors connector from the mixing unit.
8. Remove the pinch valve unit.
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws securing the bath unit, then
remove the WBC bath unit and the mixing unit (Figure 6-61).
6-79
Maintenance
Figure 6-61 Removing the WBC bath assembly-1
1Pinch valve unit 4Mixing unit
2Panhead screw M4X8 5Front plate
3WBC bath unit
To disassemble the WBC bath assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the pinch valve unit as per Figure 6-62.
6-80
Maintenance
1Panhead screw M3X8 35mm pinch valve
2Bracket
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M3X6 screws securing the mixing unit, then
remove the unit (Figure 6-63).
1WBC bath unit 3 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X6 (with washer)
2Mixing unit
6-81
Maintenance
3. To remove the two photocoupler brackets, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4
M3X6 screws securing the photocoupler brackets, then remove the brackets (Figure
6-64).
4. To remove the two optical sensors, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X10
screws securing the optical sensors, then remove the sensors (Figure 6-64).
5. The remaining part of the mixing unit is an integral part and not required to be
disassembled (Figure 6-64).
1BASO photocoupler 7 Cross-recessed countersunk

screw M3X6
2Mixing bar 8DIFF sensor
3Turntable 9DIFF mix motor
4 Cross-recessed panhead screw 10Motor support

M1.7X3
5Stopper 11BASO mix motor

6Photocoupler bracket 12Cross-recessed panhead screw
M4X10
6-82
Maintenance
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws securing the mounting plate,
then remove the plate (Figure 6-65).
7. The remaining part of the WBC bath unit is an integral part and not required to be
disassembled (Figure 6-65).
1Temperature switch 4Mounting plate
2Heating pipe 5 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X6 (with washer)
3Temperature sensor
6.8.4 Installation
Install the WBC bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the heating pipe, temperature switch, temperature sensor, motors and sensors to
the cables indicated below. Refer to Figure 6-64 and Figure 6-65 for positions of these
components on the WBC bath assembly.
1 Heating pipe HT-ACT
6-83
Maintenance
2 Temperature switch KT-ACT
3 Temperature sensor ST-ACT

4 DIFF motor M-DIFF
5 DIFF sensor S-DIFF
6 BASO motor M-BASO

7 BASO sensor S-BASO
6.8.5 Verification
2. Check whether the signal lines are connected correctly.
6-84
Maintenance
6.9 Replacing the Reagent Preheating Assembly

6.9.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the reagent preheating assembly.
6.9.2 Toolss
104S-#1(38) cross-recessed screwdriver
Diagonal cutting pliers
6.9.3 Removal
3. Disconnect the connectors of the heating pipe, temperature switch and temperature
sensor from the reagent preheating assembly.
4. Cut the cable ties on the 8 adapters of the reagent preheating assembly using the
diagonal cutting pliers, then remove the 8 adapters.
5. Use the 104S-#1(38) screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X16 screws securing the reagent
preheating assembly, then remove the assembly (Figure 6-66).
6-85
Maintenance
Figure 6-66 Removing the reagent preheating assembly
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 5Reagent preheating assembly

M4X16
2Washer GB93 4 6716 temperature sensor
3Plain washer GB97.1 4 7Temperature switch
4Support 8Heating pipe MD-50AZ 24V/50W
6-86
Maintenance
6.9.4 Installation
Install the reagent preheating assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect the heating pipe, temperature switch and temperature sensor to the cables
indicated below. Refer to Figure 6-66 for positions of these components on the reagent
preheating assembly.

1 Heating pipe HT-PRE
2 Temperature switch KT-PRE
3 Temperature sensor ST-PRE
6.9.5 Verification
1. Check whether all components are installed and fixed in place
6-87
Maintenance
6.10 Replacing the Open Vial Sampling/SRV

Assembly
6.10.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
6.10.2 Toolss
2mm hexagon wrench
5mm hexagon wrench
150mm monkey wrench
6.10.3 Removal
Follow these four procedures to disassemble the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
To remove the open vial sampling/SRV assembly from the main unit:
1. Start up the analyzer and empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
4. Disconnect the optical sensor and step motor connector from the open vial sampling/SRV
assembly.
5. Disconnect the two pneumatic lines from the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
6. Disconnect all fluidic lines from the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws securing the open vial
sampling/SRV assembly, then remove the assembly (Figure 6-67).
6-88
Maintenance
Figure 6-67 Removing the open vial sampling/SRV assembly-1
1Front plate 3Panhead screw M4X8
2Open vial sampling/SRV assembly
To disassemble the open vial sampling/SRV assembly
1. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws fixing the wipe block, then
remove the block and the wipe (Figure 6-68).
2. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the SRV assembly, then
remove the assembly (Figure 6-68).
6-89
Maintenance
1Wipe block 5Socket cap screw M3X12
2SRV assembly 6Fixing block

3Socket cap screw M3X8 7Open vial sampling assembly
4Wipe block
To disassemble the open vial sampling assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X12 screw securing the optical sensor, then
remove the sensor (Figure 6-69).
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws securing the light screen, then
remove the light screen (Figure 6-69).
3. Use the 2mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws securing the locating plate, then
remove the plate (Figure 6-69).
4. Use the 5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M6x16 screws securing the cylinder, then remove
the cylinder (Figure 6-69).
6-90
Maintenance
5. Disconnect the connectors from the cylinder using the 150mm wrench (Figure 6-69).
1Connector 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X12
2Light screen 7Socket cap screw M6X16

3Panhead screw M3X8 8Retaining screw M4X8
4Cylinder SDAD2530-SZ144 9Locating plate
5Optical sensor GP1A05A
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws securing the belt clip, then
remove the clip (Figure 6-70).
7. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X5 screws securing the base, then remove
the base (Figure 6-70). The guide rod is jointed to the base and is not necessary to be
removed.
6-91
Maintenance
1Synchronous belt TBN142MXL025 5Socket cap screw M3X5
2Panhead screw M3X8 6Guide rod
3Belt clip 7 Linear rolling guide

MGN9C1R135ZFCM
4Base
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the step motor, then
remove the belt and the motor (Figure 6-71).
9. Use the 1.5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X5 screws securing the synchronous pulley,
then remove the pulley (Figure 6-71).
6-92
Maintenance
10. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws securing the synchronous pulley
to the pulley axis, then remove the pulley and the axis (Figure 6-71).
11. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws securing the linear rolling guide,
then remove the rolling guide (Figure 6-71).
When installing the linear rolling guide, first secure the upper stop screw
and then lean the rolling guide aside.
Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt by tightening the 4 M3X8 screws
that secure the step motor.
When installing the synchronous pulley of the step motor, keep the motor
axis protruding 3mm from the pulley face.
Apply some lubricant (P/N: A90-000070---) to the pulley axis before installing
the synchronous pulley of the pulley axis.
12. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X5 screws that stops the rolling guide (Figure
6-71).
6-93
Maintenance
1Step motor KH42HM2-951 7Washer
2Socket cap screw M3X5 8Synchronous pulley, 16-teeth, MXL,

6.4 wide
3Panhead screw M3X8 9Pulley axis
4Synchronous pulley P16MXL6.4DF 10Socket cap screw M3X8
5Retaining screw M3X5 11 Linear rolling guide

MGN9C1R135ZFCM
6Synchronous belt TBN142MXL025 12Mounting support
To disassemble the SRV assembly:
1. Remove the SRV tray (Figure 6-72).
6-94
Maintenance
2. Unscrew the spring unit manually (Figure 6-72).
3. Remove the sampling valve, rotor valve and rear fixed valve in sequence (Figure 6-72).
1Spring unit 4Rotor valve

2Sampling valve 5Rear fixed valve
3SRV tray
4. Disassemble the spring unit using the 2.5mm wrench (Figure 6-73).
6-95
Maintenance
1Socket cap screw M3X12 4Spring
2Washer 5Sleeve
3Handle 6Regulating shaft
5. Use the 1.3mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M2.5X4 screws securing the sample probe, then
remove the spacer (Figure 6-74).
6. Manually unscrew the adapter (Figure 6-74).
7. Remove the sample probe and the sealing tube (Figure 6-74).
6-96
Maintenance
1Sample probe 4Adapter
2Retaining screw M2.5X4 5Sealing tube
3Spacer 6Sampling valve
8. Remove other components from the SRV assembly using the 107 screwdriver and
2.5mm wrench (Figure 6-75).
6-97
Maintenance
1Protective cover 5Connection key
2Socket cap screw M3X8 6Fixing block
3Panhead screw M3X8 7Shaft
4Connection board 8Socket cap screw M3X16
6.10.4 Installation
Install the open vial sampling/SRV assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse
order.
Precautions:
1. Adjust the upper/lower locating plates of the cylinder rod after installing the related
components.
2. To adjust the position of the lower locating plate: (Figure 6-76 left):
a) Unscrew the retaining screws securing the upper/lower locating plates.

b) Insert the cylinder regulator into the lower locating hole on the sampling valve (Figure
6-76), then rotate the deflector rod to enable the cylinder regulator to enter the locating hole
6-98
Maintenance
of the rotor valve (Figure 6-76).
Figure 6-76 Adjusting the cylinder position
1Lower locating plate 4Sampling valve
2Deflector rod 5Cylinder rod

3Cylinder regulator 6Upper locating plate
6-99
Maintenance
Figure 6-77 Cylinder regulator
Push the cylinder rod upwards until it stops, move the lower locating plate until it attaches the
deflector rod, then secure the lower locating plate.
To adjust the position of the upper locating plate: (Figure 6-76 right):
1. Insert the cylinder regulator into the upper locating hole on the sampling valve, then
rotate the deflector rod to enable the cylinder regulator to enter the locating hole of the
rotor valve.
2. Push the cylinder rod downwards until it stops, move the upper locating plate until it
attaches the deflector rod, then secure the upper locating plate.
After installing the wipe block to the main unit, power on the analyzer and follow
this procedure to adjust the position of the wipe block:
1. Log on the software using the service personnel s username and password (Figure
6-78).
6-100
Maintenance
Figure 6-78 Login screen
2. CLICK Service on the main screen (Figure 6-79).
3. The Service screen shows. CLICK the Debug key at the lower right corner of the
screen (Figure 6-80).
6-101
Maintenance
Figure 6-80 Service screen
4. The Debug screen shows. CLICK the Wipe Block key (Figure 6-81).
Figure 6-81 Debug screen
5. The wipe debugging screen shows as follows (Figure 6-82).
6-102
Maintenance
Figure 6-82 Wipe block debugging screen
6. CLICK the Initialization key. The wipe block bracket moves to the lower position and
then to the upper position. The reference position of the wipe block is determined.
7. CLICK the Down Place key. The wipe block moves to the lower position. CLICK the
Hold Moment key. The motor axis is locked.
8. Insert the height gauge into the wipe block until attaching the bottom of the wipe (Figure
6-85). Slowly unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws securing the fixing block, move the wipe
block up and down to enable the sample probe to exactly attach the top end of the height
gauge, then secure the 4 screws.
9. Repeat the steps stated above as needed.
10. Exit the wipe block debugging screen. The analyzer performs initialization automatically
(Figure 6-83).
6-103
Maintenance
Figure 6-83 Exiting the wipe block debugging screen
11. Log out the current user (Figure 6-84).
Figure 6-84 Logging out the current user
12. After adjusting the wipe block position, you can proceed to other operations.
6-104
Maintenance
Figure 6-85 Adjusting the wipe block position
1Light screen 5Wipe block
2Socket cap screw M3X12 6Sample probe

3Fixing block 7Wipe block
4Optical sensor GP1A05A 8Height gauge
6-105
Maintenance
14. Connect the optical sensor and step motor to the cables indicated below:

1 Optical sensor S-MS
2 Step motor M-MS
6.10.5 Verification
6-106
Maintenance
6.11 Replacing the autoloader assembly

6.11.1 Replacing the sample transmitting assembly
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the sample transmitting assembly.
Tools
3mm hexagon wrench
Removal
The sample transmitting assembly can be removed in these two procedures:
To remove the sample transmitting assembly from the analyzer:
1. Remove the sample transmitting assembly from the analyzer. (See Section 6.2.5 for
details).
2. Use the 3mm wrench to unscrew the two M4X6 screws fixing the sample transmitting
connection blocks and then remove the two blocks (Figure 6-86).
6-107
Maintenance
Figure 6-86 Assembly drawing of autoloader-1
1 Sample transmitting connection 3Bottom board

block
2Hexagon socket head cap screw 4Lower part of the cover
M4X6
To disassemble the sample transmitting assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X8 screws fixing the transmitting
assembly cover and then remove the cover (Figure 6-87).
6-108
Maintenance
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 2Transmitting assembly cover

M3X8 (with washer)
2. Pull out the connector of the fixed barcode scanner, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew
the 4 little panhead screws M3X8 fixing the scanner bracket and the scanner on the back
backup board unit, and then remove the scanner bracket and the scanner (See Figure
6-88 and Figure 6-89).
6-109
Maintenance
1Vertical sampling unit 5Unloader unit
2Sample transmitting frame 6Horizontal sampling unit
3Back backup board unit 7Deck board unit
4Riser unit
6-110
Maintenance
1Back backup board bracket 7Accumulation tray
2Bracket of barcode scanner 8Fixing board of tray

3Latex baffle 9Sensor fixing board
4PHOTOCOUPLER (reflection) 10Panhead screw M3X8
5 Cross-recessed panhead screw 11Fixed barcode scanner

M2x4
6Latex baffle presser
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the elastic presser and the
shielding board on the riser unit, and then remove the presser and the board (See Figure
6-88 and Figure 6-90).
6-111
Maintenance
1Riser 5Panhead screw M3X8
2Big flat washer GB96 3 6Bushing 3
3Elastic presser 7Induction plate 3
4Shielding board
4. Pull out the photocoupler (reflection) connector, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the
two M3X8 screws fixing the back backup board unit and then remove the unit (See
Figure 6-88 and Figure 6-89).
5. Use the 101 screwdriver and the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the rest parts on the
back backup board unit according to Figure 6-89.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X8 screws fixing the riser unit and then
remove the unit (Figure 6-88 and Figure 6-90).
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the rest parts on the riser unit according to
Figure 6-90.
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X8 screws fixing the front backup board
and then remove the board (Figure 6-88 and Figure 6-91).
6-112
Maintenance
9. Pull out the connector of sensitive switch on the deck unit and the connector of
photocoupler (reflection), use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 5 M3X8 screws fixing
the deck unit and then remove the unit (see Figure 6-88 and Figure 6-91).
10. Use the 101 screwdriver and the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the deck unit according
to Figure 6-91. Note: Do not disassemble the sponge baffle.
1Sample transmitting deck board 5Sensitive switch
2Sponge baffle 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M2x8
3Panhead screw M3X8 7Front backup board
4Photocoupler (reflection)
11. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws fixing the unloader unit, pull out
the connector of optical sensor on the unloader unit, and then remove the unloader unit
(see Figure 6-88and Figure 6-92).
12. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the unloader unit according to Figure 6-92.
6-113
Maintenance
1Panhead screw M3X8 8Short teeth bar
2 Cross-recessed panhead screw 9Gear bed

M4X10
3Optical sensor GP1A05A 10Long teeth bar
4Unloading extension spring 11Lower cover of gear bed

5Induction plate 4 12 Cross-recessed countersunk
head screw M3x8
6Upper cover of gear bed 13Unloading bracket
7Gear shaft
13. Pull out the connector of the stepping motor on the horizontal sampling unit and the
connectors of the 3 optical sensors, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M3X8
screws fixing the horizontal sampling unit, and then remove the horizontal sampling unit
(see Figure 6-88 and Figure 6-93).
14. Use the 1.5mm wrench, 2.5mm wrench and the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the
horizontal sampling unit according to Figure 6-93.
6-114
Maintenance
1Stepping motor PK244M-01B 12Horizontal sampling slider
2Hexagon set screw M3X5 13Hexagon socket head cap screw

M3X5
3Washer 14Bushing
4Driven pulley shaft 15Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X12 (with washer)
5Synchronous pulley.16 teeth MXL 16Pincher

6.4
6Split washer GB/T896-86.4 17Flat washer GB97.1 3
7Guide rail pad 18Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X10
8Optical sensor GP1A05A 19 Synchronous belt

TBN110MXL025
9Guide rail MGN9C1R95ZOCM 20Panhead screw M3X8
10Hexagon socket head cap screw 21Horizontal sampling bracket

M3X8
6-115
Maintenance
11Belt presser 22Synchronous pulley. P16MXL6.4
15. Pull out the connector of the stepper motor on the vertical sampling unit and the
connectors of the two optical sensors, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8
screws fixing the vertical sampling unit, and then remove the unit Figure 6-88 and Figure
6-94).
16. Use the 1.5mm wrench, 2.5mm wrench, the 101 screwdriver and the 107 screwdriver to
disassemble the vertical sampling unit according to Figure 6-94.
1Driven pulley shaft 13Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X8 (with washer)
2Washer 14Bushing 2
3 Synchronous belt 15Left pawl

TBN160MXL025
4Synchronous pulley .P16MXL6.4 16Vertical sampling pusher
6-116
Maintenance
5Stepper motor PK244M-01B 17Optical sensor GP1A05A
6 Cross-recessed panhead screw 18Panhead screw M3X8

M2X8
7Big flat washerGB96 3 19Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X10
8Right pawl 20Guide rail MGN9C1R155ZOCM
9Hexagon set screw M3X5 21Hexagon socket head cap screw

M3X8
10Belt presser 22Vertical sampling bracket
11Hexagon socket head cap screw 23Split washer GB/T896-86.4

M3X5
12Extension spring 24 Synchronous pulley .16 teeth

MXL 6.4 Double baffle
17. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the sample transmitting
adapter board and then remove the board (Figure 6-95).
6-117
Maintenance
1Sample transmitting adapter board 3Panhead screw M3X8
2Sample transmitting bottom board 4
Installation
Install the autoloader assembly according to the removal procedures stated above to in
reverse order.
Precautions and position adjustment during the installation:
1. Installation requirements for the vertical sampling unit:
Lean the guide rail against one side. Note that the stop screw should be installed
first.
Before assemble the synchronous pulley, grease the surface of the driven pulley
shaft.
After the synchronous pulley of the stepper motor is installed, level the end of the
motor shaft with the end surface of the synchronous pulley.
When installing the stepper motor, adjust the extension of the synchronous belt
before tightening the fixing screw.
2. Installation requirements for the horizontal sampling unit:
Lean the guide rail against one side.
Before assembling the synchronous pulley, grease the surface of the driven pulley
shaft.
After the synchronous pulley of the stepper motor is installed, level the end of the
motor shaft with the end surface of the synchronous pulley.
When installing the stepper motor, adjust the extension of the synchronous belt
before tightening the fixing screw.
3. Installation requirements for the unloader unit:
Make sure the teeth bars can move smoothly after the installation. If the resistance
is great, repair them as necessary, otherwise the unit may not be repositioned.
Install the short teeth bar as shown in Figure 6-96.
6-118
Maintenance
Figure 6-96 Initial position of the short teeth bar
4. After the installation, unscrew and adjust the front backup board to minimize the
resistance when the tube rack passes horizontally, and then tighten the screws (Figure
6-95).
5. For adjustment to align the pincher with the tube position, see Section 3.11.3 Adjustment
of autoloader position.
6. See Figure 6-97 for the position and connection of sensors and stepper motors.
Figure 6-97 Position of sensors and the stepper motors
No. Name Cable to be connected

1 Sensor for detecting the full status of the S-FULL
unloader
2 Sensor for detecting the status of unloading S-RST
reset
3 Sensor for detecting the start position of the S-YINT
6-119
Maintenance
autoloader feeding motor

4 Autoloader feeding sensor (left) S-LEFT
5 Fixed-type bar code scanner Sample transport adapter
J6
6 Sensor for detecting the status of the tube S-TUBE
7 Autoloader feeding sensor (right) S-RIGHT
8 Sensor for detecting the stop position of the S-XEND
9 Sensitive switch for autoloader loading S-READY
10 Sample feeding motor M-ASY
11 Sensor for detecting the start position of the S-XINT
12 Sample loading motor M-ASLX
Verification
1. Check whether each part is assembled and tightened well.
2. Check whether each signal line is connected correctly.
3. Startup the analyzer to check.
6.11.2 Replacing the closed-tube sampling assembly

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the closed-tube sampling assembly during the operation.
Tools
Sharp-nose pliers
Removal
The closed-tube sampling assembly can be removed in these procedures:
To remove the closed-tube sampling assembly from the analyzer:
See Section 6.2.5 for details.
To disassemble the closed-tube sampling assembly
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the four M3X8 screws fixing the shielding board and
then remove the board (see Figure 6-98).
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the four M3X8 screws fixing the four fixing legs and
then remove the legs (see Figure 6-98).
6-120
Maintenance
Figure 6-98 Assembly drawing of closed-tube sampler-1
1Panhead screw M3X8 3Fixing leg
2Shielding board 4Supporting bottom board
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the three M3X4 screws fixing the electromagnetic
assembly and then remove the assembly (see Figure 6-99).
6-121
Maintenance
Figure 6-99 Assembly drawing of closed-tube sampler -2
1Supporting bracket 4 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3x4
2Locking pin bushing 5Electromagnetic assembly

M3x6
4. Use the pliers and the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the electromagnetic assembly
according to Figure 6-100.
Be sure to use the cross-recessed panhead screws M3x4 to install the

electromagnetic assembly. Otherwise, the electromagnet may get damaged.
6-122
Maintenance
1Split washer GB/T896-86 2 6Electromagnet bracket
2Compression spring 7 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3x4
3Flat washer GB97.1 3 8Insulating washer 3
4Locking pin 9 Electromagnet KCT20/40L-9

hm-12VDc
5Split pin 2X10
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4x10 screw fixing the optical sensor and then
remove the optical sensor (Figure 6-101).
6. Use the 107 screwdriver and the pliers to unscrew the M3x8 screw and M3 nut (Figure
6-101).
7. Use the 1.5mm wrench to unscrew the two M3X5 screws fixing the gear and then
remove the gear (Figure 6-101).
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3x4 screws and the flat washer 3 that fix
the damp gear and then remove the gear (Figure 6-101).
6-123
Maintenance
1Damp gear FRT-C2-301(G1) 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3x4
2Rotor shaft 7Stainless steel nut M3
3Flat washer 3 8 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3x8
4Hexagon set screw M3X5 9 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4x10
5Gear 10Optical sensor GP1A05A
Use a pair of sharp-nose pliers to remove the two split washers (Figure 6-102).
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3x8 screws (Figure 6-102).
2. Use the 1.5mm wrench to unscrew the two M3X5 screws fixing the rotor shaft (Figure
6-102).
6-124
Maintenance
When installing, keep the same distance between the rotating bed and sides
of the supporting bracket. Lock the rotor shaft with two M3X5 screws to the
two surfaces of the rotor shaft.
3. Pull the rotor shaft out from the rotor bed and then remove the left hand and right hand
torsion springs (Figure 6-102).
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the four M3X8 screws fixing the supporting bracket
and then remove the bracket (Figure 6-102).
1Split washer GB/T896-86.3 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3x8
2Left hand torsion spring 7Supporting bracket
3Rotor shaft 8Right hand torsion spring
4Rotor bed 9Panhead screw M3X8
5Hexagon set screw M3X5 10Supporting bottom board
6-125
Maintenance
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3x4 screws fixing the induction plate 2 and
then remove the plate (Figure 6-103).
6. Use the 101 screwdriver to unscrew the two M2x4 screws that fix the tube fixing bushing
and then remove the bushing (Figure 6-103).
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 4Induction plate 2

M2x4
2Tube fixing bushing 5 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3x4
3Rotor bed
Installation
Install the closed-tube sampling assembly according to the removal procedures stated above
6-126
Maintenance
to in reverse order.
1. Pull the electromagnetic core of the electromagnetic assembly to check whether the
locking pin can move smoothly (Figure 6-103).
2. The cross-recessed panhead screws M3x8 and the stainless steel nut M3 are used to
limit and prevent the rotor bed from sway. After the installation, adjust the M3x8 screws
until they reach the rotor bed and then tighten the M3 nut (Figure 6-98 and Figure 6-101).
3. Connect the optical sensor and the electromagnet to the cables below.
1 Optical sensor S-DOOR

2 Electromagnet DOOR
Verification
3. Startup the analyzer to check.
6-127
Maintenance
6.12 Replacing the autosampler and auto-mixer

assemblies
6.12.1 Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the autosampler and auto-mixer assemblies.
6.12.2 Toolss
4mm hexagon wrench
6mm hexagon wrench
150mm monkey wrench
6.12.3 Removal
The autosampler and auto-mixer assemblies can be removed in three procedures
To remove the autosampler and auto-mixer assemblies from the analyzer.
1. Startup the analyzer to empty the fluidic system, and then shutdown and disconnect the
power cord of the analyzer.
2. Open the lower part of the cover (see Section 6.2.5 for details).
3. Pull out the seven optical sensor connectors and one stepper motor connector from the
two assemblies.
4. Pull out the five air tubes from the cylinders.
5. Pull out the 3 fluidic tubes from the wipe block unit of the autosampler assembly, and
loosen the nut at the end of the pierce needle.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the four M4X8 screws fixing the two assemblies and
then remove the piercing and mixing assembly (Figure 6-104).
6-128
Maintenance
Figure 6-104 Assembly drawing of autosampler and auto-mixer assemblies -1
1 Autosampler and auto-mixer 2Panhead screw M4X8

assemblies
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the five M4X8 screws fixing the autosampler
assembly and then remove the assembly (Figure 6-105).
6-129
Maintenance
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 3Mixing module

M4x10 (with washer)
2Piercing module
To disassemble the autosampler assembly:
1. Unscrew the two set screws and remove the cover (Figure 6-106).
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M4x20 screws, use the 2.5mm wrench to
unscrew the four M3x8 screws and then remove the wipe block unit (Figure 6-106).
6-130
Maintenance
1Set screw 4Hexagon socket head cap screw

M3x8
2Cover 5 Cross-recessed panhead screw
M4x20
3Wipe block unit
3. Use the 107 screwdriver and the 150mm wrench to disassemble the wipe block unit
according to Figure 6-107.
Sharp pierce needle, operate with care.
6-131
Maintenance
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 6Filling connector

M3x5
2Discharging connector 7Lock ring
3O lock ring 4x1.5 8Presser
4Wipe block 9piercing needle

5Plug 10Block
4. Use the 107 screwdriver, the 2.5mm wrench, the 6mm wrench and the 150mm wrench to
disassemble the rest parts of the autosampler according to Figure 6-108.
6-132
Maintenance
1Sample probe bed 12Bent plate
2Spring 13Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X5
3Spring shaft 14Hexagon socket head cap screw

M8X25
4 Cross-recessed panhead screw 15Little spring

M3X20
5Wipe block bed 16Assembly bracket
6 Cross-recessed panhead screw 17Localizer cover
6-133
Maintenance
M4X10 (with washer)
7 Linear guide rail 18Adjusting washer

MGN9C2R175Z0CM
8Hexagon socket head cap screw 19Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3X8 assembly M4X8
9Tube locating shaft 20Upright connector
10Tube locating bed 21Assembly installation bed

11Optical sensor GP1A05A 22cylinder JDAR-40X50
To disassemble the auto-mixer assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X10 screw fixing the optical sensors and then
remove the six optical sensors (Figure 6-109).
2. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the cylinder nut and the connection bushing that fix
the cylinder and then remove the cylinder (Figure 6-109).
3. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the tube connector on the cylinder (Figure 6-109).
4. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the M3X12 screw that fixes the swinging arm, and then
remove the arm (Figure 6-109).
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M3X8 screw that fixes the pinchers, and then
remove the pinchers (Figure 6-109).
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the four M3X8 screws that fix the stepper motor, and
then remove the motor (Figure 6-109).
7. Use the 1.5mm wrench to unscrew the M3X5 screw that fixes the induction block, and
then remove the block (Figure 6-109).
6-134
Maintenance
1Bracket 9Connection bed
2Connection bushing 10Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X10
3Stepper motor PK244M-03B 11Connection bracket
4Panhead screw M3X8 12Hexagon set screw M3X5

5Hexagon socket head cap screw 13Optical sensor GP1A05A
6-135
Maintenance
M3X12
6Swinging arm 14Induction block

7Pincher 15Cylinder CJ2B16-30S
8Pad 16Tube connector SQC4-M5
8. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the cylinder nut and the connection bushing that fix
the cylinder and then remove the cylinder (Figure 6-110).
9. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the tube connector of the cylinder (Figure 6-110).
10. Use the 4mm wrench to unscrew the two M5x6 screws fixing the cylinder bracket and
then remove the bracket (Figure 6-110).
11. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M4x8 screws fixing the connection bent
plate and then remove the plate (Figure 6-110).
6-136
Maintenance
1Panhead screw M4x8 6Hexagon socket head cap screw

M5x6
2Connection bent plate 7Tube connector SQC4-M5
3Connection bed 8Cylinder CJ2L16-125
4Connection bushing 9Bracket

5Cylinder bracket
6-137
Maintenance
12. Use the 2.5mm wrench to disassemble the rest parts of the mixing module according to
Figure 6-111.
1Connection bracket 5 Linear guide rail

MGN9C1R175Z0CM
2 Linear guide rail 6Hexagon socket head cap screw

MGN9C1R75Z0CM M3x8
3Hexagon socket head cap screw 7Connection bed
M3x5
4Bracket
6-138
Maintenance
6.12.4 Installation
Install the autosampler and auto-mixer assemblies according to the removal procedures
stated above to in reverse order.
1. Lean the linear guide rail against one side. Note that the stop screw should be installed
first.
2. Make sure the moving unit can move upward and downward/forward and backward
smoothly.
3. After the installation, adjust the back and front/up and down initial position of the pincher:
Unscrew the two locking nuts on the front end of the cylinder rods and adjust the
connection bushings of cylinders to fix the pincher position (See Figure 6-112 for the
measurement). Then tighten the locking nuts.
Figure 6-112 Pincher adjustment position
4. Adjust the left and right initial position of the pincher (Figure 6-113).
Unscrew the locking screws on the swinging arm, startup the analyzer (you may ignore the
mixing motor error reported), enter the Service Debug Mix unit screen, and
CLICK the Init. button for three times so that the swinging arm is on the vertical position.
6-139
Maintenance
Lean the swinging arm on the stop baffle to the right, place several pieces of paper between
the arm and the baffle, and then tighten the swinging arm. Initialize the mixing motor again to
check the swinging arm position. The swinging arm should move from the initial position to
the stop position and then return the initial position. When the arm is on the initial position,
there should also be tiny clearance between the swinging arm and the stop baffle so that the
arm would not touch the baffle. If not, repeat the procedures above until the position is proper.
Figure 6-113 Pincher adjustment
1Connection bushing 5Baffle
2Locking nut 6Hexagon socket head cap screw

M3x12
3Locking nut 7Swinging arm
4Connection bushing
5. Adjust the tube sampling position (Figure 6-114).

After the installation, the autosampler assembly needs to be adjusted to make sure that the
axis deviation of the pierce needle and the sample tube is no greater than 2mm in the
6-140
Maintenance
diameter direction. The five holes on the assembly bracket are used to adjust the forward and
backward direction of the assembly, and the four big holes and the pad on the assembly
installation bed are used to adjust the up and down/left and right/around position of the
assembly. After the adjustment, glue and then lock the fixing screws.
Parallel the tube to the pierce needle: Push a tube rack manually on the Y feeding direction,
place an empty collection tube in the clipping position (the position leveling the mixing motor),
enter the Service Debug Mix unit screen, and then CLICK the Mix button to
rotate the tube to the sampling position. Use a ruler to check the parallel of the tube and the
pierce needle in the front and side of the tube. If they are not parallel, adjust the relevant
screws until you see that they are parallel.
Adjust to make the tube and the pierce needle coaxial: Remove the cap and plug from an
empty tube, use a gummed paper to envelop the tubing opening and place the tube into the
rack. Enter the Service Debug Mix unit screen, CLICK the
Sample&Mix&pierce button to pierce the tube, and then CLICK the Return tube button
to return the tube to the rack. Adjust the autosampler unit position through the piercing hole.
Repeat the procedures above if necessary until the piercing hole is in the center of the tube
opening.
Figure 6-114 Tube position adjustment
6. Adjust the wipe block (Figure 6-115). Loosen the 4 fixing screws of the connecting
rail block on the wipe block bed (need not remove the screws), place the locating
piece between the wipe block and the cylinder bed, press the wipe block onto the
locating piece, and then secure the 4 screws and remove the locating piece. Ensure
that the press plate at the bottom of the wipe block is not pressed by the locating
6-141
Maintenance
piece.
Figure 6-115 Adjusting the wipe block position
1Fixing screws 2Locating piece
7. You can adjust the manual control screw at the end of the cylinder to control the piercing
depth. See procedures below (Figure 6-116 and Figure 6-118).
Remove the locking nut from the manual control screw at the end of the cylinder, turn the
screw tightly and remove the shielding cover to check. Remove the cap of one tube (keep the
rubber plug, Figure 6-117) and place the tube into the rack. Enter the Service Debug
Mix unit screen, CLICK the Sample&Mix&pierce button to pierce, keep the cylinder in
the piercing position and turn the screw in until the sampling hole of the needle tip is 1-2mm
through the tube plug, tighten the screw with the locking nut and then CLICK the Return
tube button to return the tube to the rack. If tube of specified model is used, the position
adjusted should be as Figure 6-118 shows. If the tube plug is thicker, sample may not be
reached. In case of this, repeat the procedures above to make it.
6-142
Maintenance
Figure 6-116 Pierce needle adjustment-1
Figure 6-117 Tube structure
1Tube body 3Tube cap
2Tube plug
6-143
Maintenance
Figure 6-118 Pierce needle adjustment-2
Refer to Appendix E Tubing in this manual for the tube connection.
See Figure 6-119 for the position and connection of the sensors and motors.
6-144
Maintenance
Figure 6-119 Sensor positions
1 Sensor for ready tube S-PU
2 Manipulator Z coordinate up sensor S-ZUP
3 Manipulator Z coordinate down sensor S-ZDOWN
4 Sample mixing motor M-ASR

5 Rotating direction start sensor S-ARST
6 Rotating direction end sensor S-AREND
7 Manipulator X coordinate backward sensor S-XBACK

8 Manipulator X coordinate forward sensor S-XFRONT
6-145
Maintenance
6.12.5 Verification
3. Check whether the air tubes and fluidic tubes are connected correctly.
4. Startup the analyzer to check the movement of the auto sampler and auto-mixer
assemblies.
6-146
Maintenance
6.13 Replacing the Pneumatic unit

6.13.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the pneumatic unit.
6.13.2 Toolss
101 slotted head screwdriver
300mm monkey wrench
Diagonal cutting pliers
3mm hexagon wrench
6.13.3 Removal
1. Power off the analyzer. Disconnect the power cord, control line of the pneumatic control
board and pressure/vacuum lines from the pneumatic unit.
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 M3X6 screws securing the pneumatic unit
cover, then remove the cover (Figure 6-120).
Figure 6-120 Disassembling the pneumatic unit-1
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 3Pneumatic unit cover

M3X6 (with washer)
2Pneumatic unit
6-147
Maintenance
3. Disconnect the 6 pneumatic lines from the vacuum pump, release valve and screwed
connectors (Figure 6-121).
1Screwed connector SQMH-C6-6 3Release valve AP100-01
2Vacuum pump
4. Disconnect all connectors from the pneumatic control board and 3 connectors from the
power filter.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X10 screw securing the two earth wires
(Figure 6-122).
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the power filter, then
remove the filter (Figure 6-122).
7. Use the 300mm wrench to unscrew the retaining screw securing the release valve, then
remove the valve (Figure 6-122).
8. Use the diagonal cutting pliers to unscrew the 2 screws fixing the control line of the
interface board/pneumatic control board, then remove the line (Figure 6-122).
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws securing the upper spacer, then
6-148
Maintenance
1Locking nut 6 Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X10 (with washer)
2 Cross-recessed countersunk 7 Control line of the interface
screw M3X6 board/pneumatic control board
3Pneumatic unit 8Inch screw #-40X5+8-4
4Release valve AP100-01 9Power filter
5Upper spacer
10. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws securing the pneumatic control
board, then remove the board (Figure 6-123).
11. Use the 3mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M4X6 screws fixing the fan, then remove the fan
(Figure 6-123).
12. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the temperature sensor,
then remove the sensor (Figure 6-123).
6-149
Maintenance
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 5Temperature sensor

M3X6 (washer)
2Pneumatic control board 6Socket cap screw M4X6
3Fan KD1212PMB1-6A 7Upper spacer

M3X6
13. Remove the fuse tubes by prizing the tube bracket with the 101 screwdriver (Figure
6-124).
6-150
Maintenance
1Power filter 3Bracket
2Fuse tube
14. Lift up the vacuum pump to release the studs, then remove the vacuum pump (Figure
6-125).
15. Unscrew the stud from the base plate of the air compressor using the 300mm wrench
(Figure 6-125).
16. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 M5X10 screws securing the base plate and
guide rod, then remove the base plate and guide rod (Figure 6-125).
17. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 M3X6 screws securing the lower spacer, then
18. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws securing the capacitor, then
remove the capacitor (Figure 6-125).
6-151
Maintenance
1 Cross-recessed countersunk 8Base plate of the air compressor

screw M3X6
2Lower spacer 9Pneumatic unit
3Guide rod 10Vacuum pump
4Concussion spring 11Sound isolator

5Stud 12Capacitor bracket
6Capacitor 13Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X8

M5X10
6-152
Maintenance
19. Use the 3mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M4X6 screws fixing the fan, then remove the fan
(Figure 6-126).
20. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M5X10 screws fixing the guide rod, then
remove the rod (Figure 6-126).
1Socket cap screw M4X6 4Lower spacer
2Fan KD1212PMB1 5Guide rod

M5X10
21. Remove the remaining parts from the pneumatic unit using the 107 screwdriver and
300mm wrench (Figure 6-127).
6-153
Maintenance
1 Cross-recessed panhead screw 612V green indicator JI-816L2

M4X10 (with washer)
2Rubber foot PGGL 20 (black) 7Screwed connector SQMH-C6-6
3 Cross-recessed panhead screw 8 Internal tooth washer 14

M3X6 (with washer) GB/T861.1
4Fixing plate 9Nut
5Pneumatic unit frame
6.13.4 Installation
Install the pneumatic unit according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Do not disassemble the sponges from the connections.
2. Install the fan with the text side facing downwards.
6-154
Maintenance
3. Connect all connectors according to the labels.
5. Connect cables to the three slots on the power filter (Figure 6-128).
Figure 6-128 Connecting cables to the power filter
1For yellow/green cable (PE) 3For blue cable (N)
2For brown cable (L)
6.13.5 Verification
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacement
6-155
Maintenance
6.14 Replacing the Ambient Temperature Sensor
6.14.1 Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the temperature sensor.
6.14.2 Toolss
6.14.3 Removal
2. Remove the lower front cover as per Section 6.2.5 .
3. Disconnect the J32 electric connecter from the driver board as Figure 6-129 shows.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws securing the fixing support,
and then remove the fixing support, ambient temperature sensor and connecting line as
Figure 6-129 shows.
6-156
Maintenance
Figure 6-129 Disassembling the ambient temperature sensor
1Cross-recessed screw M3X12 3Ambient temperature sensor and

(with washer) connecting line
2Fixing support
6.14.4 Installation
Install the temperature sensor according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
6.14.5 Verification
2. Check whether the temperature sensor is connected correctly.
6-157
Maintenance
6.15 Replacing the Blood Sensor
6.15.1 Purpose
Because there will be something wrong with the blood sensor when it is used, it should
be replaced during maintenance.
6.15.2 Toolss
6.15.3 Removal
1. Open the top cover (See Section 6.2.4 );
2. Pull out the electric connection-pegs of the blood sensor;
3. Open the upper cover (See Section 6.2.3 );
4. Pull out the pipe wedged in the blood sensor;
5. Loosen and take away the two pan head screws with cross recess M3X6 with 107 cross
screwdriver and take away the blood sensor (Figure 6-130)
Figure 6-130 Disassembling the blood sensor
1Fixing board 2 of blood sensor 4Pipe

2Fixing board of blood sensor 5Pan head screw with cross recess
M3X6
3Blood sensor
6-158
Maintenance
6.15.4 Installation
Reverse the removal procedure to install it.
Note:
1. If the pipe is scratched when it is installed, please replace it.
2. Connect the connector plugs and connectors correctly as instructed in Figure 5-43.
6.15.5 Verification
1. Check whether all components are installed and fixed well.
2. Check whether the electric connection-peg are connected correctly.
3. Check whether the pipes are connected correctly.
4. In auto-sampling mode/closed vial sampling mode, continuously make once normal

sample test and blank background test. If Insufficient aspiration is not prompted of
the normal sample, but Abnormal sample or Insufficient aspiration can be
prompted in background test, then the replacing is normal.
6-159
Maintenance
6.16 Optical system adjustment and troubleshooting

6.16.1 Purpose
Use this procedure to replace and repair the optical system component.
6.16.2 Toolss
Antistatic gloves
Hexagon spanner
Cross-headed screwdriver
Flat-headed screwdriver
Horologic driver
Duke(4K-07) 7 m standard particles
Oscilloscope or oscillometer
6.16.3 Removal and installation

Before removing the optical system component, remove the protective cover of the optical
system. After the component installation, reinstall the protective cover and secure it. The two
steps will not be repeated in the following procedures to remove and install the assemblies.
The optical system consists of the following assemblies: the forward light assembly, flow cell
assembly, back light collimation assembly, beam splitting assembly, back light collection,
assembly and backward detecting assembly.
Wear antistatic gloves when removing boards.
Be sure to turn off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord before
removing boards.
Do not plug out the semiconductor laser unless the power cord is
disconnected. Otherwise, the semiconductor laser will be damaged.
Forward light assembly

Forward light assembly generates laser beam that enter the flow cell. Remove and install the
assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 6-131 for the assembly drawing.
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Pull out the laser power connector of the laser control board; pull out the heater,
temperature sensor and the connector of the over temperature protection switch.
3. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the fixing screws at sides of the forward light
assembly and remove the assembly.
6-160
Maintenance
4. Use the hexagon spanner and cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the screws fixing
the laser assembly and cylindrical mirror assembly separately, and then remove the
assemblies from the forward light oriented assembly.
Figure 6-131 Forward light assembly
1Laser assembly 2Forward light oriented assembly
3Cylindrical mirror assembly
5. According to the malfunction of forward light assembly, replace the whole laser assembly
or the whole cylindrical mirror assembly, install the new one on the forward light assembly
and secure the assembly to the optical support.
6. Reconnect the laser power connector, heater, temperature sensor and the connector of
the over temperature protection switch.
Flow cell assembly

The flow cell assembly is used to create a stable sheath fluid flow, which enable the particle
tested to pass through the flow cell in a certain speed and to interact with the incident laser to
create scattered light. Remove and install the flow cell assembly strictly as instructed below.
1. Power on the analyzer, empty the fluidic lines, then power off the analyzer and
disconnect the power cord of the analyzer.
2. Pull out the sheath fluid filling pipe, sample filling pipe and the waste outlet pipe (at the
outlet of the flow cell). Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the two fixing screws and
take out the flow cell assembly carefully, as Figure 6-132 shows.
6-161
Maintenance
Figure 6-132 Flow cell fluidic connecting tube
1Sample filling tube 2Sheath fluid filling tube
3. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the two connecting screws to divide the flow cell
assembly into two parts: rectifier assembly and detecting assembly, as Figure 6-133
shows.
4. Clean or replace the detecting assembly and liquid transporting assembly as needed.
Figure 6-133 Flow cell structure
1Rectifier assembly 2O ring
3Detecting assembly 4Hexagon screw
5. Install the flow cell assembly as stated above in a reverse order.
Back light collimation assembly

Back light collimation assembly collects the scattered light created by the particle tested and
6-162
Maintenance
allows the light to be tested by the back light detecting assembly. Remove the back light
collimation assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 6-134 for the assembly drawing
of the back light collimation assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord of the analyzer.
2. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the fixing screws at sides of the forward light
assembly and remove the back light collimation assembly.
3. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the two screws fixing the diaphragm lens assembly
to remove the lens assembly.
Figure 6-134 Back light collimation assembly
1Diaphragm lens assembly 2Back light oriented assembly
4. Install the new back light diaphragm lens assembly on the back light oriented assembly to
form a new back light collimation assembly. Ensure that the superface edge of the
diaphragm lens assembly parallels the end face edge of backward oriented assembly.
Install and secure the assembly to the optical support.
Beam splitting assembly

Beam splitting assembly splits the scattered light collected into two parts for the forward low
angle PD assembly and the forward high angle PD assembly. See Figure 6-135 for the
assembly drawing of the beam splitting assembly.
2. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the fixing screws at sides of the beam splitting
assembly and remove the assembly.
3. Use the flat-headed screwdriver to unscrew the two clamping rings. Use the
cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the screws at the top board and the side boards to
6-163
Maintenance
remove the boards.
4. Remove the two protective washers to remove the beam-splitting prism.
5. When replacing or installing a new beam-splitting prism, pay attention to the direction of
the prism (see Figure 6-135). Install the prism as steps above in a reverse order.
Figure 6-135 Beam splitting assembly
1Base of spectroscope 2Side board
3Top board 4Clamping ring
5Washer 6Beam-splitting prism
Back light collection assembly

Back light collection assembly improves the collection efficiency by focusing the scattered
light which has passed the beam splitting assembly on the PD detecting target. It consists of
LAS assembly and MAS assembly.
LAS assembly
2. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the two fixing screws on the LAS assembly and
remove the LAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the two screws fixing the low angle
diaphragm and remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the
two screws fixing the back light focus lens assembly and remove the assembly.
6-164
Maintenance
Figure 6-136 LAS assembly
1Low angle diaphragm 2Back light focus lens assembly
4. Install and secure the low angle diaphragm and the back light focus lens assembly as
needed.
5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon spanner.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon
screws.
MAS assembly
2. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the two screws fixing the MAS assembly and then
remove the MAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the two screws fixing the diaphragm and
then remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the two
screws on back light focus lens assembly and then remove the assembly.
6-165
Maintenance
Figure 6-137 MAS assembly
1High angle diaphragm 2Back light focus lens assembly
4. Install and secure the diaphragm and the back light focus lens assembly as needed.
5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon spanner.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon
screws.
Backward detecting assembly

Backward detecting assembly detects the scattered light signal and inverts it into electrical
signal for sequential processing. It is divided into forward small angle PD assembly and
forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Forward small angle PD assembly
2. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the screws fixing the forward small angle PD
assembly and then remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the two screws fixing the PD board and
remove the shielding box from the forward small angle PD assembly.
6-166
Maintenance
Figure 6-138 Forward small angle PD assembly
1Shielding box 2Low angle pre-amplification board
3PD 4PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the pre-amplification board, remove the PD
cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward small angle PD assembly and then install the
forward small angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Forward middle low angle PD assembly
2. Use the hexagon spanner to unscrew the screws fixing the forward middle low angle PD
assembly and remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the two screws fixing the PD board and
then remove the shielding box from the forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Figure 6-139 Forward middle low angle PD assembly
6-167
Maintenance
1Shielding box 2High angle pre-amplification board
3PD 4PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the pre-amplification board, remove the PD
cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward middle low angle PD assembly and then install
the forward small angle PD assembly to the optical support.
6.16.4 Adjustment
Once any assembly in the optical system has been disassembled, you must adjust the
assembly after the installation. The adjustment procedure can be simplified according to how
the assembly has been disassembled.
The adjustment to the optical system consists of coarse adjustment and fine tuning. The
coarse adjustment roughly aligns every optical assembly and makes them approximately on
the same optical axis, so that signal can be created rapidly when standard particle is run. The
fine tuning aims at ensuring the best position of the optical system. An oscilloscope is used to
observe the signal waveform and the corresponding optical assembly position is finely tuned
so that the signal generated meets the adjustment standard.
Coarse adjustment
According to each optical assembly, the coarse adjustment can be divided into: forward light
assembly adjustment, flow cell adjustment, back light collimation assembly adjustment,
backward collection assembly diaphragm adjustment and backward detecting PD assembly
adjustment.
1. Forward light assembly adjustment
Purpose: Horizontally, the beam is upright to the back light collimation lens. The collimator
emergent far field spot is in the vertical direction.
Principle: The laser beam distributes symmetrically along the optical axis; the reflex fully
covers the incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure: Aim the pin stop of forward light assembly at the optical support, secure the
fixing screw (make sure the forward optical system attaches the optical support and is still
movable). Turn on the power of the laser, and turn the laser assembly to make the far field
spot of the emitting laser vertical. Attach the back light collimation assembly to the pin stop,
use a hexagon spanner to check whether the light reflected from the surface of the back light
collimation lens is on the same axis with the incident light and slowly turn the forward light
assembly to make them on the same axis, and then secure the assembly, as Figure 6-140
shows.
6-168
Maintenance
Figure 6-140 Adjusting forward light assembly
Figure 6-141 Forward optical system aiming schematic diagram
2. Flow cell adjustment
Purpose: Adjusting the flow cell to irradiate the incident light to the surface of the flow cell
vertically.
Principle: That the flow cell is vertical to the incident laser uses the principle of that the reflex
fully covers the incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure: Turn the flow cell into the optical path (do not position the square aperture
detection area in the optical path). Use a hexagon spanner to check whether the light
reflected from the flow cell surface is on the same axis with that of the incident light and
slowly adjust the flow cell slowly to harmonize them and then secure the flow cell.
6-169
Maintenance
Figure 6-142 Flow cell coarse adjustment
3. Back light collimation assembly adjustment
Back light horizontal position adjustment
Purpose: To make sure the forward light and the back light is on the same axis
approximately.
Principle: The beam that goes through the main point of the lens will not change the
transmitting direction.
Procedure:
Step 1: Remove the back light collimation assembly; check whether the beam spot that
passes through the beam-splitting prism and the diaphragm on the MAS assembly is
symmetrical. Adjust the MAS assembly to make the beam spot symmetrical, as shown in
Figure 6-143.
Figure 6-143 Adjustment of the horizontal position of the back light collimation
assembly
Step 2: Move horizontally the back light collimation assembly along the pin stop and observe
the beam spot position on the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the spot is in the
center of the diaphragm (as shown in Figure 6-144), secure the fixing screw of the back light
collimation assembly.
6-170
Maintenance
Figure 6-144 The adjustment of the horizontal position of the back light collimation
assembly is finished
The back light assembly must cling to the pin stop when it is moved.
4. Back light collection assembly adjustment
LAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
Purpose: To obtain the effect of selecting small angle scattered light by positioning the LAS
assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Procedure:
Step 1: Place a piece of white paper with rough surface at the back of the LAS assembly
diaphragm, and adjust the horizontal adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical
horizontally (as shown in Figure 6-145).
Step 2: Adjust the vertical adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical vertically (as
shown in Figure 6-145).
Figure 6-145 Adjustment of the LAS assembly diaphragm
MAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
6-171
Maintenance
Purpose: To obtain the effect of selecting middle and low angle scattered light by positioning
the MAS assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Note: After the adjustment of the horizontal position of the back light collimation assembly is
finished, the position adjustment of the MAS assembly diaphragm is finished. You can secure
the fixing screw.
5. Back light detecting assembly adjustment

Forward small angle PD assembly adjustment
Purpose: To ensure the scattered light from the forward small angle is completely collected
by the PD.
Procedure: Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the forward small angle PD
assembly until the center of the spot emitted from the LAS assembly diaphragm is completely
received by the aperture (as shown in Figure 6-146).
Figure 6-146 Adjustment of the forward small angle PD assembly
1Aperture diaphragm of 2Low angle beam spot

eliminating veiling glare
Forward middle low angle PD assembly adjustment
Adjust the forward middle low angle PD assembly in the same way as adjusting the forward
small angle PD assembly. Ensure that the center of the emitted spot is completely received
by the aperture (as shown in Figure 6-147).
Figure 6-147 Spot from the forward middle low angle PD assembly
1Aperture diaphragm of 2High angle beam spot

eliminating veiling glare
6-172
Maintenance
The above description is a complete coarse adjustment procedure. By the adjustment above,
each assembly is roughly positioned symmetrically along the light axis. The following
describes the fine tuning of the optical system.
Preparation before fine tuning
1. Forward light assembly adjustment
Adjustment of the horizontal position of the flow cell Before fine tuning, the detecting square
aperture of the flow cell should be turned into the optical path. Check the MAS assembly
diaphragm. When the sideline shades of the square aperture distribute symmetrically on the
diaphragm, the flow cell is turned into the optical path, as shown in Figure 6-148.
Figure 6-148 Flow cell position adjustment
1Flow cell horizontal adjusting

knob
2. Adjustment of diaphragm against direct light
After the flow cell horizontal position adjustment is finished, turn the diaphragm against direct
light into the center of the optical path, so that the light intensity shielded by the diaphragm is
the largest and brightest. The following two methods show how to judge whether the
diaphragm is right in this position.
Visual check method
Place a card (with a drawing line on it) on the MAS assembly diaphragm so that the two
sideline shades of the flow cell distribute symmetrically along the drawing line, as shown in
Figure 6-149. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light. When the shielded
spot distributes symmetrically along the drawing line, the adjustment is finished.
6-173
Maintenance
Figure 6-149 Visual check method
1Beam spot 3Drawing line

2Inner aperture of the flow cell 4High angle diaphragm
DC background method
Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward small angle PD
assembly (or the TP43 LASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the
oscilloscope and select DC gear. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light
until minimum LAS DC background is obtained, and then the adjustment is finished.
After the adjustment, secure the two screws of the diaphragm against direct light (as
shown in Figure 6-150).
Figure 6-150 Diaphragm against direct light
1Lock screw of the diaphragm

against direct light
Fine tuning
The purpose of fine tuning is to ensure the optical system is in the optimal position when it
detects the scattered light signal from the designed angle. The fine tuning purpose mainly
consists of the following three parts: (1) To focus the laser on the cell flow; (2) To ensure that
the center of the sample flow basically covers the spot center; and (3) To adjust the scattered
light of the back light assembly from the designed angle. Therefore, the tuning is mainly on
6-174
Maintenance
the forward optical system axial position, the flow cell horizontal position and the position of
the back light collimation assembly.
Before the particle adjustment, at the Main Setup Gain screen, set the values of
WBC_LAS(DIFF), WBC_MAS(DIFF), WBC_LAS(BASO) and WBC_LAS(BASO) to be 60.
1. Adjustment of forward light assembly axial position
Purpose: Ensure that the laser beam focus is on the cell flow.
Procedure:
Step 1:Test the voltage of the tp2vref test point of the laser control board to see whether the
voltage reaches 4V. If not, adjust the variable resistance of the laser control board until the
voltage is 4V.
Step 2: Output the PD assembly pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward
small angle to the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1), set the oscilloscope to be: voltage 50mv/div,
time 500ns/div and AC coupling.
Step 3: Standard particles are to be run as a sample. Add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7 m
standard particles into a 1.5mL centrifugal tube, and then add diluent or deionized water into
the centrifugal tube to 1mL. Use the diluted standard particle solution within 3 hours.
Step 4: Run the standard particles in the open-vial mode normally, check the signal in the
oscilloscope channel 1 and adjust the adjusting knob of the forward light assembly (as shown
in Figure 6-151) in the axial position. When the maximum signal amplitude and stability is
obtained and distributes normally, the pulse width is the narrowest and about 1.3us, as shown
in Figure 6-152, secure the fixing screws of the forward light oriented assembly.
Figure 6-151 Fine tuning of the forward light axial position
1Forward light axial adjustment

knob
6-175
Maintenance
Figure 6-152 Standard particle signal graph output by forward optical system
Note: The sampling time of the DIFF channel is about 10s. To simplify the adjustment and
generate signals quickly, you can adjust the forward optical axis adjusting knob in advance
until the distance between the front end surface of the forward light oriented assembly and
that of the oriented assembly support is about 4mm.
2. Fine tuning of the back light collimation assembly
Purpose: To ensure that the object the PD assembly detects is the scattered light signals of
the designed collect angles.
Procedure:
Step 1: Output the PD assembly pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward
middle and low angle (or the TP44 MASIN test point connected to the signal processing
board) to the oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2), set the oscilloscope to: voltage 100mv/div, time
500ns/div and AC coupling.
Step 2: Run standard particles in the open vial mode normally, adjust the adjusting knob of
the back light collimation assembly and check the signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2.
Secure the set screws of the back light collimation assembly when the pulse peaks reach the
maximum value, the signal are stable and the shake is little.
Step 3: Switch to the channel 1 (CH1) and check whether the signal peaks are 200mv10mv.
If not, adjust the adjustable resistance on the laser control board until the signal peaks of the
CH1 are 200mv10mv.
Step 4:Check whether the signal peaks of the channel 2 (CH2) are above 350mv. If not,
adjust the adjusting knob of the back light collimation assembly and confirm whether the
pulse signal peaks of the CH2 are at the maximum.
3. Fine tuning of the flow cell horizontal position
Purpose: To ensure that the center of the sample flow is positioned in the center of the beam
spot.
Procedure:
Step 1: Run standard particles in the open vial mode, and check whether the signal peaks of
the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1) are stable and shake little.
Step 2: Adjust the flow cell horizontal position until the particle signal peaks displayed on the
oscilloscope are at the maximum and uniform.
6-176
Maintenance
Figure 6-153 Adjustment of the flow cell horizontal position
1Horizontal adjusting knob of the

flow cell
Step 3::After the test, standard particles scattergrams will be obtained, as shown in Figure
6-154:
Figure 6-154 Standard particles scattergrams
CLICK the OpAdjust in the Review menu to enter the OpAdjust screen (the default
screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), then CLICK Calculate to obtain the particle
scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel and then check whether the parameters meet
the following standards:
MAS 0.1max width < 14
MAS 0.1maxCV<4%
LAS 0.1max width < 14
LAS 0.1maxCV<4%
Step 4: When all the standard particle parameters meet the standards above, secure the flow
cell lock screws (as shown in Figure 6-155) and secure the protective cover of the optical
system.
6-177
Maintenance
Figure 6-155 Picture of the secured flow cell
1Lock screws of the flow cell

Now, the adjustment of the optical system is finished.
Gain setup
After the optical system adjustment, you need to reset the WBC channel gains. The gain
setup consists of 2 steps:
1. Standard particle calibration
At the count screen, ensure that the WBC background is under 0.1, and then run the 7 m
standard particles in the open vial mode normally. (If the WBC background exceeds the limit,
please clean the flow cell or do a background check).
Figure 6-156 Standard particles signal graph output by the optical system
6-178
Maintenance
After the test, CLICK the OpAdjust in the Review menu to enter the OpAdjust screen (the
default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), and then CLICK Calculate to obtain
the particle scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel (as shown in Figure 6-156). Enter
into the Peak target boxes:
45 for LAS and 88 for MAS.
Switch to the BASO channel calculation screen, CLICK Calculate and enter into the Peak
target boxes:
58 for LAS and 147 for MAS.
Calculate the gains, enter the gains into the corresponding boxes of the MainSetup
Gain screen and save the results according to the prompt on the screen.
After the gain setup, run the 7m standard particles to verify the gain. The gain of the DIFF
channel should be LAS 454 and MAS 884.
2. Sample verification
After the above standard particle gain setup is finished, run several normal fresh blood
samples. The scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample should be like the images shown in
Figure 6-157:
Figure 6-157 Scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample
If the WBC scattergram results of the normal fresh blood samples are significantly different
from the figure above, please check whether the reagents, reaction system and the fluidic
system work normally.
6-179
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Error code
Code Error Code Error

Mid control board: function
0x00000001 0x0000007C Tube barcode is too long
code error
Mid control board: address Mix & pierce unit:
0x00000002 0x000000C8
code error verification code error
Mid control board: data Mix & pierce unit: command
0x00000003 0x000000C9
length error ID error
Mid control board: Mix & pierce unit: end code
0x00000004 0x000000CA
command ID error error
Mid control board: Mix & pierce unit: data
0x00000005 0x000000CB
verification code error length error
Mid control board: end code Mix & pierce unit: address
0x00000006 0x000000CC
error code error
Mix & pierce unit: function
0x00000007 PDB: FPGA error 0x000000CD
code error
MCB: valve command and Opening sample
0x00000009 0x000000CE
data len not match compartment door failed
Priming and draining time is MP:pinch cylinder front
0x0000000A 0x000000CF
0 photocoupler error
Last priming and draining MP: pinch cylinder rear
0x0000000B 0x000000D0
didn't finish photocoupler error
Priming or draining not MP: pinch cylinder cannot
0x0000000E 0x000000D1
ending in time go forward
Transmit unit: function code MP: pinch cylinder cannot
0x00000064 0x000000D2
error go backward
Transmit unit: address code MP: elevation up
0x00000065 0x000000D3
error photocoupler error
Transmit unit: data length MP: elevation down
0x00000066 0x000000D4
Transmit unit: command ID MP: elevation cylinder
0x00000067 0x000000D5
error cannot go up
Transmit unit: verification MP: elevation cylinder
0x00000068 0x000000D6
code error cannot go down
Transmit unit: end code MP:mix motor start pos.
0x00000069 0x000000D7
7-1
Troubleshooting

AL: load motor to start MP: mix motor stop pos.
0x0000006A 0x000000D8
position failed photocoupler error
AL: load motor to stop MP: mix motor to start
0x0000006B 0x000000D9
position failed position failed
AL: feed motor to start MP: mix motor to stop
0x0000006C 0x000000DA
position failed position failed
AL: feed motor to stop MP: mix motor rotation is
0x0000006D 0x000000DB
position failed not allowed
AL: unloader to start Wipe block motor down
0x0000006E 0x000000DC
position failed photocoupler failed
AL: unloader to stop Wipe block cannot go to up
0x0000006F 0x000000DD
position failed position
AL: loading unit Wipe block cannot go to
0x00000070 0x000000DE
photocoupler error down position
Opening sample
AL: feeding unit counter
0x00000071 0x000000DF compartment door not
error
allowed
Wipe block motor is
0x00000072 AL: loading is not allowed 0x000000E0
working
AL: Unloading is not Wipe block cannot go to up
0x00000073 0x000000E1
allowed now position
MP: cylinder
0x00000074 AL: unloading tray is full 0x000000E2
piercing/photocoupler error
MP: cylinder
0x00000075 Autoloader is working 0x000000E3
return/photocoupler error
AL: feed motor is not MP: pierce cylinder pierce
0x00000076 0x000000E4
initialized is not allowed
MP: pierce cylinder return is
0x00000077 Tube ID read error 0x000000E5
not allowed
MP: mix-unit is not
0x00000079 Rack(s) moved manually 0x000000E9
initialized
MP: pinch cylinder to front
0x0000007A Scanner setup error 0x000000EA
pos. failed
MP: pinch cylinder to rear Laser diode temp. sensor
0x000000EB 0x00000199
pos. failed error
MP: elevation cylinder to up
0x000000EC 0x0000019B PDB: EEPROM error
pos. failed
MP: elevation cylinder to Other unit: function code
0x000000ED 0x000001F4
down pos. failed error
Sample compartment door Other unit: address code
0x000000EE 0x000001F5
opened abnormally error
0x000000EF Manipulator is working 0x000001F6 Other unit: data length error
7-2
Troubleshooting

Syringe unit: function code Other unit: command ID
0x0000012C 0x000001F7
error error
Syringe unit: address code Other unit: verification code
0x0000012D 0x000001F8
error error
Syringe unit: data length
0x0000012E 0x000001F9 Other unit: end code error
error
Syringe unit: command ID
0x0000012F 0x000001FA PDB: U74(AD7928) error
error
Syringe unit: verification
0x00000130 0x000001FB PDB: U75(AD7928) error
code error
0x00000131 Syringe unit: end code error 0x00003001 PDB instruction invalid
0x00000132 Sheath syringe is working. 0x00003002 PDB instruction abnormal
Sheath syringe initialization
0x00000133 0x00003101 No Diluent
failure
Sheath syringe to start
0x00000134 0x00003102 No LH lyse
position failed
Sheath syringe to stop
0x00000135 0x00003103 No LEO(I) lyse
position failed
Sheath syringe
0x00000136 0x00003104 No LEO(II) lyse
photocoupler open-circuited
Sheath syringe
0x00000137 0x00003105 No LBA lyse
photocoupler short-circuited
Sheath syringe aspirates DIL cistern is not fully
0x00000138 0x00003106
too much. primed
Sheath syringe dispenses FCM cistern is not fully
0x00000139 0x00003107
too much. primed
Sheath syringe works too
0x0000013A 0x00003108 Waste cistern is full
fast.
0x0000013B Sheath syringe timeout 0x00003109 WC1 cistern is not drained
0x0000013C Pump syringe is working. 0x0000310A WC2 cistern is not drained
Pump syringe initialization Cleanser cistern is not fully
0x0000013D 0x0000310B
failure primed
Pump syringe moves to
0x0000013E 0x0000310C No Cleanser
start position failure
Pump syringe moves to DIL floater short or outlet
0x0000013F 0x0000310D
stop position failure clogged
Pump syringe photocoupler FCM floater short or outlet
0x00000140 0x0000310E
open-circuited clogged
Pump syringe photocoupler Cleanser floater short or
0x00000141 0x0000310F
short-circuited outlet clogged
Pump syringe aspirates too WC1 cistern dobber
0x00000142 0x00003110
much. open-circuited
7-3
Troubleshooting

Pump syringe dispenses WC2 cistern dobber
0x00000143 0x00003111
too much. open-circuited
Pump syringe works too
0x00000144 0x00003161 Front cover open
fast.
0x00000145 Pump syringe timeout 0x00003162 Laser box open
Temp. unit: function code DIFF stirring motor
0x00000190 0x00003201
error abnormal
Temp. unit: address code BASO stirring motor
0x00000191 0x00003202
error abnormal
Temp. unit: data length
0x00000192 0x00003211 Laser diode temp. error
error
Temp. unit: command ID
0x00000193 0x00003212 Laser diode current error
error
Temp. unit: verification code
0x00000194 0x00003221 Preheat bath temp. error
error
0x00000195 Temp. unit: end code error 0x00003222 Reaction bath temp. error
Temperature out of working
0x00000196 PDB: ADS1210 error 0x00003231
range
Heater: preheat bath temp. Temperature out of
0x00000197 0x00003232
sensor error operating range
Heater: reaction bath temp. 250 KPA pressure
0x00000198 0x00003241
sensor error abnormal
160 KPA pressure
0x00003242 0x00007007 Background abnormal
abnormal
0x00003243 70 KPA pressure abnormal 0x00007008 Sample not enough
-40 KPA pressure
0x00003244 0x00007009 Sample test sensor error
abnormal
-85 KPA pressure
0x00003245 0x00007101 Diluent expired
abnormal
Too many vacancy
0x00003252 0x00007102 LEO(I) expired
positions
RBC peak data len not
0x00005001 0x00007103 LEO(II) expired
equal to width's
0x00005002 SB: parameter setup error 0x00007104 LBA expired
0x00006001 MB: EEPROM error 0x00007105 LH expired
0x00006101 Open DSPI error 0x00007106 Cleanser expired
0x00006102 Read or write DSPI error 0x00007111 Real-time clock error
0x00006103 DSPI data decode error 0xFFFF2000 Network connection error
Network communication
0x00006111 Open COM(PDB) error 0xFFFF2001
error
COM(PDB) ACK timeout Auto communication
0x00006112 0xFFFF2002
operation error
7-4
Troubleshooting

COM(PDB) check sum
0x00006113 0xFFFF2003 IP address collision
error
LAS background voltage
0x00007001 0xFFFF3002 Printer out of paper
abnormal
RBC aperture voltage
0x00007002 0xFFFF3003 ps data generation error
abnormal
0x00007003 HGB error 0xFFFF3005 Auto-print records full.
0x00007004 HGB adjust 0xFFFF3006 Printer paper jammed
0x00007005 RBC clog 0xFFFF3007 Unknown printer error
0x00007006 RBC bubbles
7-5
Troubleshooting
7.2 Errors indicated by error messages

During the operation, if error(s) is detected, the analyzer will display the corresponding error
message on the upper left corner of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels
are discriminated from high to low by background colors, with red for the highest and blue for
the lowest.
CLICK the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up.
CLICK the "Remove error" button as instructed by the help information to remove errors.
Some errors can also be removed as instructed by the manual.
7.2.1 Pressure errors

Error Message Description Possible cause (s)
250 Kpa pressure The pressure valve read 1. The output pressure is not correct;
abnormal is out of the range of inner failure of the pneumatic unit
may exist.
[200, 300].
2. The calibration factor of the output
pressure is not correct, needing to
be recalibrated.
3. Air leakage from one of the air

valves or junction boards.
4. The output pressure of the

regulator deviates from normal
value too much.
5. 3-way connecter of cylinder is

disconnected or leaking.
6. Air leakage from the pressure

filter.
7. Air leakage from the pinch valve.
8. Abnormal pressure sensor.
9. 250Kpa .
160Kpa pressure The pressure valve read 1. Wrong pressure calibration factor,
abnormal is out of the range of needing to be recalibrated.
[128, 188] 2. Air leakage from FCM cistern.
3. Air leakage from damaged gas

valves of GV75 and GV53.
7-6
Troubleshooting
5. Air leakage from tubing connector.
6. Abnormal 250Kpa pressure output.
7. 160Kpa .
70Kpa pressure The pressure valve read 1. Wrong pressure calibration factor,
abnormal is out of the range of [55, needing to be recalibrated.
81] 2. Air leakage from the DIL cistern (or

the cleanser cistern), including
cistern structure and relevant gas
valves.
3. Abnormal air way of the metering

pump; error may occur to gas
valves and the junction board.
5. Air leakage from tube connection.
6. Abnormal 250Kpa pressure output.
7. 70Kpa .
-40Kpa pressure The pressure valve read 1. Wrong pressure calibration factor,
abnormal is out of the range of needing to be recalibrated.
[-46, -30] 2. Air leakage from the WC1 cistern.
3. Damaged GV80.
4. Damaged GV78.
5. Air leakage from tube connection.
6. Abnormal output vacuum.
8. -40Kpa .
-85Kpa pressure The pressure valve read 1. The output vacuum is not correct;
abnormal is out of the range of inner failure of the pneumatic unit
may exist.
[-97, -58]
2. Wrong output vacuum calibration
factor, needing to be recalibrated.
3. Abnormal air way of the metering

pump; error may occur to gas
valves and the junction board.
4. Air leakage from vacuum filter.
5. Air leakage from air way connector.
7-7
Troubleshooting
7.2.2 Reagent errors

No Diluent Out of diluent or poor The diluent has run out.

The sensor is poorly connected or sensor
connecting sensor to
is damaged. Sensor needs changing.
diluent pickup tube.
No LH lyse Out of LH lyse or poor The LH lyse has run out.

connecting sensor to LH
lyse pickup tube.
No LEO(I) lyse Out of LEO(I) lyse or The LEO(I) lyse has run out.
poor connecting sensor
to LEO(I) lyse pickup
tube.
No LEO(II) lyse Out of LEO(II) lyse or The LEO(II) lyse has run out.
to LEO(II) lyse pickup
tube.
No LBA lyse Out of LBA lyse or poor The LBA lyse has run out.
LBA lyse pickup tube.
No Cleanser Out of cleanser or poor The cleanser has run out.

cleanser pickup tube.
Waste cistern is full Waste cistern is full or The waste cistern is full.
to waste pickup tube.
Diluent expired Expired diluent. Expired diluent.

Wrong expiration setting.
LEO(I) expired Expired LEO(I) lyse. Expired LEO(I) lyse.
LEO(II) expired Expired LEO(II) lyse. Expired LEO(II) lyse.
LBA expired Expired LBA lyse. Expired LBA lyse.
LH expired Expired LH lyse. Expired LH lyse.
7-8
Troubleshooting
Cleanser expired Expired cleanser. Expired cleanser.

7.2.3 Hardware errors

Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.
7.2.4 Measurement errors

Background One or more background 1. Contaminated bath(s) or aperture.

abnormal results are outside the 2. The diluent is contaminated or
specification range. expired.
3. Relevant tubing is contaminated.
4. Bubbles or clog is flagged during the

background counting.
5. Interference from the outside occurs

for the shielding is not close enough.
6. If HGB result is out of range, check

whether the HGB blank voltage is
normal.
7. Polluted SRV. SRV needs cleaning.
LAS blank voltage Value is out of the range 1. LAS voltage signal is wrongly
abnormal of 0-400mv. inducted.
2. Flow cell is contaminated.
3. The testing circuit is abnormal.
Aperture voltage Value is out of the range 1. Wrongly reference value setting.
abnormal of 10-14mv. 2. No diluent in the RBC bath.
3. Wrongly installation of aperture or

improper aperture.
4. Relevant testing circuit is abnormal.
5. The aperture is dirty or is clogged

slightly.
HGB error Bland voltage is 0-2V. 1. No diluent in the bath; HGB light is
not turned on; contaminated bath.
2. Expired reagent or contaminated

reagent.
7-9
Troubleshooting
3. Wrongly gain setting.
4. Abnormal HGB light assembly.
5. Relevant testing circuit is abnormal.
RBC clog RBC counting for too 1. Wrongly reference count time setting.
long. 2. Contaminated bath or impurity in the
aperture.
3. Damaged photocoupler of the

volumetric tube.
4. Abnormal -0.04Mpa pressure, maybe

too low.
5. Fluidic valve SV37 or SV38 error.
6. Poor connection from relevant valve

to driver board.
RBC bubbles RBC counting for too 1. Wrongly reference count time setting.
short. 2. Damaged photocoupler of the
volumetric tube.
3. Fluid in the volumetric tube cannot be

emptied successfully due to valve
error.
4. Poor connection from relevant valve

to driver board.
5. Abnormal -0.04Mpa pressure, maybe

too high.
7.2.5 Temperature errors

Error Message Description Possible Cause(s)
Laser temp. Temperature value read is Error occurs to the temperature sensor
inside the optical system.
abnormal out of the range of [15,
Error occurs to the heater inside the
45].
optical system.
Laser current Current value read is out Aging laser.
Wrongly setting or damage of pot of the
abnormal of the range of [20, 50].
laser control board. The board needs
changing.
Preheat bath temp. Abnormal temperature of 1. The preheat bath temperature is out of
abnormal preheat bath or the reference range 30-50. Adjust
the preheat bath temperature to work
temperature sensor
7-10
Troubleshooting
failure of preheat bath. in the required range.
2. Damaged temperature sensor of

preheat bath. The temperature sensor
needs changing.
Reaction bath temp. Abnormal temperature of 1. The reaction bath temperature is out
abnormal reaction bath or of the reference range 30-45.
Adjust the reaction bath temperature
temperature sensor
to work in the required range.
failure of reaction bath.
2. Damaged temperature sensor of
reaction bath. The temperature sensor
needs changing.
Temperature out of Abnormal ambient 1. The ambient temperature is out of the

working range temperature or ambient 15-30 range. Adjust the
operation ambient temperature to the
temperature sensor
required range.
failure.
2. Damaged ambient temperature
sensor. Change the sensor.
Temperature out of Abnormal ambient 1. The operation ambient temperature is

operating range temperature or ambient out of the operating reference range
4-40. Adjust the operation
temperature sensor
ambient temperature to guarantee the
failure.
analyzer to work in the required range.
2. Damaged ambient temperature

sensor. The ambient temperature
sensor needs changing.
7.2.6 Scattergram errors

Error Message Description Possible Cause(s)
Monocytes differential 1. Inaccurate volume of 4-DIFF

result is too high. differential reagents is added in.
Results of most normal LEO(I) should be 1.02ml and LEO(II)
samples are 10% should be 0.32ml.
Monocytes too high
higher. The division 2. Polluted DIFF reaction bath.
between monocytes and 3. Reaction bath temperature is out of
neutrophils is not the normal range. The reaction is not
distinct. sufficient.
WBC analysis results: 1. If cells are differentiated in the DIFF
Spots in DIFF
Spots in DIFF, and scattergram, yet the ghost cells and
No spot in BASO
mostly there are many lymphocytes stick together, the RBC
7-11
Troubleshooting
ghost cells; little or even hemolysis is not sufficient. The

no BASO spot; WBC reason may be that
value is 0 or ***. Hemolysis resistance of the
sample itself.
Inaccurate volume of LEO(I)
and LEO(II) is added in.
Abnormal temperature of the
reaction bath.
2. If cells are not differentiated in the
DIFF scattergram and all cell
subpopulations stick together,
hemolysis may fail. Abnormal mixing
system or the out-of-control reaction
bath temperature causes that the
sample almost does not react with
the lyse.
3. If cells are normally differentiated in
the DIFF scattergram, something is
wrong with the BASO reaction bath.
Check:
whether the sample is added
into the BASO channel normally, to
make sure whether the reagent inlet
steel tube of the BASO bath is
clogged.
whether the sample preparation
during the BASO analysis is normal,
to make sure whether the check
valve before the BASO reaction bath
works normally.
1. Sheath flow is not formed. Many
bubbles enter the WBC channel.
Check:
whether the diluent container is
empty to make sure whether
Spots obtained from
something is wrong with the diluent
normal patient samples
Spots scatter all over sensor.
are randomly scattered
the scattergram whether the FCM bath is empty.
in the scattergram.
If so, perform the procedure of
priming the FCM bath. If priming
fails, something is wrong with the
FCM bath floater sensor. If priming is
normal, check whether the check
valve below the FCM bath works
7-12
Troubleshooting
normally.
1. Calculate the gain of the analyzer
according to the standard particles
position in the scattergram. If the
new gain is normal (the low angle of
the DIFF channel is within 120, high
angle within 100 and the BASO
channel gain still can be set), the
differential of the scattergram is
The scattergrams
good and the shrink problem is
obtained from normal
removed, steps below are
patient samples show
unnecessary.
the scattergram is
Compressed 2. If the gain setup cannot solve the
compressed either
scattergram problem, refer to the optical system
evenly or to one side,.
section in the service manual to
the BASO scattegram is
troubleshoot the analyzer.
obviously cut off and the
3. If the optical system is the new
the total spots are fewer.
version, check whether the heating
of the forward light assembly is
normal and whether there is error
message of laser diode temperature
at the count screen. If the heating is
normal, refer to the optical system
section in the service manual to
troubleshoot the analyzer.
1. Conduct a visual check on the
differential effect of the DIFF
scattergram. If the differential effect
feels not goodFigure 7-8, check:
whether the reagent connection
is correct and whether the reagent is
within the open-vial stability date.
check whether the reaction bath
Most normal patient temperature, the ambient
Frequent flag of left
samples are flagged left temperature and the added volume
shift
shift. of reagents are normal.
If the corresponding fluidic
system is normal, refer to the optical
adjustment process of the device to
readjust the optical system.
2. If the DIFF differential has a good
clustering, the high angle gain of the
DIFF channel can be too small.
Refer to the optical adjustment
7-13
Troubleshooting
process of the device to reset the

high angle gain.
7.2.7 Troubleshooting special errors
1. Dirty flow cell
Error
WBC differential appears bad, neutrophils group scatters obviously, the clustering is not good
and eosinophils become more. After the 10 m standard particles are run in the OV-WB
mode, the clustering of the scattergram is not good and the DIFF scattergram shows
multi-layers, as shown in Figure 7-1:
Figure 7-1 Scattergram of 10 m standard particles (abnormal - dirty flow cell)
Troubleshooting
Open the optical system protective cover, place a piece of white paper behind the
back light collimation lens and observe the shape of the beam spot. You can see
that there are some scattered spots or ringed spots around the beam spot; the
beam spot is not concentrated; the light is not strong; yet the spot position is correct.
Press down the laser interlock switch and fix it with adhesive tapes to close the
switch;
Shut down the analyzer after a background test;
Use dust-free cloth to gently wipe the front and back outer surfaces of the flow cell;
Prepare 2 mL of probe cleanser and dilute the probe cleanser with the diluent in the
ratio of 1:1;
Locate the tube that connects the SV8 and the flow cell and disconnect the tube
from the flow cell, and then plug the tube into a waste container (as shown in Figure
7-2);
7-14
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-2 Cleaning the flow cell
Disconnect the sheath fluid inlet tube from the flow cell bottom (the other end of the
tube is connected to the), connect the syringe with about 2mL of diluted probe
cleanser to the sheath fluid inlet by a tube, and then push the syringe to inject the
probe cleanser into the flow cell. The probe cleanser will be discharged through the
SV8 inlet tube into the waste container (see Figure 7-2).
Rinse the flow cell repeatedly until foreign matters in the flow cell are removed.
Aspirate about 3mL of diluent into the syringe, slowly push the syringe repeatedly to
clear the residual probe cleanser in the flow cell. The waste will be discharged
through the SV8 inlet tube into the waste container. Repeat this step twice;
Remove the syringe and replug the sheath fluid inlet tube;
Start the analyzer;
Clean the WBC bath once at the Main\Service\Clean screen and perform the
Remove bubbles procedure twice;
Do background tests until the background is normal;
Place a piece of white paper behind the back light collimation lens and observe the
shape of the beam spot and you can see that the beam spot is clean and oval, and
there is not any scattered spots or ringed spots around the beam spot;
Verification: Run 10 m standard particles and the clustering of the scattergram is
good (as shown in Figure 7-3).
7-15
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-3 Scattergram of 10 m standard particles (normal)
CLICK Calculate at the Review\OpAdjust screen and check whether the particle
parameters meet the requirement of optical adjustment process. If not, refer to the
optical adjustment process to reset the gains;
Remove the fixed adhesive tapes on the laser interlock switch, reinstall the
protective cover of the laser system and reassemble the analyzer.
2. Asymmetry of the back light diaphragm against direct light
Error
WBC differential becomes bad, neutrophils decrease and lymphocytes increase. After 10 m
standard particles are run in the OV-WB mode, the clustering of the scattergram obviously
becomes bad and the DIFF scattergram at the low angle scatters a lot, as shown in Figure
7-4.
Figure 7-4 Scattergram of 10 m standard particles (abnormal- the diaphragm against

direct light is asymmetrical)
Troubleshooting
Check the flow cell: Open the optical system protective cover, and check whether
there are obvious foreign matters in the flow cell. Place a piece of white paper
behind the back light collimation lens and check the beam spot for scattered spots.
If there are scattered spots, refer to the troubleshooting procedure of Dirty flow cell
7-16
Troubleshooting
above to clean the flow cell with the probe cleanser. Then press down the laser
interlock switch and fix it with adhesive tapes to close the switch;
Use dust-free cloth to gently wipe the front and back outer surfaces of the flow cell;
Check the symmetry. Check whether the beam spot through the high angle
diaphragm is symmetrical and the beam spot through the low angle diaphragm is
symmetrical (see Figure 7-5), and whether the beam spot through the diaphragm
assembly is in alignment with the hole of the PD assembly.
Figure 7-5 Normal beam spot distribution on the high angle diaphragm
Position adjustment of the diaphragm against direct light

The beam spot asymmetry on the high angle diaphragm and the beam spot asymmetry
on the low angle diaphragm are mainly caused by that the diaphragm against direct light
on the back light assembly is out of alignment with the beam center. To solve this
problem, the diaphragm position needs readjustment. See the followings for the
adjustment procedure.
Figure 7-6 Adjusting the diaphragm against direct light
Place a card with a drawing line on it in front of the high angle diaphragm and ensure that
this line is in the center of the sidelines of the flow cell hole. Adjust the knob of the
diaphragm against direct light so that the shielded beam spot distributes symmetrically
along the line on the card. If there is an oscilloscope, use it to check the DC background
of the test point OUT of the LAS pre-amplification board or the DC background of the
LAS test point TP43---LASIN of the signal process board. When the background is
minimum, the diaphragm is right in the middle. During the adjustment, the beam spot
symmetry through the low angle diaphragm needs checking.
7-17
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-7 OUT test point of the pre-amplification board
Note: After releasing the original position of the diaphragm against direct light, check whether the
sidelines of the flow cell hole distributes symmetrically on the diaphragm, as shown in Figure 7-6. If not,
release the lock screw on the flow cell and adjust the flow cell hole position so that the hole is not in the
light path. Check whether the beam spot through the low angle diaphragm is symmetrical. If not, adjust
the position of the low angle diaphragm so that the transmitted beam spot distributes symmetrically, turn
the hole of the flow cell into the light path, ensure that the sidelines of the hole distribute symmetrically
on the diaphragm, and finally adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light, as shown in
Figure 7-6.
Adjust the PD assembly position so that the beam spot through the diaphragm is
symmetrical and is in alignment with the hole of the PD assembly.
Verification-standard particle test: Run 10 m standard particles and the clustering
of the scattergram is good (as shown in Figure 7-3). CLICK Calculate at the
Review\OpAdjust screen and check whether the particle parameters meet the
requirement of optical adjustment process. If not, refer to the optical adjustment
process to reset the gains;
Verification-fresh blood test: Run a normal fresh blood, the WBC number and the
scattergram are normal (see Figure 7-8); obvious division is found among each cell
group in the DIFF scattergram; the neutrophils group is a horizontal oval, and its
upper rim and right rim should be about the 3/4 of the scattergram; the bottom of the
BASO scattergram is smooth and no obvious evidence shows the bottom of the
BASO scattergram is cut out by a line.
Figure 7-8 Scattergram of normal fresh blood (normal)
7-18
Troubleshooting
3. Change of forward light
Error
WBC result is too low; the blood sample scattergram shrinks (see Figure 7-9) and can not be
solved by adjusting the gain; the gain setup is out of the normal range.
Figure 7-9 Shrunk scattergram of normal sample (abnormal- change of forward light)
Troubleshooting
Open the optical system protective cover, press down the laser interlock switch and
fix it with adhesive tapes to close the switch;
Loosen the lock screw of the forward light assembly, adjust the axial adjustment
knob (Generally, the knob should be turned counterclockwise for no more than half
a turn, as shown in the figure below);
7-1 Forward light adjustment direction
Check the symmetry. Check whether the beam spot through the high angle
diaphragm is symmetrical and the beam spot through the low angle diaphragm is
symmetrical (see Figure 7-5), and whether the beam spot through the diaphragm
assembly is in alignment with the hole of the PD assembly;
7-19
Troubleshooting
Verification-standard particle test: Run 10 m standard particles and the clustering

of the scattergram is good (as shown in Figure 7-3). CLICK Calculate at the
Review\OpAdjust screen and check whether the particle parameters meet the
requirement of optical adjustment process. If not, refer to the optical adjustment
process to reset the gains;
Verification-fresh blood test: Run a normal fresh blood, the WBC number and the
scattergram are normal (see Figure 7-8); obvious division is found among each cell
group in the DIFF scattergram; the neutrophils group is a horizontal oval, and its
upper rim and right rim should be about the 3/4 of the scattergram; the bottom of the
BASO scattergram is smooth and no obvious evidence shows the bottom of the
BASO scattergram is cut out by a line.
4. Adjusting of flag sensitivity parameters
The flag sensitivity has its own default values when the analyzer is shipped from the factory.
So when the new analyzer is installed, the sensitivity parameters do not need to be set.
BC5500 has four flag sensitivity parameters which can be adjusted. They are Left shift,
Immature cell, Aty/Abn Lympho and RBC lyse resistance. The default sensitivity values
are 5, 5, 5 and 0 in turn. The variable range of the sensitivity parameters is 010. The
smaller the value, the less the flags. When some certain flag sensitivity value is set as 0, then
this flag will not appear when the sample is analyzed.
We suggest that the service engineer adjust the sensitivity parameters if the following
requirements are needed in daily use
The RBC lyse resistance sensitivity can be set as 5 when the user wants RBC
lyse resistance flag.
If user thinks the flag frequency is too low, then he can increase the sensitivity
parameter of the flag (The sensitivity parameter should not be more than 8).
Users do not hope there are too many flags. If they want to decrease the sensitivity
and would like to take the risk, the flag sensitivity can be decreased. Note: Other
parameters should not be less than 3 except for RBC lyse resistance.
When the flag sensitivity parameters are within 38, the flag frequency can be accepted.
Under this condition, if some kind of flag frequency is too high and it is not the cause of
sample, then there is something wrong with the analyzer which should be inspected.
The flag sensitivity parameters can be set as follows.

Login the Main screen with the service engineer access level (see Figure 3-29)
and click the Setting icon to enter into the Setup screen (see Figure 3-30).
After entering the Setup screen, click the Advanced button to enter the
Advanced Setup screen (see Figure 3-31).
In the Advanced Setup screen, click the Edit button under the Flag Sensitivity
and pops up the Flag Sensitivity message box (see Figure 7-10). Then adjust the
setup parameters of the corresponding flags according to the users requirements.
7-20
Troubleshooting
After the setup is finished, click Ok and quit the Advanced Setup screen.
Figure 7-10 Flag sensitivity parameters setup screen
5. Adjusting of flag sensitivity parameters of the non-diff algorithm

The non-diff algorithm has its own default values when the analyzer is shipped from the
factory. So when the new analyzer is installed, the sensitivity parameters do not need to be
set.
The non-diff algorithm sensitivity parameter of BC5500 has two options which are Strong
and Weak. The default value is Strong.
If non-diff occurs frequently in daily use and the service engineers cannot solve the faults,
then whether the setup can be modified will be decided by R&D.
The non-diff algorithm sensitivity parameters can be set as follows.
Login the Main screen with the service engineer access level (see Figure 3-29)
and click the Setting icon to enter into the Setup screen (see Figure 3-30).
After entering the Setup screen, click the Advanced button to enter the
Advanced Setup screen (see Figure 3-31).
In the Advanced Setup screen, click the pull-down list button under the Non-diff
sensitivity and pops up the pull-down list of the Non-diff sensitivity (see 2). Then
adjust the setup parameters of non-diff algorithm according to the advice provided
by R&D. After the setup is finished, quit the Advanced Setup screen and save
the set parameters.
7-21
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-11 Non-diff sensitivity parameters setup screen
7-22
8 Appendices
A List of Spare Parts
A.1 Spare PCBA

MINDRAY
No. Description
Code/Model
1 Main board 3100-30-41182
2 Signal processing board 3100-30-41184
3 Driver board 3100-30-41186
4 Power board 3100-30-41188
5 Pre-amplifier board (high angle) 3100-30-41190
6 Pre-amplifier board (low angle) 3100-30-41192
7 Laser control board 3100-30-41025
8 Volumetric board 3100-30-41196
9 Indicator board 3100-30-41198
10 Interface board 3100-30-41200
11 Pneumatic unit control board 3100-30-41202
12 Sample transferring adapter panel 3100-30-41204
13 Touchscreen control board 3100-30-41206
14 Sample detecting board 3100-30-41210
A.2 Spare parts

MINDRAY
No. Description
Code/Model
1. Hard disk 80GB 7200rpm Ultra ATA/133RoHS100 0000-10-11106
2. Sensitive switch OMR0N D2SW-01H 3001-10-07060
3. Three-way solenoid valve ASCO458284 3003-20-34941
4. Two-way solenoid valve ASCO458283 3003-20-34942
5. Syringe Assembly 100ul 3100-10-49438
6. HGB bath(Mould MR40704) 3100-20-40704
7. RBC premix bath (Mould MR40797) 3100-20-40797
8. RBC adapter connector 3100-20-40804
9. Piercing probe 3100-30-40709
10. Optical system 3100-30-40710
11. Pneumatic unit (domestic) 3100-30-40711
12. 0.32ml metering pump 3100-30-40738
A-1
Appendices
13. Metering pump (1ml) 3100-30-40739

14. Metering pump (2ml) 3100-30-40740
15. Metering pump (3ml) 3100-30-40741
16. Tube rack assembly 3100-30-40745
17. Metering pump (0.5ml) 3100-30-40748
18. Metering pump (1.5ml) 3100-30-40753
19. Metering pump LEO(I) 3100-30-40758
20. HGB bracket assembly 3100-30-40765
21. Reagent heater assembly 3100-30-40833
22. SRV sampling valve assembly 3100-30-40872
23. SRV rotor valve assembly 3100-30-40873
24. SRV rear fixed valve assembly 3100-30-40874
25. Touchscreen assembly (scheme 1--AU screen) 3100-30-40994
26. Syringe assembly (100ul) 3100-30-41017
27. Syringe assembly (2.5ml) 3100-30-41018
28. Pinch valve assembly (5mm)
29. Pinch valve assembly (8mm) 3100-30-41126
30. Main board 3100-30-41182
31. Signal processing board 3100-30-41184
32. Driver board 3100-30-41186
33. Power board 3100-30-41188
34. Pre-amplifier board (high angle) 3100-30-41190
35. Pre-amplifier board (low angle) 3100-30-41192
36. Laser control board 3100-30-41025
37. Volumetric board 3100-30-41196
38. Indicator board 3100-30-41198
39. Interface board 3100-30-41200
40. Pneumatic unit control board 3100-30-41202
41. Sample transferring adapter panel 3100-30-41204
42. Touchscreen control board 3100-30-41206
43. Waster chamber 1 assembly 3100-30-41231
44. Waster chamber 2 assembly 3100-30-41244
45. Diluent chamber assembly 3100-30-41248
46. WBC reaction bath assembly 3100-30-41261
47. Mixing unit 3100-30-41284
48. Closed tube sampling assembly 3100-30-41323
49. Front cover assembly (blue) 3100-30-49682
50. Front cover assembly (white) 3100-30-49683
51. Disassembly unit 3100-30-49138
52. Fluidic pump assembly 3100-30-49240
53. LEOI lyse cap assembly 3100-30-49451
54. LEOII lyse cap assembly 3100-30-49452
55. LBA lyse cap assembly 3100-30-49453
A-2
Appendices
56. LH lyse cap assembly 3100-30-49454

57. Cap assembly of diluent 3100-30-49455
58. Cap assembly of cleanser 3100-30-49456
59. Cap assembly of waste 3100-30-49495
60. Volumetric tube 3100-30-49667
61. RBC bath 3100-30-49668
62. SWITCH small stroke, roller, action force 16.3gf M07-00097S---
63. Gas valve. Pressure relief valve Rc1/8"AP100-01 M6Q-020001---
64. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-MLX-DC12V M6Q-020002---
65. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-2-MLX-DC12V M6Q-020003---
66. Gas valve. Solenoid valve G010E1-21-MLX-DC12V M6Q-020004---
67. Gas valve. Solenoid valve 0104E1-21-PLL-DC12V (without
M6Q-020005---
connecting line)
68. Gas valve. Fine regulator IR1010-01 M6Q-020006---
69. Gas valve. Vacuum regulator IRV1000-01 M6Q-020007---
70. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-11-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020018---
(without connecting line)
71. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GV010E1-11-21-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020019---
72. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GAV010E1-11-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020020---
73. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GV010E1-21-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020021---
74. Connector, micro, vertical,4ID,M3,LC-0425-M3 M6Q-030009---
75. Air filter.Rc1/8" Automatically drain AF150-A M6Q-070001---
76. Fluidic valve.duckbill checkvalve 1/8"X1/8" M6Y-020003---
77. Syringe 2.5ml M90-100032---
78. Blood sensors 3100-21-49017
A.3 Consumable
MINDRAY Package
No. Description
Code/Model Specification
1. Tubing. PU tube 4mmX2.5mm transparent M6G-020002--- 20M
2. Tubing. PU tube 6mmX4mm transparent M6G-020003--- 20M
3. Tubing. NB tube 6mmX4mm white M6G-020004--- 20M
4. Tubing. MPF tube 2mmX3.5mm M6G-020005--- 50FT
5. Tubing. Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 M6G-020006--- 50FT
6. Tubing. Chemfluor FEP,0.062"ODX0.031"ID M6G-020008--- 50FT
7. Tubing. Silica gel 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/ coil M6G-020009--- 50FT
8. Tubing. PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID M6G-020011--- 25FT
9. Tubing. 3/32"X5/32",S-50-HL AAX02004,Tygon M90-100071--- 100FT
10. Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm, 9023-14,TFS M90-100031--- 100FT
A-3
Appendices
11. Tubing. PTFE,1/32"X1/16",3000074,100ft/coil M90-000026--- 100FT

12. Tubing. FEP, 0.040"X0.066"X100ft 0040-10-32301 100FT
13. Air filter GB8368-98 3001-10-07054 4PCS
14. Centrifugal tube (1.5mL) A21-000013--- 20PCS
15. M-50D diluent A12-000140--- 20L
16. M-50LEO(I) lyse (500ml) A12-000142--- 500ml4
17. M-50LEO(I) lyse (1L) A12-000143--- 1L4
18. M-50LEO(II) lyse (500ml) A12-000145--- 500ml4
19. M-50LH lyse (500ml) A12-000147--- 500ml4
20. M-50LBA lyse (500ml) A12-000149--- 500ml4
21. M-50LBA lyse (1L) A12-000150--- 1L4
22. M-50P probe cleanser A12-000151--- 50ml
23. M-50 cleanser A12-000152--- 1L4
24. M-50LH lyse (1L) A12-000165--- 1L4
A.4 Cable
No. Material Description MINDRAY Code/Model
1. HGB connecting line 2800-20-28762
2. Adapter cable of LCD backlight board 2800-20-28768
3. Connecting line of BNC connector 3001-21-07090
4. Electromagnetic connecting line 3005-21-44873
5. Power cord harness 3100-20-41287
6. Connecting line connecting main board and driver board 3100-20-41288
USB connecting line connecting main board and
7.
interface board 3100-20-41289
Network connecting line connecting main board and
8.
9. TFT display signal line 3100-20-41291
10. Hard disk signal line 3100-20-41292
11. Touchscreen signal line 3100-20-41294
12. Power cord of TFT screen converter 3100-20-41295
13. Hard disk power cord 3100-20-41296
14. Electromagnet control line 3100-20-41297
15. LAS signal line 3100-20-41298
16. MAS signal line 3100-20-41299
17. RBC/PLT signal line 3100-20-41300
18. Volumetric signal line 3100-20-41302
19. HGB signal line 3100-20-41303
20. Fan and connecting line of the analyzer 3100-20-41304
21. Screen earth wire 3100-20-41305
22. Control line of laser heater 3100-20-41306
23. Control line of valve 1 to 16 3100-20-41307
A-4
Appendices

26. Connecting line harness of tube rack transferring unit 3100-20-49003
Connecting line of pneumatic unit compensating
27. 3100-20-49004
capacitor
28. Connecting line of pneumatic unit temperature switch 3100-20-49005
29. Connecting line harness of piercing&mixing unit 3100-20-49006
30. Connecting line harness of motor and sensor 3100-20-49007
Compressor control line connecting driver board and
31.
32. Laser control line of driver board 3100-20-49013
33. Signal line of barcode reader 3100-20-49015
Communication line connecting main board and signal
34.
processing board 3100-20-49019
35. Connecting line harness of autoloader 3100-20-49020
36. Connecting line harness of heater 3100-20-49023
37. Temperature sensor and connecting line 3100-21-49038
38. Laser temperature switch and connecting line 3100-21-41010
39. Laser heater and connecting line 3100-21-41011
40. Splint of electric heating tube 3100-20-49071
41. Heat preserving cotton for forward light 3100-21-49072
42. Adapter cable of ambient temperature sensor 3100-20-49025
43. Adapter cable detecting reagent status 3100-20-49027
44. Power cord of compressor 3100-20-49031
45. Power cord of compressor fan 3100-20-49033
Control line connecting interface board and pneumatic
46.
unit control board 3100-20-49034
47. AC input power cord of pneumatic unit control board 3100-20-49035
48. Control line of pneumatic unit control board 3100-20-49036
49. Fan and connecting line of compressor 3100-20-49037
50. Connecting line of sensitive switch 3100-20-49040
51. Fan and connecting line of power box 3100-20-49042
52. AC input power cord of power board 3100-20-49043
53. Compressor earth wire 3100-20-49047
54. Heater and connecting line (40W) 3100-21-41301
55. Control line of valve 49 to valve 64 3100-21-49000
57. Ambient temperature sensor and connecting line 3100-21-49002
58. AC power socket to switch connecting line 3100-21-49008
59. Control line of valve 49 to valve 64 (open vial unit) 3100-21-49009
61. Control line of valve 65 to valve 80 (open vial unit) 3100-21-49011
62. Connecting line of laser control board semi-conductor 3100-21-49030
A-5
Appendices
laser
63. Control line of pneumatic unit indicator 3100-21-49032
64. Temperature sensor and connecting line 3100-21-49038
65. DC motor and connecting line 3100-21-49039
66. Reflection sensor and connecting line 3100-21-49044
67. Heater and connecting line (50W) 3100-21-49045
68. Temperature switch and connecting line 3100-21-49046
69. Autoloader motor and connecting line 3100-21-49048
70. Mixing motor and connecting line 3100-21-49049
71. Blood sensor connecting line 3100-20-49021
72. Connecting line from driver board to blood sensor board 3100-20-49022
A-6
B List of Wearing Parts
No. Description MINDRAY Code/Model
1. Three-way solenoid valve 3003-20-34941
2. Two-way solenoid valve 3003-20-34941
5. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-MLX-DC12V M6Q-020002---
6. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-2-MLX-DC12V M6Q-020003---
7. Gas valve. Solenoid valve G010E1-21-MLX-DC12V M6Q-020004---
8. Gas valve. Solenoid valve 0104E1-21-PLL-DC12V M6Q-020005---
9. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-11-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020018---
(connector and line are not included)
10. Gas valve. Solenoid valve
GV010E1-11-21-MLX-DC12V (connector and line are M6Q-020019---
not included)
11. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GAV010E1-11-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020020---
12. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GV010E1-21-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020021---
13. Isolation chamber 3003-20-34949
14. PHOTOELEC photo interrupter with connector +5V M08-000789---
15. FUSE SLOW-BLOW 250V 2.5A M07-00067F---
16. FUSE Time-lag 250V 5A M07-00104F---
17. FUSE SLO-BL0 125V 5A 5TT5BEL M07-00069F---
18. Wipe block of open vial unit 3100-20-40864
19. Wipe block assembly of the pierce needle 3100-30-49499
20. Check valve, sealed by medical silicone oil 3100-10-49440
21. Male connector 3100-10-49441
22. Check valve AP19CV0012NN ARK-PLAS BA30-10-15051
23. Air filter GB8368-98 3001-10-07054
24. Premix bath assembly 3100-30-40792
25. Front and back bath assembly 3100-30-40803
B-1
C Fluidic diagram
BC-5500
hydraulic system
C-1
D Pump and Valve Function Table
D.1 Pump and Valve Function Table
Name Function
SV1 Moves together with waste pump to empty HGB bath.
SV2 Moves together with waste pump to empty BASO bath
SV3 Moves together with waste pump to empty DIFF bath
Moves together with the SV5 and SV6 to flush the sample probe; moves
SV4
together with the SV8 to form the path for sheath fluid.
Moves together with the SV6, connected to form the path for discharging
SV5
waste when the WBC unit is cleaned.
Moves together with the SV5, connected to form the path for discharging
waste when the WBC unit is cleaned. Moves together with DP4. GV52,
SV6
GC50 (or GV51), enable the sample in the BASO (or DIFF) bath to enter the
tubing in the front end of the injector tip for counting preparation.
SV7 No function temporarily.
SV8 Moves together with the SV4 to form the sheath fluid path.
SV11 Moves together with waste pump to empty the RBC premix bath.
Moves together with the SV6 and SV5 to clean the tubing in the back end of
SV12
the Sheath syringe.
Moves together with the SV6, SV5 and GV52 to clean the tubing in the front
SV13
end of the sheath syringe.
SV14 Moves together with the GV50 (or GV51) to clean the BASO (or DIFF) bath.
Moves together with the waste pump and GV56 to clean the exterior and
SV15
interior of the sample probe.
Moves together with the waste pump and GV55 to clean the exterior of the
SV16
pierce needle.
SV17 Moves together with the GV57 to clean the inside of the SRV.
Transfers cleanser in the M-50 cistern to each tubing as needed, so that all
SV18
relevant parts are soaked by the cleanser after the shutdown.
Moves together with the GV 79 to fill the reagent in the M-50 reagent
SV19
containers into the M-50 cisterns by vacuum.
During the shutdown, moves together with the SV21 and the pump syringe
SV20
to clean and soak the SRV and clean the interior of the sample probe.
D-1
Appendices
SV21 Moves together with the pump syringe to aspirate sample into the SRV.
SV22 Moves together with DP1 to fill 0.32mL of LEO(II) lyse into the DIFF bath.
SV23 Moves together with DP5 to fill 1mL of HGB lyse into the HGB bath.
Moves together with DP2 to fill the LEO(I) lyse and sample in the SRV
SV24
(0.5mL of fluid totally) into the DIFF bath.
SV25 Moves together with DP6 to clean the suck-back tubing of RBC premix bath.
Moves together with DP3 to fill the LBA lyse and sample in the SRV (0.5mL
SV26
of fluid totally) into the BASO bath.
Moves together with DP7 to fill the diluent and sample in the SRV (2mL of
SV27
fluid totally) into the HGB bath.
Moves together with DP8 and V29 to fill the diluent and first diluted sample
SV28
in the SRV (3mL of fluid totally) into the RBC bath.
Moves together with DP8 to fill the diluent and sample in the SRV (3mL of
SV29
fluid totally) into the RBC premix bath.
SV30 Moves together with DP4 to prepare sample for WBC test.
SV31 No function temporarily,
SV32 No function temporarily,
SV33 Moves together with the SV38 to dry the RBC volumetric tube.
SV34 Clean the back bath of the RBC bath.
SV35 Prime M-50 cleanser into the RBC bath
SV36 Empty the RBC bath.
SV37 By the vacuum created by WC1, enable fluid to enter the volumetric tube.
Moves together with the SV33 to dry the RBC volumetric tube; moves
SV38
together with the SV37 to prime the tubing between SV37 and SV38.
D.2 Gas valve function table

Name Function
Controls the PV8 to stop the connection of the waste pump and other path,
GV49
so that the tubing is soaked by reagents.
Controls the PV11 and works with the SV14 to fill diluent into the BASO
GV50 bath; moves together with the GV52, SV6 and DP4 to discharge sample in
the BASO bath into the tubing in the front end of the injector tip.
Controls the PV 10 and moves together with the SV14 to fill diluent into the
GV51 DIFF bath; works with the GV52, SV6 and DP4 to discharge sample in the
DIFF bath into the tubing in the front end of the injector tip.
Controls the PV9 and moves together with DP4, SV6 and GV50 (or GV51),
GV52 enable the sample in the BASO (or DIFF) bath to enter the tubing in the front
end of the injector tip for counting preparation.
D-2
Appendices
Controls the PV7 and moves together with the GV 75 to fill diluent into the
GV53
FCM cistern by vacuum.
Controls the PV6 and moves together with the GV 76 to fill diluent into the
GV54
DIL cistern by vacuum.
Controls the PV5 and moves together with the waste pump and SV16 to
GV55 form the waste discharge path when the exterior of the pierce needle is
cleaned.
Controls the PV4 and moves together with the waste pump and SV15 to
GV56 form the waste discharge path when the exterior of the sample probe is
cleaned.
Controls the PV3 and moves together with the SV17 to discharge waste of
GV57
the SRV interior cleaning into the WC1 by vacuum.
Controls the PV2 and moves together with the GV80 to discharge waste in
GV58
the WC1 into the external waste container by pressure.
GV59 Controls the PV1 to discharge waste in the WC2 into the WC1 by vacuum.
Push the SRV moving cylinder by pressure to enable the SRV to be at the
GV60
sample discharge status of the open vial mode.
Push the SRV moving cylinder by pressure to enable the SRV to be at the
GV61
sampling status of the open vial mode.
GV62 No function temporarily.
GV65 Pump bubbles into the HGB bath.
GV66 Pump bubbles into the RBC premix bath.
GV67 Pump bubbles into the RBC bath.
Moves together with the GV55 and the waste pump to dry the exterior of the
GV68
pierce needle by pressure.
Controls the DP1 and moves together with SV22 to fill 0.32mL of LEO(II)
GV69
lyse into the DIFF bath.
Controls the DP5 and moves together with SV23 to fill 1mL of HGB lyse into
GV70
the HGB bath.
Controls the DP2 and moves together with SV24 to fill the LEO(I) lyse and
GV71
sample in the SRV (0.5mL of fluid totally) into the DIFF bath.
Controls the DP3 and moves together with SV26 to fill the LBA lyse and
GV72
sample in the SRV (0.5mL of fluid totally) into the BASO bath.
Controls the DP8 and moves together with SV29 to fill the diluent and diluted
GV73
sample in the SRV (3mL of fluid totally) into the RBC premix bath.
Controls the DP7 and moves together with SV27 to fill the diluent and
GV74
sample in the SRV (2mL of fluid totally) into the HGB bath.
GV75 Moves together with the GV53 to fill diluent into the FCM cistern by vacuum.
D-3
Appendices
GV76 Moves together with the GV54 to fill diluent into the DIL cistern by vacuum.
Aspirates the first diluted sample in the RBC premix bath back into the SRV
GV77
by vacuum.
Controls the DP4 and moves together with the SV6 and GV 52 to aspirate
GV78
sample into the tubing of the front end of the injector tip.
Moves together with the SV19 to fill the cleanser into the cleanser cistern by
GV79
vacuum.
Moves together with the GV58 and discharge waste in the WC1 into the
GV80
external waste container by pressure.
GV89 Controls the clipper to move forward and backward.
GV90\GV91 Controls the clipper to move upward and downward.
GV92 Controls the movement of the piercing cylinder.
D.3 Metering pump function table

Name Function
Controlled by the GV69 and moves together with SV22 to fill 0.32mL of
DP1
LEO(II) lyse into the DIFF bath.
Controlled by the GV71 and moves together with SV24 to fill the LEO(I) lyse
DP2
and sample in the SRV (0.5mL of fluid totally) into the DIFF bath.
Controlled by the GV72 and moves together with SV26 to fill the LBA lyse
DP3
and sample in the SRV (0.5mL of fluid totally) into the BASO bath.
Controlled by the GV78 and moves together with the SV6 and GV52 to
DP4
aspirate sample into the tubing of the front end of the injector tip.
Controlled by the GV70 and moves together with SV23 to fill 1mL of HGB
DP5
lyse into the HGB bath.
Controlled by the GV77 and aspirate the first diluted sample in the RBC
DP6
premix bath back into the SRV by vacuum.
Controlled by the GV74 and moves together with SV27 to fill the diluent and
DP7
sample in the SRV (2mL of fluid totally) into the HGB bath.
Controlled by the GV73 and moves together with SV29 to fill the diluent and
diluted sample in the SRV (3mL of fluid totally) into the RBC premix bath.
DP8
Moves together with the SV29 and SV28 to fill the diluted sample into the
RBC bath.
D.4 Pinch valve function table

Name Function
PV1 Controlled by GV59, discharges waste from the WC2 into the WC1
Controlled by GV58, discharges waste from the WC1 into the waste
PV2
container
D-4
Appendices
PV3 Controlled by GV57, discharges waste from SRV cleaning into the WC1
Controlled by GV56, discharges waste from wipe block manual cleaning into
PV4
the waste pump
Controlled by GV55, discharges waste from wipe block auto-cleaning into
PV5
the waste pump
PV6 Controlled by GV54, fills the DIL cistern
PV7 Controlled by GV53, fills the FCM cistern
Controlled by GV49, controls the waste on and off at the inlet of the waste
PV8
pump
Controlled by GV 52, controls the cleaning of the tubing below the WBC
PV9
bath
PV10 Controlled by GV51, controls the flow direction of the liquid in the DIFF bath
Controlled by GV50, controls the flow direction of the liquid in the BASO
PV11
bath
D-5
E Tubing
E.1 SRV fluidics connection
E-1
Appendices
E.2 Airway system connection
Middle separating
board
1-68-450(Waste connector
of rear board)
Two middle size

lines of the
rear board
E-2
Appendices
E.3 Gas valve connection
Small size line fixing on

middle separating board
E-3
Appendices
E.4 Cistern assembly of the rear board
E-4
Appendices
E.5 RBC bath assembly
Insert the tube into the

bath cover 1.5-2mm
E-5
Appendices
E.6 WBC assembly of the front board
E-6
Appendices
E.7 Pinch valve of the bottom board
E-7
Appendices
E.8 Fluidic valve assembly
E-8
Appendices
E.9 Tubing model
No. Model Characteristics
No.1 TYGON tubing S-50-HL ID3/32' Thick tube

TEFLON TUBING ID1.5mm OD2.5mm Teflon tube, thick, inner
No.4 9023-14 diameter 1.5
SILCON 280
0546-100 ID=0.125' Silica gel tube, white,
No.5 OD=0.250' thick
TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' Transparent tube, thick

No.6
Hard tubing ID=2mm Fluidic tube, hard,
No.9
OD=3.6mm transparent, MPF300
No.10 TYGON3350 ABW 00003 ID1/16' OD3/16'

Thick converting tube
Teflon tube, inner
TEFLON TUBING
No.11 diameter 0.7874, outer
ID 0.04' OD 1/16'
diameter 1.6
No.12 Tubing. Silica gel 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil

Thin converting tube
Transparent Teflon tube,
FEP TEFLON
No.13 inner diameter 0.7874,
TUBING ID=.031'OD=.062'
outer diameter 1.6
No.14 Tubing.PharMed,1/16"ODX1/8"ID Thin pinch tube, yellow
PU air tube, inner
No.15 PU0425 (transparent) diameter 2.5, outer
diameter 4
No.16 PN0640 Nylon tube
PU tube, inner diameter
No.17 PU0640 (transparent)
4, outer diameter 6
Teflon tube, inner
TEFLON .031ID X .062OD P/N
No.18 diameter 0.7874, outer
3000074-100
diameter 1.6
E-9
Appendices
E.10 Connecter
Connecter No. Material Description Characteristics
Volumetric tube
C77 Three-way T220/230-1 connector
C11, 24 SQY6-4 Y three-way connector
C3, 10, 22, 23 SQY6 Y three-way connector
C13, 14, 17 SQU4-01 Y two-way connector
C1, 2 SQL6-02 L connector
C6, 7, 12, 15,
16, 18, 19, 20,
21 SQL6-01 L connector
C41, 43, 44,
47, 48, 52, 87, 1/8 TO 3/32 PE BARBED C-W NYL
I connecter-large-middle
88, 89, 107, N430/420-1
108,109,
C30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36,
37, 38, 39, 40,
3/32 PE TEE FITTING-WHITE NYL T420-1 T connecter-middle
46, 62, 63, 76,
78, 83, 99, 100
94, 95
C67, 72, 73,
74, 81, 93, 97,
3/32 PE BARBED COUPLER WHITE NYL
98 I connecter-middle
N420-1
101,
105,106,112
C25, 26, 27,
Connecter.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon Y connecter-middle
75, 84
82, 110,111,
Connecter.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon Y connecter-large
97, C42, C45
C30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36,
37, 38, 39, 40,
3/32 PE TEE FITTING-WHITE NYL T420-1 T connecter-middle
46, 62, 63, 76,
78, 83, 99, 100
94, 95
Connector. Tee large at sides, small in

C79 Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White one end
C4, 5, 28, 29 Connector. Whorl interface,6 Whorl interface
E-10
Appendices
OD,M14,SQMH-C6-6
C102,103, Connector. Tube to

L connecter
104, Tube,Elbow,400Barb,3/32"ID,White
Connector. Elbow
C52 L connecter
Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White
E-11
Appendices
E.11 Tubing connection

Length
Tube No. Start from Stop at
mm
1. 50 tube
1-8-20 C48 C49

Junction board 2P
1-27-20 Air filter
interface
Junction board 1R
1-28-20 Air filter
interface
20
Lower interface of HGB Isolation chamber top
1-64-20
bath interface
1-71-20 M-50 bath C87 M-50 bath
1-72-20 DIL cistern C88 DIL cistern
1-73-20 FCM cistern C89 FCM cistern
Steel tube of RBC shielding
1-60-25 C78 25
bottom board
1-70-40 SV38-C C40 40
Buffer bath near waste
1-29-50 inside the bath
bath 50
1-74-50 NRV5 Diluent connecter C46
1-1-80 NRV3 check valve inlet GV65 gas valve
1-2-80 NRV2 check valve inlet GV66 gas valve
1-3-80 NRV1 check valve inlet GV67 gas valve 80
1-62-80 SV36-1 C40

1-88-180 Connected to 11-17 / 180
1-66-180 Connected to 11-22 /
180
1-67-180 Connected to 11-12 /
1-87-210 Connected to 11-18 / 210
1-61-200 C78 SV36-2 200
Wipe block of closed tube
1-39-210 SV16-1 210
C95
1-9-215 WC2 SV8 215
Connecter of RBC shielding
1-55-230 SV34-2 230
bottom board
RBC premix bath isolation
1-26-250 SV11-1 250
chamber bottom
1-49-370 C71 of SV30 C46 370
1-59-300 SV35-1 C78 300
1-81-345 Connected to 13-2 / 345
E-12
Appendices
1-57-400 C81 C57

M-50 cleanser connecter on 400
1-40-400 SV19-2
the rear board
HGB isolation chamber
1-25-430 SV1-1 430
bottom
1-6-450 M-50 cleanser C41 SV19
1-52-450 SV23-NO M-50LH container
450
Waste connector of the rear
1-68-450 Pressure filter bottom
board
1-50-500 SV24-NO M-50LEO(I) container
1-53-500 SV26-NO M-50LBA container 500
1-69-500 SV35-2 C56
1-51-600 SV22-NO M-50LEO(II) container 600
1-83-90 Connected to 18-11 650
Lower interface of open vial
1-38-700 C67 700
wipe block
1-7-800 SRV M interface C43 41 800
1-84-830 Connected to 11-5 /
1-85-830 Connected to 11-6 / 830
1-86-830 Connected to 11-7 /
1-58-900 C49 SV34-1 900
1-5-1000 WC1 C40 of SV38 1000
2. Thick Teflon tube
48-100 C72 SRV G2

4-10-100 C75 SRV E1 100
4-11-100 C75 SRV I1
M interface of SRV
4-1-150 17 150
sampling valve
4-13-220 F1 of SRV sampling valve Preheat 4 220
4-15-380 SV20-NO C84 380
4-2-450 Preheat 2 C44 450
L interface of SRV rear fixed
4-3-550 SV17-1 550
valve
4-19-460 C52 SV8-1 460
Length
Tube No. Start from Pass Stop at
mm
3.Thick silica gel tube
Bottom of the volumetric

5-22-20 C77 / 20
tube
E-13
Appendices
5-16-30 C46 C45 /

5-20-30 NRV6 Waste connecter C45 / 30
5-21-30 NRV7 Waste connecter C46 /
5-7-50 FCM cistern bottom C44 /
5-8-50 M-50 cleanser bottom C47 /
5-12-50 C82 C111 /
5-13-50 C79 C82 /
50
DIL container connecter
5-17-50 C45 /
on the rear board
Waste connector of
5-23-50 C97 /
the rear board
5-25-30 C111 Waste pump 1 inlet /
30
5-26-30 C111 Waste pump 2 inlet /
5-27-50 C110 Waste pump 1 outlet /
50
5-28-50 C110 Waste pump 1 outlet /
Waste connector of
5-24-90 C97 / 90
the rear board
5-9-150 DIL cistern bottom C48 / 150
5-2-200 WC1 PV1 pinch valve WC2 bottom 200
Waste
5-1-300 WC1 bottom PV2 pinch valve connecter 300
C42
Waste connector of the
5-14-230 C110 / 230
rear board C97
5-4-330 FCM PV7 NRV6 330
SRV M
5-3-400 WC1 PV3 pinch valve interface 400
C43
5-6-450 DIL cistern PV6 NRV7 450
Fixed board
DIFF overflow tube of the lower
5-10-650 / 650
connecter right of the
front board
Fixed board
BASO overflow tube of the lower
5-5-670 / 670
connecter right of the
front board
Wipe block of the
5-15-1100 PV5 C79 1100
pierce needle
Wipe block of the open
5-11-1350 PV4 C82 1350
vial unit
4. 3603 tube
E-14
Appendices
6-1-70 M-50 bath C41 of SV19 /

6-2-70 M-50 bath M-50 bath C87 /
70
6-3-70 DIL cistern C88 DIL cistern /
6-4-70 FCM cistern C89 FCM cistern /
6-5-50 WC2 C50 of SV6 / 50
6-6-25 NRV5 C96 / 25
5. MPF tube
9-22-40 SV38-NC C77 / 40

9-23-40 C77 SV37-2 / 40
9-41-50 C95 C106 / 50
9-20-70 SV33-2 C76 / 70
9-21-190 SV38-NO C76 / 190
9-3-200 SV2-1 BASO bath bottom / 200
9-4-230 SV3-1 DIFF bath bottom / 230
9-5-300 C61 C62 / 300
9-15-400 SV25-NO C72 / 400
9-16-500 SV27-NC C73 / 500
9-19-530 SV28-NO SRV B2 / 530
9-18-600 SV28-NC SRV E1 / 600
9-14-800 SV23-NC HGB cover / 800
NRV4 check valve
9-42-830 GV68 gas valve / 830
inlet
9-40-220 SV21-C 2.5ML syringe / 220
9-43-320 C52 C112 / 320
6.Thick adapter tube
10-18-20 C106 NRV4 outlet / 20

10-1-25 C102 NRV7 outlet /
10-2-25 C103 NRV5 inlet /
10-3-25 C33 NRV5 outlet /
10-4-25 C38 NRV7 inlet /
10-5-25 C30 NRV6 outlet /
25
10-6-25 C104 NRV6 inlet /
10-7-25 C105 NRV4 inlet /
10-8-25 C107 NRV2 outlet /
10-9-25 C108 NRV3 outlet /
10-10-25 C109 NRV1 outlet /
10-17-30 Top outlet of flow cell C52 / 30
10-20-20 C112 SV8-1 / 20
7. 1.0 thin Teflon tube
11-8-20 C62 C63 / 201
E-15
Appendices
Connected to the
11-13-20 / /
BASO bath connector
Connected to the DIFF
11-14-20 / /
bath connector
100ul syringe top
11-9-40 C83 / 401
connector
11-11-300 C63 C93 / 3002
11-1-100 SRV A2 C73 / 1001
RBC premix bath bottom Isolation chamber top
11-23-150 / 1502
connecter interface
Wipe block of closed tube Wipe block of closed
11-26-160 / 1602
C95 tube C94
11-2-200 SRV B2 C74 /
Side connector of the
11-12-200 SV4-1 /
flow cell
Bottom of RBC premix SRV rear fixed valve
11-15-200 /
bath G1
2002
H interface of SRV rear
11-20-200 SV20-C84 /
fixed valve
Lower connecter of
11-22-200 SV6-NC /
flow cell
11-25-200 SRV sampling valve D1 Preheat 8 /
Left steel connector of SRV rear fixed valve
11-17-230 / 2301
DIFF bath D2
Connecter of the
11-10-500 C83 / 5001
bottom of the flow cell
Left connector of RBC
11-5-850 SRV sampling valve I2 /
shielding bottom board
Right connector of RBC 8502
11-6-850 SRV sampling valve E2 /
shielding bottom board
11-7-850 SRV sampling valve A1 HGB cover /
Upper steel connector of SRV rear fixed valve
11-18-260 / 2602
BASO bath F2
SRV sampling valve C
11-21-280 SV20-C84 / 2802
interface
Wipe block of closed tube
11-27-320 Side of pierce needle / 3202
C94
Upper of RBC premix SRV rear fixed valve
11-16-350 / 3502
bath B1
11-24-350 SV18 C47 / /
8.Thin Teflon tube
12-10-15 C13 C31 / 15
E-16
Appendices
12-12-20 C94 C95 / 20

12-11-25 C39 C100 / 25
12-1-40 ASC080-NC end C38 /
12-2-40 ASC079-NO end C39 / 40
12-3-40 ASCO76-NO C100 /
12-5-55 ASCO75-NC C99 / 55
12-4-200 ASCO75-N0 C101 / 200
9. 0.78 transparent thin Teflon tube
Rear connector of pierce

13-2-365 SRV rear fixed valve K / 3652
needle
10.Thin pinch tube
14-2-60 C62 PV10 BASO 601

14-3-60 C63 PV11 DIFF 601
14-4-70 C93 PV9 C83 701
14-1-200 C79 PV8 C81 2002
11. 4mm PU air tube
15-30-100 C36 C37 / 100

15-32-25 C35 C36 /
15-74-25 C38 C39 /
25
15-75-25 C39 C100 /
15-18-25 C99 C31 /
NC end of ASCO76
15-72-30 C99 /
valve
15-34-30 C36 C35 / 30
NO end of GV78
15-31-30 C35 /
gas valve
15-21-50 NO end of ASCO80 C30 / 50
15-29-30 NO end of GV77 valve C36 /
NC end of ASCO79
15-73-30 C31 /
valve 30
NC end of GV78 gas
15-24-30 C104 /
valve
15-1-50 C24 outlet end C25 common end /
NC end of GV49 gas 50
15-8-50 C27 outlet end /
valve
Outlet 0.16mpa
15-12-50 C101 /
regulator
15-17-50 C32 C34 /
E-17
Appendices
NC end of GV77 gas

15-22-50 C32 /
valve
NO end of GV79
15-33-50 C36 /
gas valve
15-70-50 C35 NC end of GV73 gas valve /
15-67-90 WC1 Buffer bath /
15-16-130 C11 outlet end C33 / 130
Outlet of 0.07mpa
15-10-220 C100 /
regulator
15-62-220 GV70 gas valve DP5 gas chamber / 220
Outlet of 0.16mpa NO end of GV75 gas
15-12-250 /
regulator valve 250
15-63-280 GV71 gas valve DP2 gas chamber /
Mixing assembly forward 280
15-56-280 GV89 gas valve and backward moving /
cylinder
15-3-380 C86 outlet end R end of junction board 2 / 380
PS1 sensor of driver
board
C end of GV77 gas
15-40-300 DP6 gas chamber /
valve 300
C end of GV78 gas
15-41-300 DP4 gas chamber /
valve
15-36-300 C35 P end of Junction board 3 /
C end of GV73 gas
15-65-320 DP8 gas chamber / 320
valve
NO end of GV92 gas Upper interface of the
15-54-370 / 370
valve piercing cylinder
15-26-380 C30 R end of junction board /
NC end of GV92 gas Lower interface of the 380
15-55-380 /
valve piercing cylinder
15-4-400 C25 outlet end P end of Junction board 1 / 400
Upper interface of open
15-59-420 GV60 gas valve /
vial sample cylinder
Lower interface of open
15-60-420 GV61 gas valve /
vial sample cylinder
C end of GV92 gas
valve 430
Outlet of 0.07mpa PS3 sensor of driver
15-9-430 /
regulator board
E-18
Appendices
Outlet of 0.16mpa PS2 sensor of driver

15-11-430 /
regulator board
Outlet of vacuum -0.04 PS4 sensor of driver
15-13-430 /
regulator board
15-44-430 GV50 gas valve PV12 /
15-45-430 GV51 gas valve PV11 /
15-46-430 GV52 gas valve PV10 /
15-47-460 GV53 gas valve PV7 / 460
15-48-480 GV54 gas valve PV6 /
Lower interface of mixing
480
15-58-480 GV91 gas valve assembly elevating /
cylinder
C end of GV73 gas
15-65-500 DP8 gas chamber / 500
valve
C end of GV49 gas
15-37-500 PV8 /
valve
PS5 sensor of driver
15-15-530 C11 outlet end /
board 530
C end of ASCO80
15-43-550 Buffer bath /
valve 550
15-14-550 C30 C17 /
15-52-570 GV58 gas valve PV2 / 570
C end of ASCO75
15-38-590 FCM cistern / 590
valve
Upper interface of mixing
15-57-600 GV90 gas valve assembly elevating / 600
cylinder
15-53-650 GV59 gas valve PV1 / 650
C end of ASCO76
15-39-700 DIL cistern / 700
valve
C end of ASCO79
15-42-800 Cleanser cistern / 800
valve
15-71-1500 C37 C102 /
1500
15-27-1500 C34 C103 /
15-76-15 C31 C33 / 15
15-77-50 C32 C34 / 50
12. 6mm PU air tube
17-5-50 C10 outlet end C11 common end / 50

17-6-100 Pressure filter outlet Drier inlet / 100
E-19
Appendices
17-10-110 C23 outlet end 0.16mpa regulator inlet / 110

17-11-110 C23 outlet end 0.07mpa regulator inlet /
Pressure inlet of rear
/ 330
17-1-330 board Pressure filter inlet
Vacuum inlet of rear
/ 450
17-2-450 board C10 common end
Vacuum -0.04 regulator
/ 400
17-4-400 C10 outlet end inlet
17-7-2000 Drier outlet C22 common end / 2000
13. 0.78 thin Teflon tube
Transverse connecter of
18-3-300 SV12-1 / 3002
100ul syringe
18-5-300 SV15-1 C67 /
Upper interface of HGB
18-8-500 NRV3 / 5002
isolation chamber
Upper interface of RBC
18-6-700 NRV2 premix bath isolation / 7002
chamber
NO end of GV73 gas
18-10-2500 C32 / 25002
valve
Wipe block of closed Above wipe block of
18-11-110 / 1102
tube C94 closed tube
Deflation hole of
18-12-50 C94 / 502
piercing needle
Right steel connecter
18-13-1000 Preheat 6 / 10002
of diff bath
14. 50 thin tube
19-1-720 C95 SV16-1 / 720
E-20
P/N: 3100-20-49372(V1.2)

BC 5500

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

BC 5500

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

BC-5500

Auto Hematology Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

This warranty shall not extend to:

any product of any other manufacturer.

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Phone: +86 755 26582479 26582888

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

Table of Contents ............................................................................................................... 1

1 Using this Manual ......................................................................................1-1

2 System Structure .......................................................................................2-1

3 System Installation and Software Upgrade .............................................3-1

of the Autoloader .................................................................................. 3-11

4 Fluidic System ............................................................................................4-1

4.4.2 Sequence of OVPD Measurement.......................................... 4-19

5 Hardware System .......................................................................................5-1

5.7.3 Adjustment and Test Points ..................................................... 5-101

6.5.2 Replacing the Regulating Valve Assembly ................................ 6-31

6.12.5 Verification ............................................................................... 6-146

Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

1.2 Who Should Read This Manual

To use this manual effectively, you need the following:

Basic electronic and pneumatic principles and devices

Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology

Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope

Read pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology

Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology

1.3 How to Find Information

If you want to See

1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual

1.5 Special Terms Used in This Manual

When you read It means

to press the desired item lightly with your finger; or

to scan the number in using the bar-code scanner.

to move the cursor to the character or digit to the left of the

to CLICK the appropriate arrow button to move the scroll bar;

to CLICK the down arrow button of the desired box to display

You will find the following symbols in this manual.

When you see Then

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

read the statement below the symbol . The statement is

When you see It means

CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

WARNING, LASER BEAM

WARNING, HOT SURFACE

PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)

FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE

CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)

USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD) (FOR

CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE

SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached